Magic-The-Gathering-Rules-Archive/045-CMD-Commander 2011.txt

 Magic: The Gathering Comprehensive Rules
These rules are effective as of June 17, 2011.
Introduction
This document is designed for people who’ve moved beyond the basics of the Magic: The Gathering®
game. If you’re a beginning Magic™ player, you’ll probably find these rules intimidating. They’re
intended to be the ultimate authority for the game, and you won’t usually need to refer to them except in
specific cases or during competitive games.
For casual play and most ordinary situations, you’ll find what you need in the Magic: The Gathering basic
rulebook. You can download a copy of that rulebook from the Wizards of the Coast® Magic rules website
at www.wizards.com/Magic/rules. If you’re sure this is where you want to be, keep reading.
This document includes a series of numbered rules followed by a glossary. Many of the numbered rules are
divided into subrules, and each separate rule and subrule of the game has its own number. (Note that
subrules skip the letters “l” and “o” due to potential confusion with the numbers “1” and “0”; subrule
704.5k is followed by 704.5m, then 704.5n, then 704.5p, for example.)
We at Wizards of the Coast recognize that no matter how detailed the rules, situations will arise in which
the interaction of specific cards requires a precise answer. If you have questions, you can get the answers
from us at www.wizards.com/customerservice. Additional contact information is on the last page of these
rules.
In response to play issues and to keep these rules as current as possible, changes may have been made to
this document since its publication. See the Wizards of the Coast Magic rules website at
www.wizards.com/Magic/rules for the current version of the official rules.

 Contents
1. Game Concepts
100. General
101. The Magic Golden Rules
102. Players
103. Starting the Game
104. Ending the Game
105. Colors
106. Mana
107. Numbers and Symbols
108. Cards
109. Objects
110. Permanents
111. Spells
112. Abilities
113. Emblems
114. Targets
115. Special Actions
116. Timing and Priority
117. Costs
118. Life
119. Damage
120. Drawing a Card
121. Counters
2. Parts of a Card
200. General
201. Name
202. Mana Cost and Color
203. Illustration
204. Type Line
205. Expansion Symbol
206. Text Box
207. Power/Toughness
208. Loyalty
209. Hand Modifier
210. Life Modifier
211. Information Below the Text Box
3. Card Types
300. General
301. Artifacts
302. Creatures
303. Enchantments
304. Instants
305. Lands
306. Planeswalkers
307. Sorceries
308. Tribals
309. Planes
310. Vanguards
311. Schemes
4. Zones
400. General

401. Library
402. Hand
403. Battlefield
404. Graveyard
405. Stack
406. Exile
407. Ante
408. Command
5. Turn Structure
500. General
501. Beginning Phase
502. Untap Step
503. Upkeep Step
504. Draw Step
505. Main Phase
506. Combat Phase
507. Beginning of Combat Step
508. Declare Attackers Step
509. Declare Blockers Step
510. Combat Damage Step
511. End of Combat Step
512. Ending Phase
513. End Step
514. Cleanup Step
6. Spells, Abilities, and Effects
600. General
601. Casting Spells
602. Activating Activated Abilities
603. Handling Triggered Abilities
604. Handling Static Abilities
605. Mana Abilities
606. Loyalty Abilities
607. Linked Abilities
608. Resolving Spells and Abilities
609. Effects
610. One-Shot Effects
611. Continuous Effects
612. Text-Changing Effects
613. Interaction of Continuous Effects
614. Replacement Effects
615. Prevention Effects
616. Interaction of Replacement and/or Prevention Effects
7. Additional Rules
700. General
701. Keyword Actions
702. Keyword Abilities
703. Turn-Based Actions
704. State-Based Actions
705. Flipping a Coin
706. Copying Objects
707. Face-Down Spells and Permanents
708. Split Cards
709. Flip Cards

710. Leveler Cards
711. Controlling Another Player
712. Ending the Turn
713. Restarting the Game
714. Subgames
715. Taking Shortcuts
716. Handling Illegal Actions
8. Multiplayer Rules
800. General
801. Limited Range of Influence Option
802. Attack Multiple Players Option
803. Attack Left and Attack Right Options
804. Deploy Creatures Option
805. Shared Team Turns Option
806. Free-for-All Variant
807. Grand Melee Variant
808. Team vs. Team Variant
809. Emperor Variant
810. Two-Headed Giant Variant
811. Alternating Teams Variant
9. Casual Variants
900. General
901. Planar Magic
902. Vanguard
903. Commander
904. Archenemy
Glossary
Credits
Customer Service Information

1. Game Concepts
100. General
100.1. These Magic rules apply to any Magic game with two or more players, including two-player
games and multiplayer games.
100.1a A two-player game is a game that begins with only two players.
100.1b A multiplayer game is a game that begins with more than two players. See section 8,
“Multiplayer Rules.”
100.2. To play, each player needs his or her own deck of traditional Magic cards, small items to
represent any tokens and counters, and some way to clearly track life totals.
100.2a In constructed play (a way of playing in which each player creates his or her own deck
ahead of time), each deck must contain at least sixty cards. A constructed deck may contain any
number of basic land cards and no more than four of any card with a particular English name
other than basic land cards.
100.2b In limited play (a way of playing in which each player gets the same quantity of unopened
Magic product and creates his or her own deck using only this product), each deck must contain
at least forty cards. A limited deck may contain as many duplicates of a card as are included
with the product.
100.3. Some casual variants require additional items, such as specially designated cards, nontraditional
Magic cards, and dice. See section 9, “Casual Variants.”
100.4. Each player may also have a sideboard, which is a group of additional cards the player may use
to modify his or her deck between games of a match.
100.4a In constructed play, sideboards are optional, but must contain exactly fifteen cards if used.
The four-card limit (see rule 100.2a) applies to the combined deck and sideboard.
100.4b In limited play involving individual players, all cards a player opens but doesn’t include in
his or her deck are in that player’s sideboard.
100.4c In limited play involving the Two-Headed Giant multiplayer variant, all cards a team opens
but doesn’t include in either player’s deck are in that team’s sideboard.
100.4d In limited play involving other multiplayer team variants, each card a team opens but
doesn’t include in any player’s deck is assigned to the sideboard of one of those players. Each
player has his or her own sideboard; cards may not be transferred between players.
100.5. There is no maximum deck size.
100.6. Most Magic tournaments (organized play activities where players compete against other players
to win prizes) have additional rules covered in the Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules
(found at www.wizards.com/wpn/Events/Rules.aspx). These rules may limit the use of some
cards, including barring all cards from some older sets.
100.6a Tournaments usually consist of a series of matches. A two-player match usually involves
playing until one player has won two games. A multiplayer match usually consists of only one
game.

100.6b Players can use the Magic Store & Event Locator at www.wizards.com/locator to find
tournaments in their area.
101. The Magic Golden Rules
101.1. Whenever a card’s text directly contradicts these rules, the card takes precedence. The card
overrides only the rule that applies to that specific situation. The only exception is that a player can
concede the game at any time (see rule 104.3a).
101.2. When a rule or effect allows or directs something to happen, and another effect states that it can’t
happen, the “can’t” effect takes precedence.
Example: If one effect reads “You may play an additional land this turn” and another reads
“You can’t play land cards this turn,” the effect that precludes you from playing lands wins.
101.2a Adding abilities to objects and removing abilities from objects don’t fall under this rule. (See
rule 112.10.)
101.3. Any part of an instruction that’s impossible to perform is ignored. (In many cases the card will
specify consequences for this; if it doesn’t, there’s no effect.)
101.4. If multiple players would make choices and/or take actions at the same time, the active player
(the player whose turn it is) makes any choices required, then the next player in turn order (usually
the player seated to the active player’s left) makes any choices required, followed by the remaining
nonactive players in turn order. Then the actions happen simultaneously. This rule is often referred
to as the “Active Player, Nonactive Player (APNAP) order” rule.
Example: A card reads “Each player sacrifices a creature.” First, the active player chooses
a creature he or she controls. Then each of the nonactive players, in turn order, chooses a
creature he or she controls. Then all creatures chosen this way are sacrificed
simultaneously.
101.4a If an effect has each player choose a card in a hidden zone, such as his or her hand or library,
those cards may remain face down as they’re chosen. However, each player must clearly
indicate which face-down card he or she is choosing.
101.4b A player knows the choices made by the previous players when he or she makes his or her
choice, except as specified in 101.4a.
101.4c If a player would make more than one choice at the same time, the player makes the choices
in the order written, or in the order he or she chooses if the choices aren’t ordered.
101.4d If a choice made by a nonactive player causes the active player, or a different nonactive
player earlier in the turn order, to have to make a choice, APNAP order is restarted for all
outstanding choices.
102. Players
102.1. A player is one of the people in the game. The active player is the player whose turn it is. The
other players are nonactive players.
102.2. In a two-player game, a player’s opponent is the other player.
102.3. In a multiplayer game between teams, a player’s teammates are the other players on his or her
team, and the player’s opponents are all players not on his or her team.
103. Starting the Game

103.1. At the start of a game, each player shuffles his or her deck so that the cards are in a random
order. Each player may then shuffle or cut his or her opponents’ decks. The players’ decks become
their libraries.
103.1a In a Commander game, each player puts his or her commander from his or her deck face up
into the command zone before shuffling. See rule 903.6.
103.2. After the decks have been shuffled, the players determine which one of them will choose who
takes the first turn. In the first game of a match (including a single-game match), the players may
use any mutually agreeable method (flipping a coin, rolling dice, etc.) to do so. In a match of
several games, the loser of the previous game chooses who takes the first turn. If the previous game
was a draw, the player who made the choice in that game makes the choice in this game. The player
chosen to take the first turn is the starting player.
103.2a In a game using the shared team turns option, there is a starting team rather than a starting
player.
103.2b In an Archenemy game, these methods aren’t used to determine who takes the first turn.
Rather, the archenemy takes the first turn.
103.3. Once the starting player has been determined, each player sets his or her life total to 20 and
draws a hand of seven cards.
103.3a In a Two-Headed Giant game, each team starts with a shared life total of 30 instead.
103.3b In a Vanguard game, each player sets his or her life total to 20, as modified by the life
modifier of his or her vanguard card, and draws a hand of seven cards, as modified by the hand
modifier of his or her vanguard card.
103.3c In a Commander game, each player sets his or her life total to 40.
103.3d In an Archenemy game, the archenemy sets his or her life total to 40.
103.4. A player who is dissatisfied with his or her initial hand may take a mulligan. First, the starting
player declares whether or not he or she will take a mulligan. Then each other player in turn order
does the same. Once each player has made a declaration, all players who decided to take mulligans
do so at the same time. To take a mulligan, a player shuffles his or her hand back into his or her
library, then draws a new hand of one fewer cards than he or she had before. If a player kept his or
her hand of cards, those cards become the player’s opening hand, and that player may not take any
further mulligans. This process is then repeated until no player takes a mulligan. (Note that if a
player’s hand size reaches zero cards, that player must keep that hand.)
103.4a If an effect allows a player to perform an action “any time [that player] could mulligan,” the
player may perform that action at a time he or she would declare whether or not he or she will
take a mulligan. This need not be in the first round of mulligans. Other players may have
already made their mulligan declarations by the time the player has the option to perform this
action. If the player performs the action, he or she then declares whether or not he or she will
take a mulligan.
103.4b In a multiplayer game, the first time a player takes a mulligan, he or she draws a new hand
of as many cards as he or she had before. Subsequent hands decrease by one card as normal.
103.4c In a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option, first each player on the starting
team declares whether or not he or she will take a mulligan, then the players on each other team
in turn order do the same. Teammates may consult while making their decisions. Then all

mulligans are taken at the same time. A player may take a mulligan even after his or her
teammate has decided to keep his or her opening hand.
103.4d The Commander casual variant uses an alternate mulligan rule. Each time a player takes a
mulligan, rather than shuffling his or her entire hand of cards into his or her library, that player
exiles any number of cards from his or her hand. Then the player draws a number of cards equal
to one less than the number of cards he or she exiled this way. Once a player keeps an opening
hand, that player shuffles all cards he or she exiled this way into his or her library.
103.5. Some cards allow a player to take actions with them from his or her opening hand. Once all
players have kept their opening hands, the starting player may take any such actions in any order.
Then each other player in turn order may do the same.
103.5a If a card allows a player to begin the game with that card on the battlefield, the player taking
this action puts that card onto the battlefield.
103.5b If a card allows a player to reveal it from his or her opening hand, the player taking this
action does so. The card remains revealed until the first turn begins. Each card may be revealed
this way only once.
103.5c In a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option, first each player on the starting
team, in whatever order that team likes, may take such actions. Teammates may consult while
making their decisions. Then each player on each other team in turn order does the same.
103.6. In a Planar Magic game, the starting player moves the top card of his or her planar deck off that
planar deck and turns it face up. (See rule 901, “Planar Magic.”)
103.7. The starting player takes his or her first turn.
103.7a In a two-player game, the player who plays first skips the draw step (see rule 504, “Draw
Step”) of his or her first turn.
103.7b In a Two-Headed Giant game, the team who plays first skips the draw step of their first turn.
103.7c In all other multiplayer games, no player skips the draw step of his or her first turn.
104. Ending the Game
104.1. A game ends immediately when a player wins, when the game is a draw, or when the game is
restarted.
104.2. There are several ways to win the game.
104.2a A player still in the game wins the game if all of that player’s opponents have left the game.
This happens immediately and overrides all effects that would prevent that player from winning
the game.
104.2b An effect may state that a player wins the game. (In multiplayer games, this may not cause
the game to end; see rule 104.3h.)
104.2c In a multiplayer game between teams, a team with at least one player still in the game wins
the game if all other teams have left the game. Each player on the winning team wins the game,
even if one or more of those players had previously lost that game.
104.2d In an Emperor game, a team wins the game if its emperor wins the game. (See rule 809.5.)

 104.3. There are several ways to lose the game.
104.3a A player can concede the game at any time. A player who concedes leaves the game
immediately. He or she loses the game.
104.3b If a player’s life total is 0 or less, he or she loses the game the next time a player would
receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
104.3c If a player is required to draw more cards than are left in his or her library, he or she draws
the remaining cards, and then loses the game the next time a player would receive priority. (This
is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
104.3d If a player has ten or more poison counters, he or she loses the game the next time a player
would receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
104.3e An effect may state that a player loses the game.
104.3f If a player would both win and lose the game simultaneously, he or she loses the game.
104.3g In a multiplayer game between teams, a team loses the game if all players on that team have
lost the game.
104.3h In a multiplayer game, an effect that states that a player wins the game instead causes all of
that player’s opponents to lose the game. (This may not cause the game to end if the limited
range of influence option is being used; see rule 801.)
104.3i In an Emperor game, a team loses the game if its emperor loses the game. (See rule 809.5.)
104.3j In a Commander game, a player that’s been dealt 21 or more combat damage by the same
commander over the course of the game loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See rule
704. Also see rule 903.14.)
104.3k In a tournament, a player may lose the game as a result of a penalty given by a judge. See
rule 100.6.
104.4. There are several ways for the game to be a draw.
104.4a If all the players remaining in a game lose simultaneously, the game is a draw.
104.4b If a game that’s not using the limited range of influence option (including a two-player
game) somehow enters a “loop” of mandatory actions, repeating a sequence of events with no
way to stop, the game is a draw. Loops that contain an optional action don’t result in a draw.
104.4c An effect may state that the game is a draw.
104.4d In a multiplayer game between teams, the game is a draw if all remaining teams lose
simultaneously.
104.4e In a multiplayer game using the limited range of influence option, the effect of a spell or
ability that states that the game is a draw causes the game to be a draw for that spell or ability’s
controller and all players within his or her range of influence. Only those players leave the
game; the game continues for all other players.
104.4f In a multiplayer game using the limited range of influence option, if the game somehow
enters a “loop” of mandatory actions, repeating a sequence of events with no way to stop, the
game is a draw for each player who controls an object that’s involved in that loop, as well as for

each player within the range of influence of any of those players. Only those players leave the
game; the game continues for all other players.
104.4g In a multiplayer game between teams, the game is a draw for a team if the game is a draw
for all remaining players on that team.
104.4h In the Emperor variant, the game is a draw for a team if the game is a draw for its emperor.
(See rule 809.5.)
104.4i In a tournament, all players in the game may agree to an intentional draw. See rule 100.6.
104.5. If a player loses the game, he or she leaves the game. If the game is a draw for a player, he or she
leaves the game. The multiplayer rules handle what happens when a player leaves the game; see
rule 800.4.
104.6. One card (Karn Liberated) restarts the game. All players still in the game when it restarts then
immediately begin a new game. See rule 713, “Restarting the Game.”
105. Colors
105.1. There are five colors in the Magic game: white, blue, black, red, and green.
105.2. An object can be one or more of the five colors, or it can be no color at all. An object is the color
or colors of the mana symbols in its mana cost, regardless of the color of its frame. See rule 202.2.
105.2a A monocolored object is exactly one of the five colors.
105.2b A multicolored object is two or more of the five colors.
105.2c A colorless object has no color.
105.3. Effects may change an object’s color or give a color to a colorless object. If an effect gives an
object a new color, the new color replaces all previous colors the object had (unless the effect said
the object became that color “in addition” to its other colors). Effects may also make a colored
object become colorless.
105.4. If a player is asked to choose a color, he or she must choose one of the five colors.
“Multicolored” is not a color. Neither is “colorless.”
106. Mana
106.1. Mana is the primary resource in the game. Players spend mana to pay costs, usually when
casting spells and activating abilities.
106.1a There are five colors of mana: white, blue, black, red, and green.
106.1b There are six types of mana: white, blue, black, red, green, and colorless.
106.2. Mana is represented by mana symbols (see rule 107.4). Mana symbols also represent mana costs
(see rule 202).
106.3. Mana is produced by the effects of mana abilities (see rule 605). It may also be produced by the
effects of spells, as well as by the effects of abilities that aren’t mana abilities.

106.4. When an effect produces mana, that mana goes into a player’s mana pool. From there, it can be
used to pay costs immediately, or it can stay in the player’s mana pool. Each player’s mana pool
empties at the end of each step and phase.
106.4a If a player passes priority (see rule 116) while there is mana in his or her mana pool, that
player announces what mana is there. If any mana remains in a player’s mana pool after he or
she spends mana to pay a cost, that player announces what mana is still there.
106.5. If an ability would produce one or more mana of an undefined type, it produces no mana instead.
Example: Meteor Crater has the ability “{T}: Choose a color of a permanent you control.
Add one mana of that color to your mana pool.” If you control no colored permanents,
activating Meteor Crater’s mana ability produces no mana.
106.6. Some spells or abilities that produce mana restrict how that mana can be spent, or have an
additional effect that affects the spell or ability that mana is spent on. This doesn’t affect the mana’s
type.
Example: A player’s mana pool contains {1}{U} which can be spent only to pay cumulative
upkeep costs. That player activates Doubling Cube’s ability, which reads “{3}, {T}: Double
the amount of each type of mana in your mana pool.” The player’s mana pool now has
{2}{U}{U} in it, {1}{U} of which can be spent on anything.
106.7. Some abilities produce mana based on the type of mana another permanent or permanents “could
produce.” The type of mana a permanent could produce at any time includes any type of mana that
an ability of that permanent would produce if the ability were to resolve at that time, taking into
account any applicable replacement effects in any possible order. Ignore whether any costs of the
ability could or could not be paid. If that permanent wouldn’t produce any mana under these
conditions, or no type of mana can be defined this way, there’s no type of mana it could produce.
Example: Exotic Orchard has the ability “{T}: Add to your mana pool one mana of any
color that a land an opponent controls could produce.” If your opponent controls no lands,
activating Exotic Orchard’s mana ability will produce no mana. The same is true if you and
your opponent each control no lands other than Exotic Orchards. However, if you control a
Forest and an Exotic Orchard, and your opponent controls an Exotic Orchard, then each
Exotic Orchard could produce {G}.
106.8. If an effect would add mana represented by a hybrid mana symbol to a player’s mana pool, that
player chooses one half of that symbol. If a colored half is chosen, one mana of that color is added
to that player’s mana pool. If a colorless half is chosen, an amount of colorless mana represented by
that half’s number is added to that player’s mana pool.
106.9. If an effect would add mana represented by a Phyrexian mana symbol to a player’s mana pool,
one mana of the color of that symbol is added to that player’s mana pool.
106.10. To “tap a permanent for mana” is to activate a mana ability of that permanent that includes the
{T} symbol in its activation cost. See rule 605, “Mana Abilities.”
106.11. One card (Drain Power) puts all mana from one player’s mana pool into another player’s mana
pool. (Note that these may be the same player.) This empties the former player’s mana pool and
causes the mana emptied this way to be put into the latter player’s mana pool. Which permanents,
spells, and/or abilities produced that mana are unchanged, as are any restrictions or additional
effects associated with any of that mana.
107. Numbers and Symbols
107.1. The only numbers the Magic game uses are integers.

107.1a You can’t choose a fractional number, deal fractional damage, gain fractional life, and so on.
If a spell or ability could generate a fractional number, the spell or ability will tell you whether
to round up or down.
107.1b Most of the time, the Magic game uses only positive numbers and zero. You can’t choose a
negative number, deal negative damage, gain negative life, and so on. However, it’s possible for
a game value, such as a creature’s power, to be less than zero. If a calculation or comparison
needs to use a negative value, it does so. If a calculation that would determine the result of an
effect yields a negative number, zero is used instead, unless that effect sets a player’s life total to
a specific value, doubles a player’s life total, sets a creature’s power or toughness to a specific
value, or otherwise modifies a creature’s power or toughness.
Example: If a 3/4 creature gets -5/-0, it’s a -2/4 creature. It assigns 0 damage in combat.
Its total power and toughness is 2. You’d have to give it +3/+0 to raise its power to 1.
Example: Viridian Joiner is a 1/2 creature that says “{T}: Add an amount of {G} to your
mana pool equal to Viridian Joiner’s power.” An effect gives it -2/-0, then its ability is
activated. The ability adds no mana to your mana pool.
107.1c If a rule or ability instructs a player to choose “any number,” that player may choose any
positive number or zero, unless something (such as damage or counters) is being divided or
distributed among “any number” of players and/or objects. In that case, a nonzero number of
players and/or objects must be chosen if possible.
107.2. If anything needs to use a number that can’t be determined, either as a result or in a calculation,
it uses 0 instead.
107.3. Many objects use the letter X as a placeholder for a number that needs to be determined. Some
objects have abilities that define the value of X; the rest let their controller choose the value of X.
107.3a If a spell or activated ability has a mana cost, alternative cost, additional cost, and/or
activation cost with an {X}, [-X], or X in it, and the value of X isn’t defined by the text of that
spell or ability, the controller of that spell or ability chooses and announces the value of X as
part of casting the spell or activating the ability. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”) While a spell
is on the stack, any X in its mana cost equals the announced value. While an activated ability is
on the stack, any X in its activation cost equals the announced value.
107.3b If a player is casting a spell that has an {X} in its mana cost, the value of X isn’t defined by
the text of that spell, and an effect lets that player cast that spell while paying neither its mana
cost nor an alternative cost that includes X, then the only legal choice for X is 0. This doesn’t
apply to effects that only reduce a cost, even if they reduce it to zero. See rule 601, “Casting
Spells.”
107.3c If a spell or activated ability has an {X}, [-X], or X in its cost and/or its text, and the value of
X is defined by the text of that spell or ability, then that’s the value of X while that spell or
ability is on the stack. The controller of that spell or ability doesn’t get to choose the value. Note
that the value of X may change while that spell or ability is on the stack.
107.3d If a cost associated with a special action, such as a suspend cost or a morph cost, has an {X}
or an X in it, the value of X is chosen by the player taking the special action as he or she pays
that cost.
107.3e Sometimes X appears in the text of a spell or ability but not in a mana cost, alternative cost,
additional cost, or activation cost. If the value of X isn’t defined, the controller of the spell or
ability chooses the value of X at the appropriate time (either as it’s put on the stack or as it
resolves).

107.3f If a card in any zone other than the stack has an {X} in its mana cost, the value of {X} is
treated as 0, even if the value of X is defined somewhere within its text.
107.3g All instances of X on an object have the same value at any given time.
107.3h Some objects use the letter Y in addition to the letter X. Y follows the same rules as X.
107.4. The mana symbols are {W}, {U}, {B}, {R}, {G}, and {X}; the numerals {0}, {1}, {2}, {3},
{4}, and so on; the hybrid symbols {W/U}, {W/B}, {U/B}, {U/R}, {B/R}, {B/G}, {R/G}, {R/W},
{G/W}, and {G/U}; the monocolored hybrid symbols {2/W}, {2/U}, {2/B}, {2/R}, and {2/G}; the
Phyrexian mana symbols {W/P}, {U/P}, {B/P}, {R/P}, and {G/P}; and the snow symbol {S}.
107.4a There are five primary colored mana symbols: {W} is white, {U} blue, {B} black, {R} red,
and {G} green. These symbols are used to represent colored mana, and also to represent colored
mana in costs. Colored mana in costs can be paid only with the appropriate color of mana. See
rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
107.4b Numeral symbols (such as {1}) and variable symbols (such as {X}) represent generic mana
in costs. Generic mana in costs can be paid with any type of mana. For more information about
{X}, see rule 107.3.
107.4c Numeral symbols (such as {1}) and variable symbols (such as {X}) can also represent
colorless mana if they appear in the effect of a spell or ability that reads “add [mana symbol] to
your mana pool” or something similar. (See rule 107.3e.)
107.4d The symbol {0} represents zero mana and is used as a placeholder for a cost that can be paid
with no resources. (See rule 117.5.)
107.4e Hybrid mana symbols are also colored mana symbols. Each one represents a cost that can be
paid in one of two ways, as represented by the two halves of the symbol. A hybrid symbol such
as {W/U} can be paid with either white or blue mana, and a monocolored hybrid symbol such as
{2/B} can be paid with either one black mana or two mana of any type. A hybrid mana symbol
is all of its component colors.
Example: {G/W}{G/W} can be paid by spending {G}{G}, {G}{W}, or {W}{W}.
107.4f Phyrexian mana symbols are colored mana symbols: {W/P} is white, {U/P} is blue, {B/P} is
black, {R/P} is red, and {G/P} is green. A Phyrexian mana symbol represents a cost that can be
paid either with one mana of its color or by paying 2 life.
Example: {W/P}{W/P} can be paid by spending {W}{W}, by spending {W} and paying 2
life, or by paying 4 life.
107.4g In rules text, the Phyrexian symbol {P} with no colored background means any of the five
Phyrexian mana symbols.
107.4h The snow mana symbol {S} represents one generic mana in a cost. This generic mana can be
paid with one mana of any type produced by a snow permanent (see rule 204.4f). Effects that
reduce the amount of generic mana you pay don’t affect {S} costs. (There is no such thing as
“snow mana”; “snow” is not a type of mana.)
107.5. The tap symbol is {T}. The tap symbol in an activation cost means “Tap this permanent.” A
permanent that’s already tapped can’t be tapped again to pay the cost. A creature’s activated ability
with the tap symbol in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the creature has been under its
controller’s control continuously since his or her most recent turn began. See rule 302.6.
107.6. The untap symbol is {Q}. The untap symbol in an activation cost means “Untap this permanent.”
A permanent that’s already untapped can’t be untapped again to pay the cost. A creature’s activated

ability with the untap symbol in its activation cost can’t be activated unless the creature has been
under its controller’s control continuously since his or her most recent turn began. See rule 302.6.
107.7. Each activated ability of a planeswalker has a loyalty symbol in its cost. Positive loyalty symbols
point upward and feature a plus sign followed by a number. Negative loyalty symbols point
downward and feature a minus sign followed by a number or an X. Neutral loyalty symbols don’t
point in either direction and feature a 0. [+N] means “Put N loyalty counters on this permanent,” [-
N] means “Remove N loyalty counters from this permanent,” and [0] means “Put zero loyalty
counters on this permanent.”
107.8. The text box of a leveler card contains two level symbols, each of which is a keyword ability that
represents a static ability. The level symbol includes either a range of numbers, indicated here as
“N1-N2,” or a single number followed by a plus sign, indicated here as “N3+.” Any abilities printed
within the same text box striation as a level symbol are part of its static ability. The same is true of
the power/toughness box printed within that striation, indicated here as “[P/T].” See rule 710,
“Leveler Cards.”
107.8a “{LEVEL N1-N2} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this creature has at least N1 level
counters on it, but no more than N2 level counters on it, it’s [P/T] and has [abilities].”
107.8b “{LEVEL N3+} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this creature has N3 or more level
counters on it, it’s [P/T] and has [abilities].”
107.9. A tombstone icon appears to the left of the name of many Odyssey™ block cards with abilities
that are relevant in a player’s graveyard. The purpose of the icon is to make those cards stand out
when they’re in a graveyard. This icon has no effect on game play.
107.10. A type icon appears in the upper left corner of each card from the Future Sight® set printed
with an alternate “timeshifted” frame. If the card has a single card type, this icon indicates what it
is: claw marks for creature, a flame for sorcery, a lightning bolt for instant, a sunrise for
enchantment, a chalice for artifact, and a pair of mountain peaks for land. If the card has multiple
card types, that’s indicated by a black and white cross. This icon has no effect on game play.
107.11. The planeswalker symbol is {PW}. It appears on one face of the planar die used in the Planar
Magic casual variant. See rule 901, “Planar Magic.”
107.12. The chaos symbol is {C}. It appears on one face of the planar die used in the Planar Magic
casual variant, as well as in triggered abilities that refer to the results of rolling the planar die. See
rule 901, “Planar Magic.”
108. Cards
108.1. Use the Oracle™ card reference when determining a card’s wording. A card’s Oracle text can be
found using the Gatherer card database at http://gatherer.wizards.com.
108.2. When a rule or text on a card refers to a “card,” it means only a Magic card. This includes both
traditional Magic cards, which measure approximately 2.5 inches (6.3 cm) by 3.5 inches (8.8 cm)
and have a “Deckmaster” back, and nontraditional Magic cards, which are oversized and have
different backs. Tokens aren’t considered cards—even a card that represents a token isn’t
considered a card for rules purposes.
108.2a In the text of spells or abilities, the term “card” is used only to refer to a card that’s not on
the battlefield or on the stack, such as a creature card in a player’s hand. For more information,
see section 4, “Zones.”

108.3. The owner of a card in the game is the player who started the game with it in his or her deck. If a
card is brought into the game from outside the game rather than starting in a player’s deck, its
owner is the player who brought it into the game. If a card starts the game in the command zone, its
owner is the player who put it into the command zone to start the game. Legal ownership of a card
in the game is irrelevant to the game rules except for the rules for ante. (See rule 407.)
108.3a In a Planar Magic game using the single planar deck option, the planar controller is
considered to be the owner of all the plane cards. See rule 901.6.
108.3b Some spells and abilities allow a player to take cards he or she owns from outside the game
and bring them into the game. (See rule 400.10b.) If a card outside that game is involved in a
Magic game, its owner is determined as described in rule 108.3. If a card outside that game is in
the sideboard of a Magic game (see rule 100.4), its owner is considered to be the player who
started the game with it in his or her sideboard. In all other cases, the owner of a card outside the
game is its legal owner.
108.4. A card doesn’t have a controller unless that card represents a permanent or spell; in those cases,
its controller is determined by the rules for permanents or spells. See rules 110.2 and 111.2.
108.4a If anything asks for the controller of a card that doesn’t have one (because it’s not a
permanent or spell), use its owner instead.
108.5. Nontraditional Magic cards can’t start the game in any zone other than the command zone (see
rule 408). If an effect would bring a nontraditional Magic card into the game from outside the
game, it doesn’t; that card remains outside the game.
108.6. For more information about cards, see section 2, “Parts of a Card.”
109. Objects
109.1. An object is an ability on the stack, a card, a copy of a card, a token, a spell, a permanent, or an
emblem.
109.2. If a spell or ability uses a description of an object that includes a card type or subtype, but
doesn’t include the word “card,” “spell,” “source,” or “scheme,” it means a permanent of that card
type or subtype on the battlefield.
109.2a If a spell or ability uses a description of an object that includes the word “card” and the
name of a zone, it means a card matching that description in the stated zone.
109.2b If a spell or ability uses a description of an object that includes the word “spell,” it means a
spell matching that description on the stack.
109.2c If a spell or ability uses a description of an object that includes the word “source,” it means a
source matching that description—either a source of an ability or a source of damage—in any
zone. See rule 609.7.
109.2d If an ability of a scheme card includes the text “this scheme,” it means the scheme card in
the command zone on which that ability is printed.
109.3. An object’s characteristics are name, mana cost, color, card type, subtype, supertype, expansion
symbol, rules text, abilities, power, toughness, loyalty, hand modifier, and life modifier. Objects can
have some or all of these characteristics. Any other information about an object isn’t a
characteristic. For example, characteristics don’t include whether a permanent is tapped, a spell’s
target, an object’s owner or controller, what an Aura enchants, and so on.

109.4. Only objects on the stack or on the battlefield have a controller. Objects that are neither on the
stack nor on the battlefield aren’t controlled by any player. See rule 108.4. There are three
exceptions to this rule:
109.4a In a Planar Magic game, a face-up plane card is controlled by the player designated as the
planar controller. This is usually the active player. See rule 901.6.
109.4b In a Vanguard game, each vanguard card is controlled by its owner. See rule 902.6.
109.4c In an Archenemy game, each scheme card is controlled by its owner. See rule 904.7.
109.5. The words “you” and “your” on an object refer to the object’s controller, its would-be controller
(if a player is attempting to play, cast, or activate it), or its owner (if it has no controller). For a
static ability, this is the current controller of the object it’s on. For an activated ability, this is the
player who activated the ability. For a triggered ability, this is the controller of the object when the
ability triggered, unless it’s a delayed triggered ability. To determine the controller of a delayed
triggered ability, see rules 603.7d–f.
110. Permanents
110.1. A permanent is a card or token on the battlefield. A permanent remains on the battlefield
indefinitely. A card or token becomes a permanent as it enters the battlefield and it stops being a
permanent as it’s moved to another zone by an effect or rule.
110.2. A permanent’s owner is the same as the owner of the card that represents it (unless it’s a token;
see rule 110.5a). A permanent’s controller is, by default, the player under whose control it entered
the battlefield. Every permanent has a controller.
110.2a If an effect instructs a player to put an object onto the battlefield, that object enters the
battlefield under that player’s control unless the effect states otherwise.
110.3. A nontoken permanent’s characteristics are the same as those printed on its card, as modified by
any continuous effects. See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects.”
110.4. There are five permanent types: artifact, creature, enchantment, land, and planeswalker. Instant
and sorcery cards can’t enter the battlefield and thus can’t be permanents. Some tribal cards can
enter the battlefield and some can’t, depending on their other card types. See section 3, “Card
Types.”
110.4a The term “permanent card” is used to refer to a card that could be put onto the battlefield.
Specifically, it means an artifact, creature, enchantment, land, or planeswalker card.
110.4b The term “permanent spell” is used to refer to a spell that will enter the battlefield as a
permanent as part of its resolution. Specifically, it means an artifact, creature, enchantment, or
planeswalker spell.
110.4c If a permanent somehow loses all its permanent types, it remains on the battlefield. It’s still a
permanent.
110.5. Some effects put tokens onto the battlefield. A token is a marker used to represent any permanent
that isn’t represented by a card.
110.5a A token is both owned and controlled by the player under whose control it entered the
battlefield.

110.5b The spell or ability that creates a token may define the values of any number of
characteristics for the token. This becomes the token’s “text.” The characteristic values defined
this way are functionally equivalent to the characteristic values that are printed on a card; for
example, they define the token’s copiable values. A token doesn’t have any characteristics not
defined by the spell or ability that created it.
Example: Sprout is an instant that says “Put a 1/1 green Saproling creature token onto
the battlefield.” The resulting token has no mana cost, supertype, expansion symbol,
rules text, or abilities.
110.5c A spell or ability that creates a creature token sets both its name and its creature type. If the
spell or ability doesn’t specify the name of the creature token, its name is the same as its
creature type(s). A “Goblin Scout creature token,” for example, is named “Goblin Scout” and
has the creature subtypes Goblin and Scout. Once a token is on the battlefield, changing its
name doesn’t change its creature type, and vice versa.
110.5d If a spell or ability would create a token, but an effect states that a permanent with one or
more of that token’s characteristics can’t enter the battlefield, the token is not created.
110.5e A token is subject to anything that affects permanents in general or that affects the token’s
card type or subtype. A token isn’t a card (even if represented by a card that has a Magic back
or that came from a Magic booster pack).
110.5f A token that’s phased out, or that’s in a zone other than the battlefield, ceases to exist. This is
a state-based action; see rule 704. (Note that if a token changes zones, applicable triggered
abilities will trigger before the token ceases to exist.)
110.5g A token that has left the battlefield can’t come back onto the battlefield. If such a token
would return to the battlefield, it remains in its current zone instead. It ceases to exist the next
time state-based actions are checked; see rule 704.
110.6. A permanent’s status is its physical state. There are four status categories, each of which has two
possible values: tapped/untapped, flipped/unflipped, face up/face down, and phased in/phased out.
Each permanent always has one of these values for each of these categories.
110.6a Status is not a characteristic, though it may affect a permanent’s characteristics.
110.6b Permanents enter the battlefield untapped, unflipped, face up, and phased in unless a spell or
ability says otherwise.
110.6c A permanent retains its status until a spell, ability, or turn-based action changes it, even if
that status is not relevant to it.
Example: Dimir Doppelganger says “{1}{U}{B}: Exile target creature card from a
graveyard. Dimir Doppelganger becomes a copy of that card and gains this ability.” It
becomes a copy of Jushi Apprentice, a flip card. Through use of Jushi Apprentice’s
ability, this creature flips, making it a copy of Tomoya the Revealer with the Dimir
Doppelganger ability. If this permanent then becomes a copy of Runeclaw Bear, it will
retain its flipped status even though that has no relevance to Runeclaw Bear. If its copy
ability is activated again, this time targeting a Nezumi Shortfang card (another flip
card), this permanent’s flipped status means it will have the characteristics of
Stabwhisker the Odious (the flipped version of Nezumi Shortfang) with the Dimir
Doppelganger ability.
110.6d Only permanents have status. Cards not on the battlefield do not. Although an exiled card
may be face down, this has no correlation to the face-down status of a permanent. Similarly,
cards not on the battlefield are neither tapped nor untapped, regardless of their physical state.

111. Spells
111.1. A spell is a card on the stack. As the first step of being cast (see rule 601, “Casting Spells”), the
card becomes a spell and is moved to the top of the stack from the zone it was in, which is usually
its owner’s hand. (See rule 405, “Stack.”) A spell remains on the stack as a spell until it resolves
(see rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities”), is countered (see rule 701.5), or otherwise leaves
the stack. For more information, see section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.”
111.1a A copy of a spell is also a spell, even if it has no card associated with it. See rule 706.9.
111.1b Some effects allow a player to cast a copy of a card; if the player does, that copy is a spell as
well. See rule 706.11.
111.2. A spell’s owner is the same as the owner of the card that represents it, unless it’s a copy. In that
case, the owner of the spell is the player under whose control it was put on the stack. A spell’s
controller is, by default, the player under whose control it was put on the stack. (For noncopy spells,
that’s the player who cast it.) Every spell has a controller.
111.3. A noncopy spell’s characteristics are the same as those printed on its card, as modified by any
continuous effects. See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects.”
111.4. If an effect changes any characteristics of a permanent spell, the effect continues to apply to the
permanent when the spell resolves. See rule 400.7.
Example: If an effect changes a black creature spell to white, the creature is white when it
enters the battlefield and remains white for the duration of the effect changing its color.
112. Abilities
112.1. An ability can be one of two things:
112.1a An ability is a characteristic an object has that lets it affect the game. An object’s abilities
are defined by its rules text or by the effect that created it. Abilities can also be granted to
objects by rules or effects. (Effects that do so use the words “has,” “have,” “gains,” or “gain.”)
Abilities generate effects. (See rule 609, “Effects.”)
112.1b An ability can be an activated or triggered ability on the stack. This kind of ability is an
object. (See section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.”)
112.2. Abilities can affect the objects they’re on. They can also affect other objects and/or players.
112.2a Abilities can be beneficial or detrimental.
Example: “[This creature] can’t block” is an ability.
112.2b An additional cost or alternative cost to cast a card is an ability of the card.
112.2c An object may have multiple abilities. If the object is represented by a card, then aside from
certain defined abilities that may be strung together on a single line (see rule 702, “Keyword
Abilities”), each paragraph break in a card’s text marks a separate ability. If the object is not
represented by a card, the effect that created it may have given it multiple abilities. An object
may also be granted additional abilities by a spell or ability. If an object has multiple instances
of the same ability, each instance functions independently. This may or may not produce more
effects than a single instance; refer to the specific ability for more information.
112.2d Abilities can generate one-shot effects or continuous effects. Some continuous effects are
replacement effects or prevention effects. See rule 609, “Effects.”

 112.3. There are four general categories of abilities:
112.3a Spell abilities are abilities that are followed as instructions while an instant or sorcery spell
is resolving. Any text on an instant or sorcery spell is a spell ability unless it’s an activated
ability, a triggered ability, or a static ability that fits the criteria described in rule 112.6.
112.3b Activated abilities have a cost and an effect. They are written as “[Cost]: [Effect.]
[Activation instructions (if any).]” A player may activate such an ability whenever he or she has
priority. Doing so puts it on the stack, where it remains until it’s countered, it resolves, or it
otherwise leaves the stack. See rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
112.3c Triggered abilities have a trigger condition and an effect. They are written as “[Trigger
condition], [effect],” and begin with the word “when,” “whenever,” or “at.” Whenever the
trigger event occurs, the ability is put on the stack the next time a player would receive priority
and stays there until it’s countered, it resolves, or it otherwise leaves the stack. See rule 603,
“Handling Triggered Abilities.”
112.3d Static abilities are written as statements. They’re simply true. Static abilities create
continuous effects which are active while the permanent with the ability is on the battlefield and
has the ability, or while the object with the ability is in the appropriate zone. See rule 604,
“Handling Static Abilities.”
112.4. Some activated abilities and some triggered abilities are mana abilities. Mana abilities follow
special rules: They don’t use the stack, and, under certain circumstances, a player can activate mana
abilities even if he or she doesn’t have priority. See rule 605, “Mana Abilities.”
112.5. Some activated abilities are loyalty abilities. Loyalty abilities follow special rules: A player may
activate a loyalty ability of a permanent he or she controls any time he or she has priority and the
stack is empty during a main phase of his or her turn, but only if no player has previously activated
a loyalty ability of that permanent that turn. See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”
112.6. Abilities of an instant or sorcery spell usually function only while that object is on the stack.
Abilities of all other objects usually function only while that object is on the battlefield. The
exceptions are as follows:
112.6a Characteristic-defining abilities function everywhere, even outside the game. (See rule
604.3.)
112.6b An ability that states which zones it functions in functions only from those zones.
112.6c An object’s ability that allows a player to pay an alternative cost rather than its mana cost
functions in any zone in which its mana cost can be paid (which, in general, means it functions
on the stack). An object’s ability that otherwise modifies what that particular object costs to cast
functions on the stack.
112.6d An object’s ability that restricts or modifies how that particular object can be played or cast
functions in any zone from which it could be played or cast.
112.6e An object’s ability that restricts or modifies what zones that particular object can be played
or cast from functions everywhere, even outside the game.
112.6f An object’s ability that states it can’t be countered or can’t be countered by spells and
abilities functions on the stack.
112.6g An object’s ability that modifies how that particular object enters the battlefield functions as
that object is entering the battlefield. See rule 614.12.

112.6h An object’s ability that states counters can’t be placed on that object functions as that object
is entering the battlefield in addition to functioning while that object is on the battlefield.
112.6i An object’s activated ability that has a cost that can’t be paid while the object is on the
battlefield functions from any zone in which its cost can be paid.
112.6j A trigger condition that can’t trigger from the battlefield functions in all zones it can trigger
from. Other trigger conditions of the same triggered ability may function in different zones.
Example: Absolver Thrull has the ability “When Absolver Thrull enters the battlefield
or the creature it haunts is put into a graveyard, destroy target enchantment.” The first
trigger condition functions from the battlefield and the second trigger condition
functions from the exile zone. (See rule 702.53, “Haunt.”)
112.6k An ability whose cost or effect specifies that it moves the object it’s on out of a particular
zone functions only in that zone, unless that ability’s trigger condition, or a previous part of that
ability’s cost or effect, specifies that the object is put into that zone.
Example: Necrosavant says “{3}{B}{B}, Sacrifice a creature: Return Necrosavant from
your graveyard to the battlefield. Activate this ability only during your upkeep.” A
player may activate this ability only if Necrosavant is in his or her graveyard.
112.6m An ability that modifies the rules for deck construction functions before the game begins.
Such an ability modifies not just the Comprehensive Rules, but also the Magic: The Gathering
Tournament Rules and any other documents that set the deck construction rules for a specific
Constructed format. However, such an ability can’t affect the format legality of a card, including
whether it’s banned or restricted. The current Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules can be
found at www.wizards.com/wpn/Events/Rules.aspx.
112.6n Abilities of emblems, plane cards, vanguard cards, and scheme cards function in the
command zone. See rule 113, “Emblems”; rule 901, “Planar Magic”; rule 902, “Vanguard”; and
rule 904, “Archenemy.”
112.7. The source of an ability is the object that generated it. The source of an activated ability on the
stack is the object whose ability was activated. The source of a triggered ability (other than a
delayed triggered ability) on the stack, or one that has triggered and is waiting to be put on the
stack, is the object whose ability triggered. To determine the source of a delayed triggered ability,
see rules 603.7d–f.
112.7a Once activated or triggered, an ability exists on the stack independently of its source.
Destruction or removal of the source after that time won’t affect the ability. Note that some
abilities cause a source to do something (for example, “Prodigal Sorcerer deals 1 damage to
target creature or player”) rather than the ability doing anything directly. In these cases, any
activated or triggered ability that references information about the source because the effect
needs to be divided checks that information when the ability is put onto the stack. Otherwise, it
will check that information when it resolves. In both instances, if the source is no longer in the
zone it’s expected to be in at that time, its last known information is used. The source can still
perform the action even though it no longer exists.
112.8. The controller of an activated ability on the stack is the player who activated it. The controller of
a triggered ability on the stack (other than a delayed triggered ability) is the player who controlled
the ability’s source when it triggered, or, if it had no controller, the player who owned the ability’s
source when it triggered. To determine the controller of a delayed triggered ability, see rules
603.7d–f.
112.9. Activated and triggered abilities on the stack aren’t spells, and therefore can’t be countered by
anything that counters only spells. Activated and triggered abilities on the stack can be countered by

effects that specifically counter abilities, as well as by the rules (for example, an ability with one or
more targets is countered if all its targets become illegal). Static abilities don’t use the stack and
thus can’t be countered at all.
112.10. Effects can add or remove abilities of objects. An effect that adds an ability will state that the
object “gains” or “has” that ability. An effect that removes an ability will state that the object
“loses” that ability. Effects that remove an ability remove all instances of it. If two or more effects
add and remove the same ability, in general the most recent one prevails. (See rule 613, “Interaction
of Continuous Effects.”)
112.11. An effect that sets an object’s characteristic, or simply states a quality of that object, is different
from an ability granted by an effect. When an object “gains” or “has” an ability, that ability can be
removed by another effect. If an effect defines a characteristic of the object (“[permanent] is
[characteristic value]”), it’s not granting an ability. (See rule 604.3.) Similarly, if an effect states a
quality of that object (“[permanent]” is indestructible” or “[creature] is unblockable,” for example),
it’s neither granting an ability nor setting a characteristic. (See rules 700.4 and 700.5.)
Example: Muraganda Petroglyphs reads, “Creatures with no abilities get +2/+2.” A
Runeclaw Bear (a creature with no abilities) enchanted by an Aura that says “Enchanted
creature has flying” would not get +2/+2. A Runeclaw Bear enchanted by an Aura that says
“Enchanted creature is red” or “Enchanted creature is indestructible” would get +2/+2.
113. Emblems
113.1. Some effects put emblems into the command zone. An emblem is a marker used to represent an
object that has one or more abilities, but no other characteristics.
113.2. An effect that creates an emblem is written “[Player] gets an emblem with [ability].” This means
that [player] puts an emblem with [ability] into the command zone. The emblem is both owned and
controlled by that player.
113.3. An emblem has no characteristics other than the abilities defined by the effect that created it. In
particular, an emblem has no name, no types, no mana cost, no color, and no expansion symbol.
113.4. Abilities of emblems function in the command zone.
113.5. An emblem is neither a card nor a permanent. Emblem isn’t a card type.
114. Targets
114.1. Some spells and abilities require their controller to choose one or more targets for them. The
targets are object(s), player(s), and/or zone(s) the spell or ability will affect. These targets are
declared as part of the process of putting the spell or ability on the stack. The targets can’t be
changed except by another spell or ability that explicitly says it can do so.
114.1a An instant or sorcery spell is targeted if its spell ability identifies something it will affect by
using the phrase “target [something],” where the “something” is a phrase that describes an
object, player, or zone. The target(s) are chosen as the spell is cast; see rule 601.2c. (If an
activated or triggered ability of an instant or sorcery uses the word target, that ability is targeted,
but the spell is not.)
Example: A sorcery card has the ability “When you cycle this card, target creature gets
-1/-1 until end of turn.” This triggered ability is targeted, but that doesn’t make the card
it’s on targeted.
114.1b Aura spells are always targeted. These are the only permanent spells with targets. An Aura’s
target is specified by its enchant keyword ability (see rule 702.5, “Enchant”). The target(s) are

chosen as the spell is cast; see rule 601.2c. An Aura permanent doesn’t target anything; only the
spell is targeted. (An activated or triggered ability of an Aura permanent can also be targeted.)
114.1c An activated ability is targeted if it identifies something it will affect by using the phrase
“target [something],” where the “something” is a phrase that describes an object, player, or
zone. The target(s) are chosen as the ability is activated; see rule 602.2b.
114.1d A triggered ability is targeted if it identifies something it will affect by using the phrase
“target [something],” where the “something” is a phrase that describes an object, player, or
zone. The target(s) are chosen as the ability is put on the stack; see rule 603.3d.
114.1e Some keyword abilities, such as equip and provoke, represent targeted activated or triggered
abilities. In those cases, the phrase “target [something]” appears in the rule for that keyword
ability rather than in the ability itself. (The keyword’s reminder text will often contain the word
“target.”) See rule 702, “Keyword Abilities.”
114.2. Only permanents are legal targets for spells and abilities, unless a spell or ability (a) specifies
that it can target an object in another zone or a player, (b) targets an object that can’t exist on the
battlefield, such as a spell or ability, or (c) targets a zone.
114.3. The same target can’t be chosen multiple times for any one instance of the word “target” on a
spell or ability. If the spell or ability uses the word “target” in multiple places, the same object,
player, or zone can be chosen once for each instance of the word “target” (as long as it fits the
targeting criteria). This rule applies both when choosing targets for a spell or ability and when
changing targets or choosing new targets for a spell or ability (see rule 114.6).
114.4. A spell or ability on the stack is an illegal target for itself.
114.5. Spells and abilities that can have zero or more targets are targeted only if one or more targets
have been chosen for them.
114.6. Some effects allow a player to change the target(s) of a spell or ability, and other effects allow a
player to choose new targets for a spell or ability.
114.6a If an effect allows a player to “change the target(s)” of a spell or ability, each target can be
changed only to another legal target. If a target can’t be changed to another legal target, the
original target is unchanged, even if the original target is itself illegal by then. If all the targets
aren’t changed to other legal targets, none of them are changed.
114.6b If an effect allows a player to “change a target” of a spell or ability, the process described in
rule 114.6a is followed, except that only one of those targets may be changed (rather than all of
them or none of them).
114.6c If an effect allows a player to “change any targets” of a spell or ability, the process described
in rule 114.6a is followed, except that any number of those targets may be changed (rather than
all of them or none of them).
114.6d If an effect allows a player to “choose new targets” for a spell or ability, the player may
leave any number of the targets unchanged, even if those targets would be illegal. If the player
chooses to change some or all of the targets, the new targets must be legal and must not cause
any unchanged targets to become illegal.
114.6e When changing targets or choosing new targets for a spell or ability, only the final set of
targets is evaluated to determine whether the change is effective.
Example: Arc Trail is an instant that reads “Arc Trail deals 2 damage to target creature
or player and 1 damage to another target creature or player.” The current targets of

Arc Trail are Runeclaw Bear and Llanowar Elves, in that order. You cast Redirect, an
instant that reads “You may choose new targets for target spell,” targeting Arc Trail.
You can change the first target to Llanowar Elves and change the second target to
Runeclaw Bear.
114.7. Modal spells and abilities may have different targeting requirements for each mode. An effect
that allows a player to change the target(s) of a modal spell or ability, or to choose new targets for a
modal spell or ability, doesn’t allow that player to change its mode. (See rule 700.2.)
114.8. Some objects check what another spell or ability is targeting. Depending on the wording, these
may check the current state of the targets, the state of the targets at the time they were selected, or
both.
114.8a An object that looks for a “[spell or ability] with a single target” checks the number of times
any objects, players, or zones became the target of that spell or ability when it was put on the
stack, not the number of its targets that are currently legal. If the same object, player, or zone
became a target more than once, each of those instances is counted separately.
114.8b An object that looks for a “[spell or ability] that targets [something]” checks the current state
of that spell or ability’s targets. If an object it targets is still in the zone it’s expected to be in or a
player it targets is still in the game, that target’s current information is used, even if it’s not
currently legal for that spell or ability. If an object it targets is no longer in the zone it’s
expected to be in or a player it targets is no longer in the game, that target is ignored; its last
known information is not used.
114.8c An object that looks for a “[spell or ability] that targets only [something]” checks the
number of different objects or players that became the target of that spell or ability when it was
put on the stack (as modified by effects that changed those targets), not the number of those
objects or players that are currently legal targets. If that number is one (even if the spell or
ability targets that object or player multiple times), the current state of that spell or ability’s
target is checked as described in rule 114.8b.
114.9. Spells and abilities can affect objects and players they don’t target. In general, those objects and
players aren’t chosen until the spell or ability resolves. See rule 608, “Resolving Spells and
Abilities.”
114.9a Just because an object or player is being affected by a spell or ability doesn’t make that
object or player a target of that spell or ability. Unless that object or player is identified by the
word “target” in the text of that spell or ability, or the rule for that keyword ability, it’s not a
target.
114.9b In particular, the word “you” in an object’s text doesn’t indicate a target.
115. Special Actions
115.1. Special actions are actions a player may take when he or she has priority that don’t use the stack.
These are not to be confused with turn-based actions and state-based actions, which the game
generates automatically. (See rule 703, “Turn-Based Actions,” and rule 704, “State-Based
Actions.”)
115.2. There are six special actions:
115.2a Playing a land is a special action. To play a land, a player puts that land onto the battlefield
from the zone it was in (usually that player’s hand). A player can take this action any time he or
she has priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of his or her turn, but only if he or
she hasn’t yet played a land that turn. See rule 305, “Lands.”

115.2b Turning a face-down creature face up is a special action. A player can take this action any
time he or she has priority. See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”
115.2c Some effects allow a player to take an action at a later time, usually to end a continuous
effect or to stop a delayed triggered ability from triggering. Doing so is a special action. A
player can take such an action any time he or she has priority, but only if the ability or effect
allows it.
115.2d Some effects from static abilities allow a player to take an action to ignore the effect from
that ability for a duration. Doing so is a special action. A player can take such an action any time
he or she has priority.
115.2e A player who has a card with suspend in his or her hand may exile that card. This is a special
action. A player can take this action any time he or she has priority, but only if he or she could
begin to cast that card by putting it onto the stack. See rule 702.60, “Suspend.”
115.2f In a Planar Magic game, rolling the planar die is a special action. A player can take this
action any time he or she has priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of his or her
turn. Taking this action costs a player an amount of mana equal to the number of times he or she
has previously taken this action on that turn. See rule 901, “Planar Magic.”
115.3. If a player takes a special action, that player receives priority afterward.
116. Timing and Priority
116.1. Unless a spell or ability is instructing a player to take an action, which player can take actions at
any given time is determined by a system of priority. The player with priority may cast spells,
activate abilities, and take special actions.
116.1a A player may cast an instant spell any time he or she has priority. A player may cast a
noninstant spell during his or her main phase any time he or she has priority and the stack is
empty.
116.1b A player may activate an activated ability any time he or she has priority.
116.1c A player may take some special actions any time he or she has priority. A player may take
other special actions during his or her main phase any time he or she has priority and the stack is
empty. See rule 115, “Special Actions.”
116.1d A player may activate a mana ability whenever he or she has priority, whenever he or she is
casting a spell or activating an ability that requires a mana payment, or whenever a rule or effect
asks for a mana payment (even in the middle of casting or resolving a spell or activating or
resolving an ability).
116.2. Other kinds of abilities and actions are automatically generated or performed by the game rules,
or are performed by players without receiving priority.
116.2a Triggered abilities can trigger at any time, including while a spell is being cast, an ability is
being activated, or a spell or ability is resolving. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
However, nothing actually happens at the time an ability triggers. Each time a player would
receive priority, each ability that has triggered but hasn’t yet been put on the stack is put on the
stack. See rule 116.5.
116.2b Static abilities continuously affect the game. Priority doesn’t apply to them. (See rule 604,
“Handling Static Abilities,” and rule 611, “Continuous Effects.”)

116.2c Turn-based actions happen automatically when certain steps or phases begin. They’re dealt
with before a player would receive priority. See rule 116.3a. Turn-based actions also happen
automatically when each step and phase ends; no player receives priority afterward. See rule
703, “Turn-Based Actions.”
116.2d State-based actions happen automatically when certain conditions are met. See rule 704.
They’re dealt with before a player would receive priority. See rule 116.5.
116.2e Resolving spells and abilities may instruct players to make choices or take actions, or may
allow players to activate mana abilities. Even if a player is doing so, no player has priority while
a spell or ability is resolving. See rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.”
116.3. Which player has priority is determined by the following rules:
116.3a The active player receives priority at the beginning of most steps and phases, after any turn-
based actions (such as drawing a card during the draw step; see rule 703) have been dealt with
and abilities that trigger at the beginning of that phase or step have been put on the stack. No
player receives priority during the untap step. Players usually don’t get priority during the
cleanup step (see rule 514.3).
116.3b The active player receives priority after a spell or ability (other than a mana ability) resolves.
116.3c If a player has priority when he or she casts a spell, activates an ability, or takes a special
action, that player receives priority afterward.
116.3d If a player has priority and chooses not to take any actions, that player passes. If any mana is
in that player’s mana pool, he or she announces what mana is there. Then the next player in turn
order receives priority.
116.4. If all players pass in succession (that is, if all players pass without taking any actions in between
passing), the spell or ability on top of the stack resolves or, if the stack is empty, the phase or step
ends.
116.5. Each time a player would get priority, the game first performs all applicable state-based actions
as a single event (see rule 704, “State-Based Actions”), then repeats this process until no state-based
actions are performed. Then triggered abilities are put on the stack (see rule 603, “Handling
Triggered Abilities”). These steps repeat in order until no further state-based actions are performed
and no abilities trigger. Then the player who would have received priority does so.
116.6. In a multiplayer game using the shared team turns option, teams rather than individual players
have priority. See rule 805, “Shared Team Turns Option.”
116.7. If a player with priority casts a spell or activates an activated ability while another spell or ability
is already on the stack, the new spell or ability has been cast or activated “in response to” the earlier
spell or ability. The new spell or ability will resolve first. See rule 608, “Resolving Spells and
Abilities.”
117. Costs
117.1. A cost is an action or payment necessary to take another action or to stop another action from
taking place. To pay a cost, a player carries out the instructions specified by the spell, ability, or
effect that contains that cost.

117.2. If a cost includes a mana payment, the player paying the cost has a chance to activate mana
abilities. Paying the cost to cast a spell or activate an activated ability follows the steps in rules
601.2e–g.
117.3. A player can’t pay a cost unless he or she has the necessary resources to pay it fully. For
example, a player with only 1 life can’t pay a cost of 2 life, and a permanent that’s already tapped
can’t be tapped to pay a cost. See rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color,” and rule 602, “Activating
Activated Abilities.”
117.3a Paying mana is done by removing the indicated mana from a player’s mana pool. (Players
can always pay 0 mana.) If excess mana remains in that player’s mana pool after making that
payment, the player announces what mana is still there.
117.3b Paying life is done by subtracting the indicated amount of life from a player’s life total.
(Players can always pay 0 life.)
117.3c Activating mana abilities is not mandatory, even if paying a cost is.
Example: A player controls Thorn of Amethyst, which says “Noncreature spells cost {1}
more to cast.” Another player removes the last time counter from a suspended sorcery
card. That player must cast that spell if able, but doing so costs {1}. The player is forced
to spend {1} if enough mana is in his or her mana pool, but the player isn’t forced to
activate a mana ability to produce that {1}. If he or she doesn’t, the card simply remains
exiled.
117.4. Some costs include an {X} or an X. See rule 107.3.
117.5. Some costs are represented by {0}, or are reduced to {0}. The action necessary for a player to
pay such a cost is the player’s acknowledgment that he or she is paying it. Even though such a cost
requires no resources, it’s not automatically paid.
117.5a A spell whose mana cost is {0} must still be cast the same way as one with a cost greater
than zero; it won’t cast itself automatically. The same is true for an activated ability whose cost
is {0}.
117.6. Some mana costs contain no mana symbols. This represents an unpayable cost. An ability can
also have an unpayable cost if its cost is based on the mana cost of an object with no mana cost.
Attempting to cast a spell or activate an ability that has an unpayable cost is a legal action.
However, attempting to pay an unpayable cost is an illegal action.
117.6a If an unpayable cost is increased by an effect or an additional cost is imposed, the cost is still
unpayable. If an alternative cost is applied to an unpayable cost, including an effect that allows a
player to cast a spell without paying its mana cost, the alternative cost may be paid.
117.7. What a player actually needs to do to pay a cost may be changed or reduced by effects. If the
mana component of a cost is reduced to nothing by cost reduction effects, it’s considered to be {0}.
Paying a cost changed or reduced by an effect counts as paying the original cost.
117.7a If a cost is reduced by an amount of colored mana, but its colored mana component doesn’t
contain mana of that color, the cost is reduced by that amount of generic mana.
117.7b If a cost is reduced by an amount of colored mana that exceeds its mana component of that
color, the cost’s mana component of that color is reduced to nothing and the cost’s generic mana
component is reduced by the difference.
117.7c If a cost is reduced by an amount of mana represented by a hybrid mana symbol, the player
paying that cost chooses one half of that symbol at the time the cost reduction is applied (see

rule 601.2e). If a colored half is chosen, the cost is reduced by one mana of that color. If a
colorless half is chosen, the cost is reduced by an amount of generic mana equal to that half’s
number.
117.7d If a cost is reduced by an amount of mana represented by a Phyrexian mana symbol, the cost
is reduced by one mana of that symbol’s color.
117.8. Some spells and abilities have additional costs. An additional cost is a cost listed in a spell’s
rules text, or applied to a spell or ability from another effect, that its controller must pay at the same
time that player pays the spell’s mana cost or the ability’s activation cost. A cost is an additional
cost only if it’s phrased using the word “additional.” Note that some additional costs are listed in
keywords; see rule 702.
117.8a Any number of additional costs may be applied to a spell as it’s being cast or to an ability as
it’s being activated. The controller of the spell or ability announces his or her intentions to pay
any or all of those costs as described in rule 601.2b.
117.8b Some additional costs are optional.
117.8c Additional costs don’t change a spell’s mana cost, only what its controller has to pay to cast
it. Spells and abilities that ask for that spell’s mana cost still see the original value.
117.8d Some effects increase the cost to cast a spell or activate an ability without using the word
“additional.” Those are not additional costs, and are not considered until determining the total
cost of a spell or ability as described in rule 601.2e.
117.9. Some spells have alternative costs. An alternative cost is a cost listed in a spell’s text, or applied
to it from another effect, that its controller may pay rather than paying the spell’s mana cost.
Alternative costs are usually phrased, “You may [action] rather than pay [this object’s] mana cost,”
or “You may cast [this object] without paying its mana cost.” Note that some alternative costs are
listed in keywords; see rule 702.
117.9a Only one alternative cost can be applied to any one spell as it’s being cast. The controller of
the spell announces his or her intentions to pay that cost as described in rule 601.2b.
117.9b Alternative costs are always optional.
117.9c An alternative cost doesn’t change a spell’s mana cost, only what its controller has to pay to
cast it. Spells and abilities that ask for that spell’s mana cost still see the original value.
117.9d If an alternative cost is being paid to cast a spell, any additional costs, cost increases, and
cost reductions that affect that spell are applied to that alternative cost. (See rule 601.2e.)
117.10. Each payment of a cost applies to only one spell, ability, or effect. For example, a player can’t
sacrifice just one creature to activate the activated abilities of two permanents that each require
sacrificing a creature as a cost. Also, the resolution of a spell or ability doesn’t pay another spell or
ability’s cost, even if part of its effect is doing the same thing the other cost asks for.
117.11. The actions performed when paying a cost may be modified by effects. Even if they are,
meaning the actions that are performed don’t match the actions that are called for, the cost has still
been paid.
Example: A player controls Psychic Vortex, an enchantment with a cumulative upkeep cost
of “Draw a card,” and Obstinate Familiar, a creature that says “If you would draw a card,
you may skip that draw instead.” The player may decide to pay Psychic Vortex’s cumulative
upkeep cost and then draw no cards instead of drawing the appropriate amount. The
cumulative upkeep cost has still been paid.

117.12. Some spells, activated abilities, and triggered abilities read, “[Do something]. If [a player]
[does or doesn’t], [effect].” or “[A player] may [do something]. If [that player] [does or doesn’t],
[effect].” The action [do something] is a cost, paid when the spell or ability resolves. The “If [a
player] [does or doesn’t]” clause checks whether the player chose to pay an optional cost or started
to pay a mandatory cost, regardless of what events actually occurred.
Example: You control Hesitation, an enchantment that says “When a player casts a spell,
sacrifice Hesitation. If you do, counter that spell.” A spell is cast, causing Hesitation’s
ability to trigger. Then an ability is activated that exiles Hesitation. When Hesitation’s
ability resolves, you’re unable to pay the “sacrifice Hesitation” cost. The spell is not
countered.
Example: Your opponent has cast Gather Specimens, a spell that says “If a creature would
enter the battlefield under an opponent’s control this turn, it enters the battlefield under
your control instead.” You control a face-down Dermoplasm, a creature with morph that
says “When Dermoplasm is turned face up, you may put a creature card with morph from
your hand onto the battlefield face up. If you do, return Dermoplasm to its owner’s hand.”
You turn Dermoplasm face up, and you choose to put a creature card with morph from your
hand onto the battlefield. Due to Gather Specimens, it enters the battlefield under your
opponent’s control instead of yours. However, since you chose to pay the cost, Dermoplasm
is still returned to its owner’s hand.
117.12a Some spells, activated abilities, and triggered abilities read, “[Do something] unless you
[do something else].” This means the same thing as “You may [do something else]. If you don’t,
[do something].”
118. Life
118.1. Each player begins the game with a life total of 20.
118.1a In a Two-Headed Giant game, each team begins the game with a shared life total of 30
instead; see rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
118.1b In a Vanguard game, each player begins the game with a starting life total of 20, as modified
by his or her vanguard card’s life modifier. See rule 902, “Vanguard.”
118.1c In a Commander game, each player begins the game with a starting life total of 40 instead;
see rule 903, “Commander.”
118.1d In an Archenemy game, the archenemy begins the game with a starting life total of 40
instead; see rule 904, “Archenemy.”
118.2. Damage dealt to a player normally causes that player to lose that much life. See rule 119.3.
118.3. If an effect causes a player to gain life or lose life, that player’s life total is adjusted accordingly.
118.4. If a cost or effect allows a player to pay an amount of life greater than 0, the player may do so
only if his or her life total is greater than or equal to the amount of the payment. If a player pays
life, the payment is subtracted from his or her life total; in other words, the player loses that much
life. (Players can always pay 0 life.)
118.4a If a cost or effect allows a player to pay an amount of life greater than 0 in a Two-Headed
Giant game, the player may do so only if his or her team’s life total is greater than or equal to
the total amount of life both team members are paying for that cost or effect. If a player pays
life, the payment is subtracted from his or her team’s life total. (Players can always pay 0 life.)

118.5. If an effect sets a player’s life total to a specific number, the player gains or loses the necessary
amount of life to end up with the new total.
118.6. If a player has 0 or less life, that player loses the game as a state-based action. See rule 704.
118.7. If an effect says that a player can’t gain life, that player can’t exchange life totals with a player
who has a higher life total; in that case, the exchange won’t happen. In addition, a cost that involves
having that player gain life can’t be paid, and a replacement effect that would replace a life gain
event affecting that player won’t do anything.
118.8. If an effect says that a player can’t lose life, that player can’t exchange life totals with a player
who has a lower life total; in that case, the exchange won’t happen. In addition, a cost that involves
having that player pay life can’t be paid.
118.9. Some triggered abilities are written, “Whenever [a player] gains life, . . . .” Such abilities are
treated as though they are written, “Whenever a source causes [a player] to gain life, . . . .”
Example: A player controls Ajani’s Pridemate, which reads “Whenever you gain life, you
may put a +1/+1 counter on Ajani’s Pridemate,” and two creatures with lifelink. The
creatures with lifelink deal combat damage simultaneously. Ajani’s Pridemate’s ability
triggers twice.
119. Damage
119.1. Objects can deal damage to creatures, planeswalkers, and players. This is generally detrimental
to the object or player that receives that damage. An object that deals damage is the source of that
damage.
119.1a Damage can’t be dealt to an object that’s neither a creature nor a planeswalker.
119.2. Any object can deal damage.
119.2a Damage may be dealt as a result of combat. Each attacking and blocking creature deals
combat damage equal to its power during the combat damage step.
119.2b Damage may be dealt as an effect of a spell or ability. The spell or ability will specify which
object deals that damage.
119.3. Damage may have one or more of the following results, depending on whether the recipient of
the damage is a player or permanent, the characteristics of the damage’s source, and the
characteristics of the damage’s recipient (if it’s a permanent).
119.3a Damage dealt to a player by a source without infect causes that player to lose that much life.
119.3b Damage dealt to a player by a source with infect causes that player to get that many poison
counters.
119.3c Damage dealt to a planeswalker causes that many loyalty counters to be removed from that
planeswalker.
119.3d Damage dealt to a creature by a source with wither and/or infect causes that many -1/-1
counters to be put on that creature.
119.3e Damage dealt to a creature by a source with neither wither nor infect causes that much
damage to be marked on that creature.

119.3f Damage dealt by a source with lifelink causes that source’s controller to gain that much life,
in addition to the damage’s other results.
119.4. Damage is processed in a three-part sequence.
119.4a First, damage is dealt, as modified by replacement and prevention effects that interact with
damage. (See rule 614, “Replacement Effects,” and rule 615, “Prevention Effects.”) Abilities
that trigger when damage is dealt trigger now and wait to be put on the stack.
119.4b Next, damage that’s been dealt is transformed into its results, as modified by replacement
effects that interact with those results (such as life loss or counters).
119.4c Finally, the damage event occurs.
Example: A player who controls Boon Reflection, an enchantment that says “If you
would gain life, you gain twice that much life instead,” attacks with a 3/3 creature with
wither and lifelink. It’s blocked by a 2/2 creature, and the defending player casts a spell
that prevents the next 2 damage that would be dealt to the blocking creature. The
damage event starts out as [3 damage is dealt to the 2/2 creature, 2 damage is dealt to
the 3/3 creature]. The prevention effect is applied, so the damage event becomes [1
damage is dealt to the 2/2 creature, 2 damage is dealt to the 3/3 creature]. That’s
transformed into its results, so the damage event is now [one -1/-1 counter is put on the
2/2 creature, the active player gains 1 life, 2 damage is marked on the 3/3 creature].
Boon Reflection’s effect is applied, so the damage event becomes [one -1/-1 counter is
put on the 2/2 creature, the active player gains 2 life, 2 damage is marked on the 3/3
creature]. Then the damage event occurs.
Example: The defending player controls a creature and Worship, an enchantment that
says “If you control a creature, damage that would reduce your life total to less than 1
reduces it to 1 instead.” That player is at 2 life, and is being attacked by two unblocked
5/5 creatures. The player casts Awe Strike, which says “The next time target creature
would deal damage this turn, prevent that damage. You gain life equal to the damage
prevented this way,” targeting one of the attackers. The damage event starts out as [10
damage is dealt to the defending player]. Awe Strike’s effect is applied, so the damage
event becomes [5 damage is dealt to the defending player, the defending player gains 5
life]. That’s transformed into its results, so the damage event is now [the defending
player loses 5 life, the defending player gains 5 life]. Worship’s effect sees that the
damage event would not reduce the player’s life total to less than 1, so Worship’s effect
is not applied. Then the damage event occurs.
119.5. Damage dealt to a creature or planeswalker doesn’t destroy it. Likewise, the source of that
damage doesn’t destroy it. Rather, state-based actions may destroy a creature or planeswalker, or
otherwise put it into its owner’s graveyard, due to the results of the damage dealt to that permanent.
See rule 704.
Example: A player casts Lightning Bolt, an instant that says “Lightning Bolt deals 3
damage to target creature or player,” targeting a 2/2 creature. After Lightning Bolt deals 3
damage to that creature, the creature is destroyed as a state-based action. Neither Lightning
Bolt nor the damage dealt by Lightning Bolt destroyed that creature.
119.6. Damage marked on a creature remains until the cleanup step, even if that permanent stops being
a creature. If the total damage marked on a creature is greater than or equal to its toughness, that
creature has been dealt lethal damage and is destroyed as a state-based action (see rule 704). All
damage marked on a permanent is removed when it regenerates (see rule 701.11, “Regenerate”) and
during the cleanup step (see rule 514.2).
119.7. The source of damage is the object that dealt it. If an effect requires a player to choose a source
of damage, he or she may choose a permanent; a spell on the stack (including a permanent spell);
any object referred to by an object on the stack, by a prevention or replacement effect that’s waiting

to apply, or by a delayed triggered ability that’s waiting to trigger (even if that object is no longer in
the zone it used to be in); or, in certain casual variant games, a face-up card in the command zone.
A source doesn’t need to be capable of dealing damage to be a legal choice. See rule 609.7,
“Sources of Damage.”
119.8. If a source would deal 0 damage, it does not deal damage at all. That means abilities that trigger
on damage being dealt won’t trigger. It also means that replacement effects that would increase the
damage dealt by that source, or would have that source deal that damage to a different object or
player, have no event to replace, so they have no effect.
120. Drawing a Card
120.1. A player draws a card by putting the top card of his or her library into his or her hand. This is
done as a turn-based action during each player’s draw step. It may also be done as part of a cost or
effect of a spell or ability.
120.2. Cards may only be drawn one at a time. If a player is instructed to draw multiple cards, that
player performs that many individual card draws.
120.2a If an effect instructs more than one player to draw cards, the active player performs all of his
or her draws first, then each other player in turn order does the same.
120.2b If an effect instructs more than one player to draw cards in a game that’s using the shared
team turns option (such as a Two-Headed Giant game), first each player on the active team, in
whatever order that team likes, performs his or her draws, then each player on each nonactive
team in turn order does the same.
120.3. If there are no cards in a player’s library and an effect offers that player the choice to draw a
card, that player can choose to do so. However, if an effect says that a player can’t draw cards and
another effect offers that player the choice to draw a card, that player can’t choose to do so.
120.3a The same principles apply if the player who’s making the choice is not the player who
would draw the card. If the latter player has no cards in his or her library, the choice can be
taken. If an effect says that the latter player can’t draw a card, the choice can’t be taken.
120.4. A player who attempts to draw a card from a library with no cards in it loses the game the next
time a player would receive priority. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
120.5. If an effect moves cards from a player’s library to that player’s hand without using the word
“draw,” the player has not drawn those cards. This makes a difference for abilities that trigger on
drawing cards and effects that replace card draws, as well as if the player’s library is empty.
120.6. Some effects replace card draws.
120.6a An effect that replaces a card draw is applied even if no cards could be drawn because there
are no cards in the affected player’s library.
120.6b If an effect replaces a draw within a sequence of card draws, the replacement effect is
completed before resuming the sequence.
120.6c Some effects perform additional actions on a card after it’s drawn. If the draw is replaced,
the additional action is not performed on any cards that are drawn as a result of that replacement
effect or any subsequent replacement effects.

120.7. Some replacement effects and prevention effects result in multiple card draws. In such a case,
any parts of the original event that haven’t been replaced by the effect occur first, then the card
draws happen one at a time.
121. Counters
121.1. A counter is a marker placed on an object or player that modifies its characteristics and/or
interacts with a rule, ability, or effect. Counters are not objects and have no characteristics. Notably,
a counter is not a token, and a token is not a counter. Counters with the same name or description
are interchangeable.
121.1a A +X/+Y counter on a creature or on a creature card in a zone other than the battlefield,
where X and Y are numbers, adds X to that object’s power and Y to that object’s toughness.
Similarly, -X/-Y counters subtract from power and toughness. See rule 613.3.
121.1b The number of loyalty counters on a planeswalker on the battlefield indicates how much
loyalty it has. A planeswalker with 0 loyalty is put into its owner’s graveyard as a state-based
action. See rule 704.
121.1c. If a player has ten or more poison counters, he or she loses the game as a state-based action.
See rule 704. A player is “poisoned” if he or she has one or more poison counters. (See rule 810
for additional rules for Two-Headed Giant games.)
121.2. Counters on an object are not retained if that object moves from one zone to another. The
counters are not “removed”; they simply cease to exist. See rule 400.7.
121.3. If a permanent has both a +1/+1 counter and a -1/-1 counter on it, N +1/+1 and N -1/-1 counters
are removed from it as a state-based action, where N is the smaller of the number of +1/+1 and -1/-1
counters on it. See rule 704.
121.4. If a permanent with an ability that says it can’t have more than N counters of a certain kind on it
has more than N counters of that kind on it, all but N of those counters are removed from it as a
state-based action. See rule 704.
121.5. If an effect says to “move” a counter, it means to take that counter from the object it’s currently
on and put it onto a second object. If the first and second objects are the same object, nothing
happens. If the first object has no counters, nothing happens; the second object doesn’t get a counter
put on it. If the second object (or any possible second objects) is no longer in the correct zone when
the effect would move the counter, nothing happens; a counter isn’t removed from the first object.
121.6. If a spell or ability refers to a counter being “placed” on a permanent, it means putting a counter
on that permanent while it’s on the battlefield, or that permanent entering the battlefield with a
counter on it as the result of a replacement effect (see rule 614.1c).

 2. Parts of a Card
200. General
200.1. The parts of a card are name, mana cost, illustration, type line, expansion symbol, text box,
power and toughness, loyalty, hand modifier, life modifier, illustration credit, legal text, and
collector number. Some cards may have more than one of any or all of these parts.
200.2. Some parts of a card are also characteristics of the object that has them. See rule 109.3.
200.3. Some objects that aren’t cards (tokens, copies of cards, and copies of spells) have some of the
parts of a card, but only the ones that are also characteristics. See rule 110.5 and rule 706.
201. Name
201.1. The name of a card is printed on its upper left corner.
201.2. Two objects have the same name if the English versions of their names are identical.
201.3. If an effect instructs a player to name a card, the player must choose the name of a card that
exists in the Oracle card reference (see rule 108.1) and is legal in the format of the game the player
is playing. (See rule 100.6.) If the player wants to name a split card, the player must name both
halves of the split card. (See rule 708.) If the player wants to name a flip card’s alternative name,
the player may do so. (See rule 709.) A player may not choose the name of a token unless it’s also
the name of a card.
201.4. Text that refers to the object it’s on by name means just that particular object and not any other
objects with that name, regardless of any name changes caused by game effects.
201.4a If an ability’s effect grants another ability to an object, and that second ability refers to that
first ability’s source by name, the name refers only to the specific object that is that first
ability’s source, not to any other object with the same name.
Example: Saproling Burst has an ability that reads “Remove a fade counter from
Saproling Burst: Put a green Saproling creature token onto the battlefield. It has ‘This
creature’s power and toughness are each equal to the number of fade counters on
Saproling Burst.’” The ability granted to the token only looks at the Saproling Burst that
created the token, not at any other Saproling Burst on the battlefield.
201.4b If an ability of an object refers to that object by name, and an object with a different name
gains that ability, all instances of the first name in the gained ability should be treated as the
second name.
Example: Quicksilver Elemental says, in part, “{U}: Quicksilver Elemental gains all
activated abilities of target creature until end of turn.” If it gains an ability that says
“{B}: Regenerate Drudge Skeletons,” activating that ability will regenerate Quicksilver
Elemental, not the Drudge Skeletons it gained the ability from.
Example: Glacial Ray is an instant with “splice onto Arcane” that says “Glacial Ray
deals 2 damage to target creature or player.” If it’s spliced onto a Kodama’s Reach,
that Kodama’s Reach deals 2 damage to the target creature or player.
Example: Dimir Doppelganger says “{1}{U}{B}: Exile target creature card from a
graveyard. Dimir Doppelganger becomes a copy of that card and gains this ability.”
Dimir Doppelganger’s ability is activated targeting a Runeclaw Bear card. The
Doppelganger becomes a copy of Runeclaw Bear and gains an ability that should be
treated as saying “{1}{U}{B}: Exile target creature card from a graveyard. Runeclaw
Bear becomes a copy of that card and gains this ability.”

201.4c Text printed on some legendary cards refers to that card by a shortened version of its name.
This occurs only on a second reference or later; first references always use the card’s full name.
Instances of a card’s shortened name used in this manner are treated as though they used the
card’s full name.
201.5. If an ability of an object uses a phrase such as “this [something]” to identify an object, where
[something] is a characteristic, it is referring to that particular object, even if it isn’t the appropriate
characteristic at the time.
Example: An ability reads “Target creature gets +2/+2 until end of turn. Destroy that
creature at the beginning of the next end step.” The ability will destroy the object it gave
+2/+2 to even if that object isn’t a creature at the beginning of the next end step.
202. Mana Cost and Color
202.1. A card’s mana cost is indicated by mana symbols near the top of the card. (See rule 107.4.) On
most cards, these symbols are printed in the upper right corner. Some cards from the Future Sight
set have alternate frames in which the mana symbols appear to the left of the illustration.
202.1a The mana cost of an object represents what a player must spend from his or her mana pool to
cast that card. Unless an object’s mana cost includes Phyrexian mana symbols (see rule 107.4f),
paying that mana cost requires matching the color of any colored mana symbols as well as
paying the generic mana indicated in the cost.
202.1b Some objects have no mana cost. This normally includes all land cards, any other cards that
have no mana symbols where their mana cost would appear, tokens (unless the effect that
creates them specifies otherwise), and nontraditional Magic cards. Having no mana cost
represents an unpayable cost (see rule 117.6). Note that lands are played without paying any
costs (see rule 305, “Lands”).
202.2. An object is the color or colors of the mana symbols in its mana cost, regardless of the color of
its frame.
202.2a The five colors are white, blue, black, red, and green. The white mana symbol is represented
by {W}, blue by {U}, black by {B}, red by {R}, and green by {G}.
Example: An object with a mana cost of {2}{W} is white, an object with a mana cost of {2}
is colorless, and one with a mana cost of {2}{W}{B} is both white and black.
202.2b Objects with no colored mana symbols in their mana costs are colorless.
202.2c An object with two or more different colored mana symbols in its mana cost is each of the
colors of those mana symbols. Most multicolored cards are printed with a gold frame, but this is
not a requirement for a card to be multicolored.
202.2d An object with one or more hybrid mana symbols and/or Phyrexian mana symbols in its
mana cost is all of the colors of those mana symbols, in addition to any other colors the object
might be. (Most cards with hybrid mana symbols in their mana costs are printed in a two-tone
frame. See rule 107.4e.)
202.2e Effects may change an object’s color, give a color to a colorless object, or make a colored
object become colorless; see rule 105.3.
202.3. The converted mana cost of an object is a number equal to the total amount of mana in its mana
cost, regardless of color.
Example: A mana cost of {3}{U}{U} translates to a converted mana cost of 5.
202.3a The converted mana cost of an object with no mana cost is 0.

202.3b When calculating the converted mana cost of an object with an {X} in its mana cost, X is
treated as 0 while the object is not on the stack, and X is treated as the number chosen for it
while the object is on the stack.
202.3c When calculating the converted mana cost of an object with a hybrid mana symbol in its
mana cost, use the largest component of each hybrid symbol.
Example: The converted mana cost of a card with mana cost {1}{W/U}{W/U} is 3.
Example: The converted mana cost of a card with mana cost {2/B}{2/B}{2/B} is 6.
202.3d Each Phyrexian mana symbol in a card’s mana cost contributes 1 to its converted mana cost.
Example: The converted mana cost of a card with mana cost {1}{W/P}{W/P} is 3.
202.4. Any additional cost listed in an object’s rules text or imposed by an effect isn’t part of the mana
cost. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”) Such costs are paid at the same time as the spell’s other costs.
203. Illustration
203.1. The illustration is printed on the upper half of a card and has no effect on game play. For
example, a creature doesn’t have the flying ability unless stated in its rules text, even if it’s depicted
as flying.
204. Type Line
204.1. The type line is printed directly below the illustration. It contains the card’s card type(s). It also
contains the card’s subtype(s) and supertype(s), if applicable.
204.1a Some effects set an object’s card type. In such cases, the new card type(s) replaces any
existing card types. Counters, effects, and damage marked on the object remain with it, even if
they are meaningless to the new card type. Similarly, when an effect sets one or more of an
object’s subtypes, the new subtype(s) replaces any existing subtypes from the appropriate set
(creature types, land types, artifact types, enchantment types, planeswalker types, or spell
types). If an object’s card type is removed, the subtypes correlated with that card type will
remain if they are also the subtypes of a card type the object currently has; otherwise, they are
also removed for the entire time the object’s card type is removed. Removing an object’s
subtype doesn’t affect its card types at all.
204.1b Some effects change an object’s card type, supertype, or subtype but specify that the object
retains a prior card type, supertype, or subtype. In such cases, all the object’s prior card types,
supertypes, and subtypes are retained. This rule applies to effects that use the phrase “in addition
to its types” or that state that something is “still a [type, supertype, or subtype].” Some effects
state that an object becomes an “artifact creature”; these effects also allow the object to retain all
of its prior card types and subtypes.
Example: An ability reads, “All lands are 1/1 creatures that are still lands.” The
affected lands now have two card types: creature and land. If there were any lands that
were also artifacts before the ability’s effect applied to them, those lands would become
“artifact land creatures,” not just “creatures,” or “land creatures.” The effect allows
them to retain both the card type “artifact” and the card type “land.” In addition, each
land affected by the ability retains any land types and supertypes it had before the ability
took effect.
Example: An ability reads, “All artifacts are 1/1 artifact creatures.” If a permanent is
both an artifact and an enchantment, it will become an “artifact enchantment creature.”
204.2. Card Types

204.2a The card types are artifact, creature, enchantment, instant, land, plane, planeswalker,
scheme, sorcery, tribal, and vanguard. See section 3, “Card Types.”
204.2b Some objects have more than one card type (for example, an artifact creature). Such objects
satisfy the criteria for any effect that applies to any of their card types.
204.2c Tokens have card types even though they aren’t cards. The same is true of copies of spells
and copies of cards.
204.3. Subtypes
204.3a A card can have one or more subtypes printed on its type line.
204.3b Subtypes of each card type except plane are always single words and are listed after a long
dash. Each word after the dash is a separate subtype; such objects may have multiple types.
Subtypes of planes are also listed after a long dash, but may be multiple words; all words after
the dash are, collectively, a single subtype.
Example: “Basic Land — Mountain” means the card is a land with the subtype
Mountain. “Creature — Goblin Wizard” means the card is a creature with the subtypes
Goblin and Wizard. “Artifact — Equipment” means the card is an artifact with the
subtype Equipment.
204.3c If a card with multiple card types has one or more subtypes, each subtype is correlated to its
appropriate card type.
Example: Dryad Arbor’s type line says “Land Creature — Forest Dryad.” Forest is a
land type, and Dryad is a creature type.
204.3d If an effect instructs a player to choose a subtype, that player must choose one, and only one,
existing subtype, and the subtype he or she chooses must be for the appropriate card type. For
example, the player can’t choose a land type if an instruction requires choosing a creature type.
Example: When choosing a creature type, “Merfolk” or “Wizard” is acceptable, but
“Merfolk Wizard” is not. Words like “artifact,” “opponent,” “Swamp,” or “truck”
can’t be chosen because they aren’t creature types.
204.3e Many cards were printed with subtypes that are now obsolete. Many cards have retroactively
received subtypes. Use the Oracle card reference to determine what a card’s subtypes are. (See
rule 108.1.)
204.3f Artifacts have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called artifact types. The
artifact types are Contraption, Equipment (see rule 301.5), and Fortification (see rule 301.6).
204.3g Enchantments have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called enchantment
types. The enchantment types are Aura (see rule 303.4), and Shrine.
204.3h Lands have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called land types. The land
types are Desert, Forest, Island, Lair, Locus, Mine, Mountain, Plains, Power-Plant, Swamp,
Tower, and Urza’s.
Of that list, Forest, Island, Mountain, Plains, and Swamp are the basic land types. See rule
305.6.
204.3i Planeswalkers have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called planeswalker
types. The planeswalker types are Ajani, Bolas, Chandra, Elspeth, Garruk, Gideon, Jace, Karn,
Koth, Liliana, Nissa, Sarkhan, Sorin, Tezzeret, and Venser.
If two or more planeswalkers that share a planeswalker type are on the battlefield, all are put
into their owners’ graveyards. This “planeswalker uniqueness rule” is a state-based action. See
rule 704.

204.3j Instants and sorceries share their lists of subtypes; these subtypes are called spell types. The
spell types are Arcane and Trap.
204.3k Creatures and tribals share their lists of subtypes; these subtypes are called creature types.
The creature types are Advisor, Ally, Angel, Anteater, Antelope, Ape, Archer, Archon,
Artificer, Assassin, Assembly-Worker, Atog, Aurochs, Avatar, Badger, Barbarian, Basilisk, Bat,
Bear, Beast, Beeble, Berserker, Bird, Blinkmoth, Boar, Bringer, Brushwagg, Camarid, Camel,
Caribou, Carrier, Cat, Centaur, Cephalid, Chimera, Citizen, Cleric, Cockatrice, Construct,
Coward, Crab, Crocodile, Cyclops, Dauthi, Demon, Deserter, Devil, Djinn, Dragon, Drake,
Dreadnought, Drone, Druid, Dryad, Dwarf, Efreet, Elder, Eldrazi, Elemental, Elephant, Elf, Elk,
Eye, Faerie, Ferret, Fish, Flagbearer, Fox, Frog, Fungus, Gargoyle, Germ, Giant, Gnome, Goat,
Goblin, Golem, Gorgon, Graveborn, Gremlin, Griffin, Hag, Harpy, Hellion, Hippo, Hippogriff,
Homarid, Homunculus, Horror, Horse, Hound, Human, Hydra, Hyena, Illusion, Imp,
Incarnation, Insect, Jellyfish, Juggernaut, Kavu, Kirin, Kithkin, Knight, Kobold, Kor, Kraken,
Lammasu, Leech, Leviathan, Lhurgoyf, Licid, Lizard, Manticore, Masticore, Mercenary,
Merfolk, Metathran, Minion, Minotaur, Monger, Mongoose, Monk, Moonfolk, Mutant, Myr,
Mystic, Nautilus, Nephilim, Nightmare, Nightstalker, Ninja, Noggle, Nomad, Octopus, Ogre,
Ooze, Orb, Orc, Orgg, Ouphe, Ox, Oyster, Pegasus, Pentavite, Pest, Phelddagrif, Phoenix,
Pincher, Pirate, Plant, Praetor, Prism, Rabbit, Rat, Rebel, Reflection, Rhino, Rigger, Rogue,
Salamander, Samurai, Sand, Saproling, Satyr, Scarecrow, Scorpion, Scout, Serf, Serpent, Shade,
Shaman, Shapeshifter, Sheep, Siren, Skeleton, Slith, Sliver, Slug, Snake, Soldier, Soltari,
Spawn, Specter, Spellshaper, Sphinx, Spider, Spike, Spirit, Splinter, Sponge, Squid, Squirrel,
Starfish, Surrakar, Survivor, Tetravite, Thalakos, Thopter, Thrull, Treefolk, Triskelavite, Troll,
Turtle, Unicorn, Vampire, Vedalken, Viashino, Volver, Wall, Warrior, Weird, Whale, Wizard,
Wolf, Wolverine, Wombat, Worm, Wraith, Wurm, Yeti, Zombie, and Zubera.
204.3m Planes have their own unique set of subtypes; these subtypes are called planar types. The
planar types are Alara, Arkhos, Bolas’s Meditation Realm, Dominaria, Equilor, Iquatana, Ir,
Kaldheim, Kamigawa, Karsus, Lorwyn, Luvion, Mercadia, Mirrodin, Moag, Muraganda,
Phyrexia, Pyrulea, Rabiah, Rath, Ravnica, Segovia, Serra’s Realm, Shadowmoor, Shandalar,
Ulgrotha, Valla, Wildfire, and Zendikar.
204.3n Neither vanguard cards nor scheme cards have subtypes.
204.4. Supertypes
204.4a A card can also have one or more supertypes. These are printed directly before its card
types. The supertypes are basic, legendary, ongoing, snow, and world.
204.4b An object’s supertype is independent of its card type and subtype, even though some
supertypes are closely identified with specific card types. Changing an object’s card types or
subtypes won’t change its supertypes. Changing an object’s supertypes won’t change its card
types or subtypes. When an object gains or loses a supertype, it retains any other supertypes it
had.
Example: An ability reads, “All lands are 1/1 creatures that are still lands.” If any of
the affected lands were legendary, they are still legendary.
204.4c Any land with the supertype “basic” is a basic land. Any land that doesn’t have this
supertype is a nonbasic land, even if it has a basic land type.
Cards printed in sets prior to the Eighth Edition core set didn’t use the word “basic” to
indicate a basic land. Cards from those sets with the following names are basic lands and have
received errata in the Oracle card reference accordingly: Forest, Island, Mountain, Plains,
Swamp, Snow-Covered Forest, Snow-Covered Island, Snow-Covered Mountain, Snow-Covered
Plains, and Snow-Covered Swamp.

204.4d Any permanent with the supertype “legendary” is subject to the state-based action for
legendary permanents, also called the “legend rule” (see rule 704.5k).
204.4e Any permanent with the supertype “world” is subject to the state-based action for world
permanents, also called the “world rule” (see rule 704.5m).
204.4f Any permanent with the supertype “snow” is a snow permanent. Any permanent that doesn’t
have this supertype is a nonsnow permanent, regardless of its name.
204.4g Any scheme card with the supertype “ongoing” is exempt from the state-based action for
schemes (see rule 704.5w).
205. Expansion Symbol
205.1. The expansion symbol indicates which Magic set a card is from. It’s a small icon normally
printed below the right edge of the illustration.
205.2. The color of the expansion symbol indicates the rarity of the card within its set. A red-orange
symbol indicates the card is mythic rare. A gold symbol indicates the card is rare. A silver symbol
indicates the card is uncommon. A black or white symbol indicates the card is common or is a basic
land. A purple symbol signifies a special rarity; to date, only the Time Spiral® “timeshifted” cards,
which were rarer than that set’s rare cards, have had purple expansion symbols. (Prior to the
Exodus™ set, all expansion symbols were black, regardless of rarity. Also, prior to the Sixth Edition
core set, with the exception of the Simplified Chinese Fifth Edition core set, Magic core sets didn’t
have expansion symbols at all.)
205.3. A spell or ability that affects cards from a particular set checks only for that set’s expansion
symbol. A card reprinted in the core set or another expansion receives that set’s expansion symbol.
Any reprinted version of the card no longer counts as part of its original set unless it was reprinted
with that set’s expansion symbol.
205.4. Players may include cards from any printing in their constructed decks if those cards appear in
sets allowed in that format (or those cards are specifically allowed by the Magic Tournament
Rules). See the Magic Tournament Rules for the current definitions of the constructed formats
(www.wizards.com/wpn/Events/Rules.aspx).
205.5. The full list of expansions and expansion symbols can be found in the Magic Products section of
the Wizards of the Coast website
(www.wizards.com/Magic/TCG/Article.aspx?x=mtg/tcg/products/allproducts).
206. Text Box
206.1. The text box is printed on the lower half of the card. It usually contains rules text defining the
card’s abilities.
206.2. The text box may also contain italicized text that has no game function.
206.2a Reminder text is italicized text within parentheses that summarizes a rule that applies to that
card. It usually appears on the same line as the ability it’s relevant to, but it may appear on its
own line if it applies to an aspect of the card other than an ability.
206.2b Flavor text is italicized text that, like the illustration, adds artistic appeal to the game. It
appears below the rules text.
206.2c An ability word appears in italics at the beginning of some abilities on cards. Ability words
are similar to keywords in that they tie together cards that have similar functionality, but they

have no special rules meaning and no individual entries in the Comprehensive Rules. The ability
words are channel, chroma, domain, grandeur, hellbent, imprint, join forces, kinship, landfall,
metalcraft, radiance, sweep, and threshold.
206.3. A guild icon appears in the text box of many Ravnica® block cards. These cards either have the
specified guild’s exclusive mechanic or somehow relate to the two colors associated with that guild.
Guild icons have no effect on game play. Similarly, a faction icon appears in the text box of most
Scars of Mirrodin™ block cards. These faction icons have no effect on game play.
206.4. The chaos symbol {C} appears in the text box of each plane card to the left of a triggered ability
that triggers whenever {C} is rolled on the planar die. The symbol itself has no special rules
meaning.
207. Power/Toughness
207.1. A creature card has two numbers separated by a slash printed in its lower right corner. The first
number is its power (the amount of damage it deals in combat); the second is its toughness (the
amount of damage needed to destroy it). For example, 2/3 means the object has power 2 and
toughness 3. Power and toughness can be modified or set to particular values by effects.
207.2. Rather than a fixed number, some creature cards have power and/or toughness that includes a
star (*).
207.2a The card may have a characteristic-defining ability that sets its power and/or toughness
according to some stated condition. (See rule 604.3.) Such an ability is worded “[This
creature’s] [power or toughness] is equal to . . .” or “[This creature’s] power and toughness are
each equal to . . .” This ability functions everywhere, even outside the game. If the ability needs
to use a number that can’t be determined, including inside a calculation, use 0 instead of that
number.
Example: Lost Order of Jarkeld has power and toughness each equal to 1+*. It says
“As Lost Order of Jarkeld enters the battlefield, choose an opponent” and “Lost Order
of Jarkeld’s power and toughness are each equal to 1 plus the number of creatures that
opponent controls.” While Lost Order of Jarkeld isn’t on the battlefield, there won’t be a
chosen opponent. Its power and toughness will each be equal to 1 plus 0, so it’s 1/1.
207.2b The card may have a static ability that creates a replacement effect that sets the creature’s
power and toughness to one of a number of specific choices as it enters the battlefield or is
turned face up. (See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”) Such an ability is worded “As [this
creature] enters the battlefield . . . ,” “As [this creature] is turned face up . . . ,” or “[This
creature] enters the battlefield as . . .” and lists two or more specific power and toughness values
(and may also list additional characteristics). The characteristics chosen with these effects affect
the creature’s copiable values. (See rule 706.2.) While the card isn’t on the battlefield, its power
and toughness are each considered to be 0.
207.3. A noncreature permanent has no power or toughness, even if it’s a card with a power and
toughness printed on it (such as a Licid that’s become an Aura).
208. Loyalty
208.1. Each planeswalker card has a loyalty number printed in its lower right corner. This indicates its
loyalty while it’s not on the battlefield, and it also indicates that the planeswalker enters the
battlefield with that many loyalty counters on it.
208.2. An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost is a loyalty ability. Loyalty abilities follow
special rules: A player may activate a loyalty ability of a permanent he or she controls any time he

or she has priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of his or her turn, but only if none of
that permanent’s loyalty abilities have been activated that turn. See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”
209. Hand Modifier
209.1. Each vanguard card has a hand modifier printed in its lower left corner. This is a number
preceded by a plus sign, a number preceded by a minus sign, or a zero. This modifier is applied to
the maximum hand size of the vanguard card’s owner (normally seven) to determine both how
many cards that player draws at the beginning of the game and his or her maximum hand size.
210. Life Modifier
210.1. Each vanguard card has a life modifier printed in its lower right corner. This is a number
preceded by a plus sign, a number preceded by a minus sign, or a zero. This modifier is applied to
the starting life total of the vanguard card’s owner (normally 20) to determine how much life that
player begins the game with.
211. Information Below the Text Box
211.1. Each card features text printed below the text box that has no effect on game play.
211.1a The illustration credit for a card is printed on the first line below the text box. It follows the
paintbrush icon or, on older cards, the abbreviation “Illus.”
211.1b Legal text (the fine print at the bottom of the card) lists the trademark and copyright
information.
211.1c Some card sets feature collector numbers. This information is printed in the form [card
number]/[total cards in the set], immediately following the legal text.

 3. Card Types
300. General
300.1. The card types are artifact, creature, enchantment, instant, land, plane, planeswalker, scheme,
sorcery, tribal, and vanguard.
300.2. Some objects have more than one card type (for example, an artifact creature). Such objects
combine the aspects of each of those card types, and are subject to spells and abilities that affect
either or all of those card types.
300.2a An object that’s both a land and another card type (for example, an artifact land) can only be
played as a land. It can’t be cast as a spell.
300.2b Each tribal card has another card type. Casting and resolving a tribal card follow the rules
for casting and resolving a card of the other card type.
301. Artifacts
301.1. A player who has priority may cast an artifact card from his or her hand during a main phase of
his or her turn when the stack is empty. Casting an artifact as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601,
“Casting Spells.”)
301.2. When an artifact spell resolves, its controller puts it onto the battlefield under his or her control.
301.3. Artifact subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Artifact —
Equipment.” Artifact subtypes are also called artifact types. Artifacts may have multiple subtypes.
See rule 204.3f for the complete list of artifact types.
301.4. Artifacts have no characteristics specific to their card type. Most artifacts have no colored mana
symbols in their mana costs, and are therefore colorless. However, there is no correlation between
being colorless and being an artifact: artifacts may be colored, and colorless objects may be card
types other than artifact.
301.5. Some artifacts have the subtype “Equipment.” An Equipment can be attached to a creature. It
can’t legally be attached to an object that isn’t a creature.
301.5a The creature an Equipment is attached to is called the “equipped creature.” The Equipment
is attached to, or “equips,” that creature.
301.5b An Equipment is cast and enters the battlefield just like any other artifact. An Equipment
doesn’t enter the battlefield attached to a creature. The equip keyword ability attaches the
Equipment to a creature you control (see rule 702.6, “Equip”). Control of the creature matters
only when the equip ability is activated and when it resolves. Spells and other abilities may also
attach an Equipment to a creature. If an effect attempts to attach an Equipment to an object that
can’t be equipped by it, the Equipment doesn’t move.
301.5c An Equipment that’s also a creature can’t equip a creature. An Equipment that loses the
subtype “Equipment” can’t equip a creature. An Equipment can’t equip itself. An Equipment
that equips an illegal or nonexistent permanent becomes unattached from that permanent but
remains on the battlefield. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
301.5d An Equipment’s controller is separate from the equipped creature’s controller; the two need
not be the same. Changing control of the creature doesn’t change control of the Equipment, and
vice versa. Only the Equipment’s controller can activate its abilities. However, if the Equipment

grants an ability to the equipped creature (with “gains” or “has”), the equipped creature’s
controller is the only one who can activate that ability.
301.6. Some artifacts have the subtype “Fortification.” A Fortification can be attached to a land. It can’t
legally be attached to an object that isn’t a land. Fortification’s analog to the equip keyword ability
is the fortify keyword ability. Rules 301.5a–d apply to Fortifications in relation to lands just as they
apply to Equipment in relation to creatures, with one clarification relating to rule 301.5c: a
Fortification that’s also a creature (not a land) can’t fortify a land. (See rule 702.65, “Fortify.”)
301.7. If a non-Equipment permanent has an ability that refers to the “equipped creature,” that phrase
doesn’t refer to any creature. Similarly, a non-Fortification permanent that has an ability that refers
to the “fortified land” doesn’t refer to any land.
302. Creatures
302.1. A player who has priority may cast a creature card from his or her hand during a main phase of
his or her turn when the stack is empty. Casting a creature as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601,
“Casting Spells.”)
302.2. When a creature spell resolves, its controller puts it onto the battlefield under his or her control.
302.3. Creature subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Creature — Human
Soldier,” “Artifact Creature — Golem,” and so on. Creature subtypes are also called creature types.
Creatures may have multiple subtypes. See rule 204.3k for the complete list of creature types.
Example: “Creature — Goblin Wizard” means the card is a creature with the subtypes
Goblin and Wizard.
302.4. Power and toughness are characteristics only creatures have.
302.4a A creature’s power is the amount of damage it deals in combat.
302.4b A creature’s toughness is the amount of damage needed to destroy it.
302.4c To determine a creature’s power and toughness, start with the numbers printed in its lower
right corner, then apply any applicable continuous effects. (See rule 613, “Interaction of
Continuous Effects.”)
302.5. Creatures can attack and block. (See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step,” and rule 509, “Declare
Blockers Step.”)
302.6. A creature’s activated ability with the tap symbol or the untap symbol in its activation cost can’t
be activated unless the creature has been under its controller’s control continuously since his or her
most recent turn began. A creature can’t attack unless it has been under its controller’s control
continuously since his or her most recent turn began. This rule is informally called the “summoning
sickness” rule.
302.7. Damage dealt to a creature by a source with neither wither nor infect is marked on that creature
(see rule 119.3). If the total damage marked on that creature is greater than or equal to its toughness,
that creature has been dealt lethal damage and is destroyed as a state-based action (see rule 704). All
damage marked on a creature is removed when it regenerates (see rule 701.11, “Regenerate”) and
during the cleanup step (see rule 514.2).
303. Enchantments

303.1. A player who has priority may cast an enchantment card from his or her hand during a main
phase of his or her turn when the stack is empty. Casting an enchantment as a spell uses the stack.
(See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
303.2. When an enchantment spell resolves, its controller puts it onto the battlefield under his or her
control.
303.3. Enchantment subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Enchantment
— Shrine.” Each word after the dash is a separate subtype. Enchantment subtypes are also called
enchantment types. Enchantments may have multiple subtypes. See rule 204.3g for the complete list
of enchantment types.
303.4. Some enchantments have the subtype “Aura.” An Aura enters the battlefield attached to an
object or player. What an Aura can be attached to is restricted by its enchant keyword ability (see
rule 702.5, “Enchant”). Other effects can limit what a permanent can be enchanted by.
303.4a An Aura spell requires a target, which is restricted by its enchant ability.
303.4b The object or player an Aura is attached to is called enchanted. The Aura is attached to, or
“enchants,” that object or player.
303.4c If an Aura is enchanting an illegal object or player, the object it was attached to no longer
exists, or the player it was attached to has left the game, the Aura is put into its owner’s
graveyard. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
303.4d An Aura can’t enchant itself. If this occurs somehow, the Aura is put into its owner’s
graveyard. An Aura that’s also a creature can’t enchant anything. If this occurs somehow, the
Aura becomes unattached, then is put into its owner’s graveyard. (These are state-based actions.
See rule 704.)
303.4e An Aura’s controller is separate from the enchanted object’s controller or the enchanted
player; the two need not be the same. If an Aura enchants an object, changing control of the
object doesn’t change control of the Aura, and vice versa. Only the Aura’s controller can
activate its abilities. However, if the Aura grants an ability to the enchanted object (with “gains”
or “has”), the enchanted object’s controller is the only one who can activate that ability.
303.4f If an Aura is entering the battlefield under a player’s control by any means other than by
resolving as an Aura spell, and the effect putting it onto the battlefield doesn’t specify the object
or player the Aura will enchant, that player chooses what it will enchant as the Aura enters the
battlefield. The player must choose a legal object or player according to the Aura’s enchant
ability and any other applicable effects.
303.4g If an Aura is entering the battlefield and there is no legal object or player for it to enchant,
the Aura remains in its current zone, unless that zone is the stack. In that case, the Aura is put
into its owner’s graveyard instead of entering the battlefield.
303.4h If an effect attempts to attach an Aura on the battlefield to an object or player, that object or
player must be able to be enchanted by it. If the object or player can’t be, the Aura doesn’t
move.
303.4i If a non-Aura permanent has an ability that refers to the “enchanted [object or player]” that
phrase doesn’t refer to any object or player.
304. Instants

304.1. A player who has priority may cast an instant card from his or her hand. Casting an instant as a
spell uses the stack. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
304.2. When an instant spell resolves, the actions stated in its rules text are followed. Then it’s put into
its owner’s graveyard.
304.3. Instant subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Instant — Arcane.”
Each word after the dash is a separate subtype. The set of instant subtypes is the same as the set of
sorcery subtypes; these subtypes are called spell types. Instants may have multiple subtypes. See
rule 204.3j for the complete list of spell types.
304.4. Instants can’t enter the battlefield. If an instant would enter the battlefield, it remains in its
previous zone instead.
304.5. If text states that a player may do something “any time he or she could cast an instant,” it means
only that the player must have priority. The player doesn’t need to have an instant he or she could
actually cast. Effects that would prevent that player from casting a spell or casting an instant don’t
affect the player’s capability to perform that action (unless the action is actually casting a spell or
casting an instant).
305. Lands
305.1. A player who has priority may play a land card from his or her hand during a main phase of his
or her turn when the stack is empty. Playing a land is a special action; it doesn’t use the stack (see
rule 115). Rather, the player simply puts the land onto the battlefield. Since the land doesn’t go on
the stack, it is never a spell, and players can’t respond to it with instants or activated abilities.
305.2. A player may normally play only one land during his or her turn; however, continuous effects
may increase this number. If any such effects exist, the player announces which effect, or this rule,
applies to each land play as it happens.
305.3. A player can’t play a land, for any reason, if it isn’t his or her turn. Ignore any part of an effect
that instructs a player to do so. Similarly, a player can’t play a land, for any reason, if that player
has used all of his or her land plays for that turn. Ignore any part of an effect that instructs a player
to do so.
305.4. Effects may also allow players to “put” lands onto the battlefield. This isn’t the same as “playing
a land” and doesn’t count as a player’s one land played during his or her turn.
305.5. Land subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash. Land subtypes are also
called land types. Lands may have multiple subtypes. See rule 204.3h for the complete list of land
types.
Example: “Basic Land — Mountain” means the card is a land with the subtype Mountain.
305.6. The basic land types are Plains, Island, Swamp, Mountain, and Forest. If an object uses the
words “basic land type,” it’s referring to one of these subtypes. A land with a basic land type has the
intrinsic ability “{T}: Add [mana symbol] to your mana pool,” even if the text box doesn’t actually
contain that text or the object has no text box. For Plains, [mana symbol] is {W}; for Islands, {U};
for Swamps, {B}; for Mountains, {R}; and for Forests, {G}. See rule 107.4a. Also see rule 605,
“Mana Abilities.”
305.7. If an effect sets a land’s subtype to one or more of the basic land types, the land no longer has its
old land type. It loses all abilities generated from its rules text and its old land types, and it gains the
appropriate mana ability for each new basic land type. Note that this doesn’t remove any abilities
that were granted to the land by other effects. Setting a land’s subtype doesn’t add or remove any
card types (such as creature) or supertypes (such as basic, legendary, and snow) the land may have.

If a land gains one or more land types in addition to its own, it keeps its land types and rules text,
and it gains the new land types and mana abilities.
305.8. Any land with the supertype “basic” is a basic land. Any land that doesn’t have this supertype is
a nonbasic land, even if it has a basic land type.
305.9. If an object is both a land and another card type, it can be played only as a land. It can’t be cast
as a spell.
306. Planeswalkers
306.1. A player who has priority may cast a planeswalker card from his or her hand during a main
phase of his or her turn when the stack is empty. Casting a planeswalker as a spell uses the stack.
(See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”)
306.2. When a planeswalker spell resolves, its controller puts it onto the battlefield under his or her
control.
306.3. Planeswalker subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Planeswalker
— Jace.” Each word after the dash is a separate subtype. Planeswalker subtypes are also called
planeswalker types. Planeswalkers may have multiple subtypes. See rule 204.3i for the complete list
of planeswalker types.
306.4. If two or more planeswalkers that share a planeswalker type are on the battlefield, all are put into
their owners’ graveyards as a state-based action. This is called the “planeswalker uniqueness rule.”
See rule 704.
306.5. Loyalty is a characteristic only planeswalkers have.
306.5a The loyalty of a planeswalker not on the battlefield is equal to the number printed in its
lower right corner.
306.5b A planeswalker is treated as if its text box included, “This permanent enters the battlefield
with a number of loyalty counters on it equal to its printed loyalty number.” This ability creates
a replacement effect (see rule 614.1c).
306.5c The loyalty of a planeswalker on the battlefield is equal to the number of loyalty counters on
it.
306.5d Each planeswalker has a number of loyalty abilities, which are activated abilities with
loyalty symbols in their costs. Loyalty abilities follow special rules: A player may activate a
loyalty ability of a permanent he or she controls any time he or she has priority and the stack is
empty during a main phase of his or her turn, but only if none of that permanent’s loyalty
abilities have been activated that turn. See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”
306.6. Planeswalkers can be attacked. (See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”)
306.7. If noncombat damage would be dealt to a player by a source controlled by an opponent, that
opponent may have that source deal that damage to a planeswalker the first player controls instead.
This is a redirection effect (see rule 614.9) and is subject to the normal rules for ordering
replacement effects (see rule 616). The opponent chooses whether to redirect the damage as the
redirection effect is applied.
306.8. Damage dealt to a planeswalker results in that many loyalty counters being removed from it.

306.9. If a planeswalker’s loyalty is 0, it’s put into its owner’s graveyard. (This is a state-based action.
See rule 704.)
307. Sorceries
307.1. A player who has priority may cast a sorcery card from his or her hand during a main phase of
his or her turn when the stack is empty. Casting a sorcery as a spell uses the stack. (See rule 601,
“Casting Spells.”)
307.2. When a sorcery spell resolves, the actions stated in its rules text are followed. Then it’s put into
its owner’s graveyard.
307.3. Sorcery subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Sorcery — Arcane.”
Each word after the dash is a separate subtype. The set of sorcery subtypes is the same as the set of
instant subtypes; these subtypes are called spell types. Sorceries may have multiple subtypes. See
rule 204.3j for the complete list of spell types.
307.4. Sorceries can’t enter the battlefield. If a sorcery would enter the battlefield, it remains in its
previous zone instead.
307.5. If a spell, ability, or effect states that a player can do something only “any time he or she could
cast a sorcery,” it means only that the player must have priority, it must be during the main phase of
his or her turn, and the stack must be empty. The player doesn’t need to have a sorcery he or she
could actually cast. Effects that would prevent that player from casting a spell or casting a sorcery
don’t affect the player’s capability to perform that action (unless the action is actually casting a
spell or casting a sorcery).
307.5a Similarly, if an effect checks to see if a spell was cast “any time a sorcery couldn’t have
been cast,” it’s checking only whether the spell’s controller cast it without having priority,
during a phase other than his or her main phase, or while another object was on the stack.
308. Tribals
308.1. Each tribal card has another card type. Casting and resolving a tribal card follows the rules for
casting and resolving a card of the other card type.
308.2. Tribal subtypes are always a single word and are listed after a long dash: “Tribal Enchantment
— Merfolk.” The set of tribal subtypes is the same as the set of creature subtypes; these subtypes
are called creature types. Tribals may have multiple subtypes. See rule 204.3k for the complete list
of creature types.
309. Planes
309.1. Plane is a card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards. Only the Planar Magic casual
variant uses plane cards. See rule 901, “Planar Magic.”
309.2. Plane cards remain in the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a
planar deck and while they’re face up. They’re not permanents. They can’t be cast. If a plane card
would leave the command zone, it remains in the command zone.
309.3. Plane subtypes are listed after a long dash, and may be multiple words: “Plane — Serra’s
Realm.” All words after the dash are, collectively, a single subtype. Planar subtypes are called
planar types. A plane can have only one subtype. See rule 204.3m for the complete list of planar
types.

309.4. A plane card may have any number of static, triggered, and/or activated abilities. As long as a
plane card is face up in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities
may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
309.5. The controller of a face-up plane card is the player designated as the planar controller.
Normally, the planar controller is whoever the active player is. However, if the current planar
controller would leave the game, instead the next player in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game
becomes the planar controller, then the old planar controller leaves the game. The new planar
controller retains that designation until he or she leaves the game or a different player becomes the
active player, whichever comes first.
309.6. A plane card is treated as if its text box included “When you roll {PW}, put this card on the
bottom of its owner’s planar deck face down, then move the top card of your planar deck face up.”
This is called the “planeswalking ability.” A face-up plane card that’s turned face down becomes a
new object.
309.7. Each plane card has a triggered ability that triggers “Whenever you roll {C}.” These are called
“chaos abilities.” Each one is indicated by a {C} to its left, though the symbol itself has no special
rules meaning.
310. Vanguards
310.1. Vanguard is a card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards. Only the Vanguard casual
variant uses vanguard cards. See rule 902, “Vanguard.”
310.2. Vanguard cards remain in the command zone throughout the game. They’re not permanents.
They can’t be cast. If a vanguard card would leave the command zone, it remains in the command
zone.
310.3. Vanguard cards have no subtypes.
310.4. A vanguard card may have any number of static, triggered, and/or activated abilities. As long as
a vanguard card is in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities
may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
310.5. The owner of a vanguard card is the player who started the game with it in the command zone.
The controller of a face-up vanguard card is its owner.
310.6. Each vanguard card has a hand modifier printed in its lower left corner. This is a number
preceded by a plus sign, a number preceded by a minus sign, or a zero. This modifier is applied to
the maximum hand size of the vanguard card’s owner (normally seven) to determine both how
many cards that player draws at the beginning of the game and his or her maximum hand size.
310.7. Each vanguard card has a life modifier printed in its lower right corner. This is a number
preceded by a plus sign, a number preceded by a minus sign, or a zero. This modifier is applied to
the starting life total of the vanguard card’s owner (normally 20) to determine how much life that
player begins the game with.
311. Schemes
311.1. Scheme is a card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards. Only the Archenemy casual
variant uses scheme cards. See rule 904, “Archenemy.”
311.2. Scheme cards remain in the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a
scheme deck and while they’re face up. They’re not permanents. They can’t be cast. If a scheme
card would leave the command zone, it remains in the command zone.

311.3. Scheme cards have no subtypes.
311.4. A scheme card may have any number of static, triggered, and/or activated abilities. As long as a
scheme card is face up in the command zone, its static abilities affect the game, its triggered
abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be activated.
311.5. The owner of a scheme card is the player who started the game with it in the command zone. The
controller of a face-up scheme card is its owner.
311.6. If a non-ongoing scheme card is face up in the command zone, and it isn’t the source of a
triggered ability that has triggered but not yet left the stack, that scheme card is turned face down
and put on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck the next time a player would receive priority.
(This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
311.7. If an ability of a scheme card includes the text “this scheme,” it means the scheme card in the
command zone that’s the source of that ability. This is an exception to rule 109.2.

4. Zones
400. General
400.1. A zone is a place where objects can be during a game. There are normally seven zones: library,
hand, battlefield, graveyard, stack, exile, and command. Some older cards also use the ante zone.
Each player has his or her own library, hand, and graveyard. The other zones are shared by all
players.
400.2. Public zones are zones in which all players can see the cards’ faces, except for those cards that
some rule or effect specifically allow to be face down. Graveyard, battlefield, stack, exile, ante, and
command are public zones. Hidden zones are zones in which not all players can be expected to see
the cards’ faces. Library and hand are hidden zones, even if all the cards in one such zone happen to
be revealed.
400.3. If an object would go to any library, graveyard, or hand other than its owner’s, it goes to its
owner’s corresponding zone.
400.4. Cards with certain card types can’t enter certain zones.
400.4a If an instant or sorcery card would enter the battlefield, it remains in its previous zone.
400.4b If a plane, vanguard, or scheme card would leave the command zone, it remains in the
command zone.
400.5. The order of objects in a library, in a graveyard, or on the stack can’t be changed except when
effects or rules allow it. The same is true for objects arranged in face-down piles in other zones.
Other objects in other zones can be arranged however their owners wish, although who controls
those objects, whether they’re tapped or flipped, and what other objects are attached to them must
remain clear to all players.
400.6. If an object would move from one zone to another, determine what event is moving the object. If
the object is moving to a public zone, all players look at it to see if it has any abilities that would
affect the move. Then any appropriate replacement effects, whether they come from that object or
from elsewhere, are applied to that event. If any effects or rules try to do two or more contradictory
or mutually exclusive things to a particular object, that object’s controller—or its owner if it has no
controller—chooses which effect to apply, and what that effect does. (Note that multiple instances
of the same thing may be mutually exclusive; for example, two simultaneous “destroy” effects.)
Then the event moves the object.
400.7. An object that moves from one zone to another becomes a new object with no memory of, or
relation to, its previous existence. There are six exceptions to this rule:
400.7a Effects from spells, activated abilities, and triggered abilities that change the characteristics
of a permanent spell on the stack continue to apply to the permanent that spell becomes.
400.7b Prevention effects that apply to damage from a permanent spell on the stack continue to
apply to damage from the permanent that spell becomes.
400.7c If an ability of a permanent requires information about choices made as that permanent was
cast as a spell, including what mana was spent to cast that spell, it uses information about the
spell that became that permanent as it resolved.
400.7d Abilities that trigger when an object moves from one zone to another (for example, “When
Rancor is put into a graveyard from the battlefield”) can find the new object that it became in
the zone it moved to when the ability triggered, if that zone is a public zone.

400.7e Abilities of Auras that trigger when the enchanted permanent leaves the battlefield can find
the new object that Aura became in its owner’s graveyard if it was put into that graveyard at the
same time the enchanted permanent left the battlefield. It can also find the new object that Aura
became in its owner’s graveyard as a result of being put there as a state-based action for not
being attached to a permanent. (See rule 704.5n.)
400.7f If an effect grants a nonland card an ability that allows it to be cast, that ability will continue
to apply to the new object that card became after it moved to the stack as a result of being cast
this way.
400.8. If an object in the exile zone is exiled, it doesn’t change zones, but it becomes a new object that
has just been exiled.
400.9. If a face-up object in the command zone is turned face down, it becomes a new object.
400.10. An object is outside the game if it isn’t in any of the game’s zones. Outside the game is not a
zone.
400.10a Cards in a player’s sideboard are outside the game. See rule 100.4.
400.10b Some effects bring cards into a game from outside of it. Those cards remain in the game
until it ends.
400.10c Cards outside the game can’t be affected by spells or abilities, except for characteristic-
defining abilities printed on them (see rule 604.3) and spells and abilities that allow those cards
to be brought into the game.
400.11. Some effects instruct a player to do something to a zone (such as “Shuffle your hand into your
library”). That action is performed on all cards in that zone. The zone itself is not affected.
401. Library
401.1. When a game begins, each player’s deck becomes his or her library.
401.2. Each library must be kept in a single face-down pile. Players can’t look at or change the order of
cards in a library.
401.3. Any player may count the number of cards remaining in any player’s library at any time.
401.4. If an effect puts two or more cards on the top or bottom of a library at the same time, the owner
of those cards may arrange them in any order. That library’s owner doesn’t reveal the order in
which the cards go into his or her library.
401.5. If a spell or ability causes a card to be drawn while another spell is being cast, the drawn card is
kept face down until that spell becomes cast (see rule 601.2h). The same is true with relation to
another ability being activated.
401.6. Some effects tell a player to play with the top card of his or her library revealed, or say that a
player may look at the top card of his or her library. If the top card of the player’s library changes
while a spell is being cast, the new top card won’t be revealed and can’t be looked at until the spell
becomes cast (see rule 601.2h). The same is true with relation to an ability being activated.
401.7. If an effect causes a player to play with the top card of his or her library revealed, and that
particular card stops being revealed for any length of time before being revealed again, it becomes a
new object.

401.8. If an effect causes a player to put a card into a library “Nth from the top,” and that library has
fewer than N cards in it, the player puts that card on the bottom of that library.
402. Hand
402.1. The hand is where a player holds cards that have been drawn. Cards can be put into a player’s
hand by other effects as well. At the beginning of the game, each player draws a hand of seven
cards. (See rule 103, “Starting the Game.”)
402.2. Each player has a maximum hand size, which is normally seven cards. A player may have any
number of cards in his or her hand, but as part of his or her cleanup step, the player must discard
excess cards down to the maximum hand size.
402.3. A player may arrange his or her hand in any convenient fashion and look at it as much as he or
she wishes. A player can’t look at the cards in another player’s hand but may count those cards at
any time.
403. Battlefield
403.1. Most of the area between the players represents the battlefield. The battlefield starts out empty.
Permanents a player controls are normally kept in front of him or her on the battlefield, though there
are some cases (such as an Aura attached to another player’s permanent) when a permanent one
player controls is kept closer to a different player.
403.2. A spell or ability affects and checks only the battlefield unless it specifically mentions a player
or another zone.
403.3. Permanents exist only on the battlefield. Every object on the battlefield is a permanent. See rule
110, “Permanents.”
403.4. Whenever a permanent enters the battlefield, it becomes a new object and has no relationship to
any previous permanent represented by the same card, except for the cases listed in rule 400.7. (This
is also true for any objects entering any zone.)
403.5. Previously, the battlefield was called the “in-play zone.” Cards that were printed with text that
contains the phrases “in play,” “from play,” “into play,” or the like are referring to the battlefield.
Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
404. Graveyard
404.1. A player’s graveyard is his or her discard pile. Any object that’s countered, discarded, destroyed,
or sacrificed is put on top of its owner’s graveyard, as is any instant or sorcery spell that’s finished
resolving. Each player’s graveyard starts out empty.
404.2. Each graveyard is kept in a single face-up pile. A player can examine the cards in any graveyard
at any time but normally can’t change their order. Additional rules applying to sanctioned
tournaments may allow a player to change the order of cards in his or her graveyard.
404.3. If an effect or rule puts two or more cards into the same graveyard at the same time, the owner of
those cards may arrange them in any order.
405. Stack

405.1. When a spell is cast, the physical card is put on the stack (see rule 601.2a). When an ability is
activated or triggers, it goes on top of the stack without any card associated with it (see rules 602.2a
and 603.3).
405.2. The stack keeps track of the order that spells and/or abilities were added to it. Each time an
object is put on the stack, it’s put on top of all objects already there.
405.3. If an effect puts two or more objects on the stack at the same time, those controlled by the active
player are put on lowest, followed by each other player’s objects in APNAP order (see rule 101.4).
If a player controls more than one of these objects, that player chooses their relative order on the
stack.
405.4. Each spell has all the characteristics of the card associated with it. Each activated or triggered
ability that’s on the stack has the text of the ability that created it and no other characteristics. The
controller of a spell is the person who cast it. The controller of an activated ability is the player who
activated it. The controller of a triggered ability is the player who controlled the ability’s source
when it triggered, unless it’s a delayed triggered ability. To determine the controller of a delayed
triggered ability, see rules 603.7d–f.
405.5. When all players pass in succession, the top (last-added) spell or ability on the stack resolves. If
the stack is empty when all players pass, the current step or phase ends and the next begins.
405.6. Some things that happen during the game don’t use the stack.
405.6a Effects don’t go on the stack; they’re the result of spells and abilities resolving. Effects may
create delayed triggered abilities, however, and these may go on the stack when they trigger (see
rule 603.7).
405.6b Static abilities continuously generate effects and don’t go on the stack. (See rule 604,
“Handling Static Abilities.”) This includes characteristic-defining abilities such as “[This object]
is red” (see rule 604.3).
405.6c Mana abilities resolve immediately. If a mana ability both produces mana and has another
effect, the mana is produced and the other effect happens immediately. If a player had priority
before a mana ability was activated, that player gets priority after it resolves. (See rule 605,
“Mana Abilities.”)
405.6d Special actions don’t use the stack; they happen immediately. See rule 115, “Special
Actions.”
405.6e Turn-based actions don’t use the stack; they happen automatically when certain steps or
phases begin. They’re dealt with before a player would receive priority (see rule 116.3a). Turn-
based actions also happen automatically when each step and phase ends; no player receives
priority afterward. See rule 703.
405.6f State-based actions don’t use the stack; they happen automatically when certain conditions
are met. See rule 704. They are dealt with before a player would receive priority. See rule 116.5.
405.6g A player may concede the game at any time. That player leaves the game immediately. See
rule 104.3a.
405.6h If a player leaves a multiplayer game, objects may leave the game, cease to exist, change
control, or be exiled as a result. These actions happen immediately. See rule 800.4a.
406. Exile

406.1. The exile zone is essentially a holding area for objects. Some spells and abilities exile an object
without any way to return that object to another zone. Other spells and abilities exile an object only
temporarily.
406.2. To exile an object is to put it into the exile zone from whatever zone it’s currently in. An exiled
card is a card that’s been put into the exile zone.
406.3. Exiled cards are, by default, kept face up and may be examined by any player at any time. Cards
“exiled face down” can’t be examined by any player except when instructions allow it.
406.4. Exiled cards that might return to the battlefield or any other zone should be kept in separate piles
to keep track of their respective ways of returning. Exiled cards that may have an impact on the
game due to their own abilities (such as cards with haunt) or the abilities of the cards that exiled
them should likewise be kept in separate piles.
406.5. An object may have one ability printed on it that causes one or more cards to be exiled, and
another ability that refers either to “the exiled cards” or to cards “exiled with [this object].” These
abilities are linked: the second refers only to cards that have been exiled due to the first. See rule
607, “Linked Abilities.”
406.6. If an object in the exile zone becomes exiled, it doesn’t change zones, but it becomes a new
object that has just been exiled.
406.7. Previously, the exile zone was called the “removed-from-the-game zone.” Cards that were
printed with text that “removes [an object] from the game” exiles that object. The same is true for
cards printed with text that “sets [an object] aside.” Cards that were printed with that text have
received errata in the Oracle card reference.
407. Ante
407.1. Earlier versions of the Magic rules included an ante rule as a way of playing “for keeps.”
Playing Magic games for ante is now considered an optional variation on the game, and it’s allowed
only where it’s not forbidden by law or by other rules. Playing for ante is strictly forbidden under
the Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules (www.wizards.com/WPN/Events/Rules.aspx).
407.2. When playing for ante, each player puts one random card from his or her deck into the ante zone
after determining which player goes first but before players draw any cards. Cards in the ante zone
may be examined by any player at any time. At the end of the game, the winner becomes the owner
of all the cards in the ante zone.
407.3. A few cards have the text “Remove [this card] from your deck before playing if you’re not
playing for ante.” These are the only cards that can add or remove cards from the ante zone or
change a card’s owner.
407.4. To ante an object is to put that object into the ante zone from whichever zone it’s currently in.
The owner of an object is the only person who can ante that object.
408. Command
408.1. The command zone is a game area reserved for certain specialized objects that have an
overarching effect on the game, yet are not permanents and cannot be destroyed.
408.2. Emblems may be created in the command zone. See rule 113, “Emblems.”

408.3. In the Planar Magic, Vanguard, Commander, and Archenemy casual variants, nontraditional
Magic cards and/or specially designated cards start the game in the command zone. Each variant
has its own rules regarding such cards. See section 9, “Casual Variants.”

5. Turn Structure
500. General
500.1. A turn consists of five phases, in this order: beginning, precombat main, combat, postcombat
main, and ending. Each of these phases takes place every turn, even if nothing happens during the
phase. The beginning, combat, and ending phases are further broken down into steps, which
proceed in order.
500.2. A phase or step in which players receive priority ends when the stack is empty and all players
pass in succession. Simply having the stack become empty doesn’t cause such a phase or step to
end; all players have to pass in succession with the stack empty. Because of this, each player gets a
chance to add new things to the stack before that phase or step ends.
500.3. A step in which no players receive priority ends when all specified actions that take place during
that step are completed. The only such steps are the untap step (see rule 502) and certain cleanup
steps (see rule 514).
500.4. When a step or phase ends, any unused mana left in a player’s mana pool empties. This turn-
based action doesn’t use the stack.
500.5. When a phase or step ends, any effects scheduled to last “until end of” that phase or step expire.
When a phase or step begins, any effects scheduled to last “until” that phase or step expire. Effects
that last “until end of combat” expire at the end of the combat phase, not at the beginning of the end
of combat step. Effects that last “until end of turn” are subject to special rules; see rule 514.2.
500.6. When a phase or step begins, any abilities that trigger “at the beginning of” that phase or step are
added to the stack.
500.7. Some effects can give a player extra turns. They do this by adding the turns directly after the
current turn. If a player gets multiple extra turns or if multiple players get extra turns during a single
turn, the extra turns are added one at a time. The most recently created turn will be taken first.
500.8. Some effects can add phases to a turn. They do this by adding the phases directly after the
specified phase. If multiple extra phases are created after the same phase, the most recently created
phase will occur first.
500.9. Some effects can add steps to a phase. They do this by adding the steps directly after a specified
step or directly before a specified step. If multiple extra steps are created after the same step, the
most recently created step will occur first.
500.10. Some effects can cause a step, phase, or turn to be skipped. To skip a step, phase, or turn is to
proceed past it as though it didn’t exist. See rule 614.10.
500.11. No game events can occur between turns, phases, or steps.
501. Beginning Phase
501.1. The beginning phase consists of three steps, in this order: untap, upkeep, and draw.
502. Untap Step
502.1. First, all phased-in permanents with phasing that the active player controls phase out, and all
phased-out permanents that the active player controlled when they phased out phase in. This all
happens simultaneously. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. See rule 702.24, “Phasing.”

502.2. Second, the active player determines which permanents he or she controls will untap. Then he or
she untaps them all simultaneously. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. Normally, all of a
player’s permanents untap, but effects can keep one or more of a player’s permanents from
untapping.
502.3. No player receives priority during the untap step, so no spells can be cast or resolve and no
abilities can be activated or resolve. Any ability that triggers during this step will be held until the
next time a player would receive priority, which is usually during the upkeep step. (See rule 503,
“Upkeep Step.”)
503. Upkeep Step
503.1. First, any abilities that trigger at the beginning of the upkeep step and any abilities that triggered
during the turn’s untap step go on the stack. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
503.2. Second, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities.
504. Draw Step
504.1. First, the active player draws a card. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
504.2. Second, any abilities that trigger at the beginning of the draw step and any other abilities that
have triggered go on the stack.
504.3. Third, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities.
505. Main Phase
505.1. There are two main phases in a turn. In each turn, the first main phase (also known as the
precombat main phase) and the second main phase (also known as the postcombat main phase) are
separated by the combat phase (see rule 506, “Combat Phase”). The precombat and postcombat
main phases are individually and collectively known as the main phase.
505.1a Only the first main phase of the turn is a precombat main phase. All other main phases are
postcombat main phases. This includes the second main phase of a turn in which the combat
phase has been skipped. It is also true of a turn in which an effect has caused an additional
combat phase and an additional main phase to be created.
505.2. The main phase has no steps, so a main phase ends when all players pass in succession while the
stack is empty. (See rule 500.2.)
505.3. First, but only if the players are playing an Archenemy game (see rule 904), the active player is
the archenemy, and it’s the active player’s precombat main phase, the active player sets the top card
of his or her scheme deck in motion (see rule 701.21). This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
505.4. Second, any abilities that trigger at the beginning of the main phase go on the stack. (See rule
603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
505.5. Third, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities. The active
player may play a land.
505.5a The main phase is the only phase in which a player can normally cast artifact, creature,
enchantment, planeswalker, and sorcery spells. Only the active player may cast these spells.
505.5b During either main phase, the active player may play one land card from his or her hand if
the stack is empty, if the player has priority, and if he or she hasn’t yet taken this special action

this turn. (See rule 305, “Lands.”) This action doesn’t use the stack. Neither the land nor the
action of playing the land is a spell or ability, so it can’t be countered, and players can’t respond
to it with instants or activated abilities.
506. Combat Phase
506.1. The combat phase has five steps, which proceed in order: beginning of combat, declare attackers,
declare blockers, combat damage, and end of combat. The declare blockers and combat damage
steps are skipped if no creatures are declared as attackers or put onto the battlefield attacking (see
rule 508.4). There are two combat damage steps if any attacking or blocking creature has first strike
(see rule 702.7) or double strike (see rule 702.4).
506.2. During the combat phase, the active player is the attacking player; creatures that player controls
may attack. During the combat phase of a two-player game, the nonactive player is the defending
player; that player and planeswalkers he or she controls may be attacked.
506.2a During the combat phase of a multiplayer game, there may be one or more defending
players, depending on the variant being played and the options chosen for it. Unless all the
attacking player’s opponents automatically become defending players during the combat phase,
the attacking player chooses one of his or her opponents as a turn-based action during the
beginning of combat step. (Note that the choice may be dictated by the variant being played or
the options chosen for it.) That player becomes the defending player. See rule 802, “Attack
Multiple Players Option,” rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and rule 809,
“Emperor Variant.”
506.2b In the Two-Headed Giant multiplayer variant, the nonactive team is the defending team. See
rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
506.3. Only a creature can attack or block. Only a player or a planeswalker can be attacked.
506.3a If an effect would put a noncreature permanent onto the battlefield attacking or blocking, the
permanent does enter the battlefield but it’s never considered to be an attacking or blocking
permanent.
506.3b If an effect would put a creature onto the battlefield attacking under the control of any player
except an attacking player, that creature does enter the battlefield, but it’s never considered to be
an attacking creature.
506.3c If an effect would put a creature onto the battlefield attacking either a player not in the game
or a planeswalker no longer on the battlefield or no longer a planeswalker, that creature does
enter the battlefield, but it’s never considered to be an attacking creature.
506.3d If an effect would put a creature onto the battlefield blocking but the creature it would block
isn’t attacking either the first creature’s controller or a planeswalker that player controls, that
creature does enter the battlefield, but it’s never considered to be a blocking creature.
506.4. A permanent is removed from combat if it leaves the battlefield, if its controller changes, if it
phases out, if an effect specifically removes it from combat, if it’s a planeswalker that’s being
attacked and stops being a planeswalker, or if it’s an attacking or blocking creature that regenerates
(see rule 701.11) or stops being a creature. A creature that’s removed from combat stops being an
attacking, blocking, blocked, and/or unblocked creature. A planeswalker that’s removed from
combat stops being attacked.
506.4a Once a creature has been declared as an attacking or blocking creature, spells or abilities that
would have kept that creature from attacking or blocking don’t remove the creature from
combat.

506.4b Tapping or untapping a creature that’s already been declared as an attacker or blocker
doesn’t remove it from combat and doesn’t prevent its combat damage.
506.4c If a creature is attacking a planeswalker, removing that planeswalker from combat doesn’t
remove that creature from combat. It continues to be an attacking creature, although it is
attacking neither a player nor a planeswalker. It may be blocked. If it is unblocked, it will deal
no combat damage.
506.4d A permanent that’s both a blocking creature and a planeswalker that’s being attacked is
removed from combat only if it stops being both a creature and a planeswalker. If it stops being
one of those card types but continues to be the other, it continues to be either a blocking creature
or a planeswalker that’s being attacked, whichever is appropriate.
506.5. A creature attacks alone if it’s the only creature declared as an attacker during the declare
attackers step. A creature is attacking alone if it’s attacking but no other creatures are. A creature
blocks alone if it’s the only creature declared as a blocker during the declare blockers step. A
creature is blocking alone if it’s blocking but no other creatures are.
506.6. Some spells state that they may be cast “only [before/after] [a particular point in the combat
phase],” in which that point may be “attackers are declared,” “blockers are declared,” “the combat
damage step,” “the end of combat step,” “the combat phase,” or “combat.”
506.6a A spell that states it may be cast “only before (or after) attackers are declared” is referring to
the turn-based action of declaring attackers. It may be cast only before (or after) the declare
attackers step begins, regardless of whether any attackers are actually declared. (See rule 508.)
506.6b A spell that states it may be cast “only before (or after) blockers are declared” is referring to
the turn-based action of declaring blockers. It may be cast only before (or after) the declare
blockers step begins, regardless of whether any blockers are actually declared. (See rule 509.)
506.6c Some spells state that they may be cast only “during combat” or “during a certain player’s
combat phase” in addition to the criteria described in rule 506.6. If a turn has multiple combat
phases, such spells may be cast at an appropriate time during any of them.
506.6d Some spells state that they may be cast “only before (or after) [a particular point in the
combat phase],” but don’t meet the additional criteria described in rule 506.6c. If a turn has
multiple combat phases, such spells may be cast that turn only before (or after) the stated point
of the first combat phase.
506.6e If a spell states that it may be cast “only before [a particular point in the combat phase],” but
the stated point doesn’t exist within the relevant combat phase because the declare blockers step
and the combat damage step are skipped (see rule 508.6), then the spell may be cast only before
the declare attackers step ends. If the stated point doesn’t exist because the relevant combat
phase has been skipped, then the spell may be cast only before the precombat main phase ends.
506.6f If a spell states that it may be cast “only during combat after blockers are declared,” but the
declare blockers step is skipped that combat phase (see rule 508.6), then the spell may not be
cast during that combat phase.
506.6g Rules 506.6 and 506.6a–f apply to abilities that state that they may be activated only at
certain times with respect to combat just as they apply to spells that state that they may be cast
only at certain times with respect to combat.
507. Beginning of Combat Step

507.1. First, if the game being played is a multiplayer game in which the active player’s opponent’s
don’t all automatically become defending players, the active player chooses one of his or her
opponents. That player becomes the defending player. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
(See rule 506.2.)
507.2. Second, any abilities that trigger at the beginning of combat go on the stack. (See rule 603,
“Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
507.3. Third, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities.
508. Declare Attackers Step
508.1. First, the active player declares attackers. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. To
declare attackers, the active player follows the steps below, in order. If at any point during the
declaration of attackers, the active player is unable to comply with any of the steps listed below, the
declaration is illegal; the game returns to the moment before the declaration (see rule 716,
“Handling Illegal Actions”).
508.1a The active player chooses which creatures that he or she controls, if any, will attack. The
chosen creatures must be untapped, and each one must either have haste or have been controlled
by the active player continuously since the turn began.
508.1b If the defending player controls any planeswalkers, or the game allows the active player to
attack multiple other players, the active player announces which player or planeswalker each of
the chosen creatures is attacking.
508.1c The active player checks each creature he or she controls to see whether it’s affected by any
restrictions (effects that say a creature can’t attack, or that it can’t attack unless some condition
is met). If any restrictions are being disobeyed, the declaration of attackers is illegal.
Example: A player controls two creatures, each with a restriction that states “[This
creature] can’t attack alone.” It’s legal to declare both as attackers.
508.1d The active player checks each creature he or she controls to see whether it’s affected by any
requirements (effects that say a creature must attack, or that it must attack if some condition is
met). If the number of requirements that are being obeyed is fewer than the maximum possible
number of requirements that could be obeyed without disobeying any restrictions, the
declaration of attackers is illegal. If a creature can’t attack unless a player pays a cost, that
player is not required to pay that cost, even if attacking with that creature would increase the
number of requirements being obeyed.
Example: A player controls two creatures: one that “attacks if able” and one with no
abilities. An effect states “No more than one creature can attack each turn.” The only
legal attack is for just the creature that “attacks if able” to attack. It’s illegal to attack
with the other creature, attack with both, or attack with neither.
508.1e If any of the chosen creatures have banding or a “bands with other” ability, the active player
announces which creatures, if any, are banded with which. (See rule 702.20, “Banding.”)
508.1f The active player taps the chosen creatures. Tapping a creature when it’s declared as an
attacker isn’t a cost; attacking simply causes creatures to become tapped.
508.1g If any of the chosen creatures require paying costs to attack, the active player determines the
total cost to attack. Costs may include paying mana, tapping permanents, sacrificing
permanents, discarding cards, and so on. Once the total cost is determined, it becomes “locked
in.” If effects would change the total cost after this time, ignore this change.

508.1h If any of the costs require mana, the active player then has a chance to activate mana
abilities (see rule 605, “Mana Abilities”).
508.1i Once the player has enough mana in his or her mana pool, he or she pays all costs in any
order. Partial payments are not allowed.
508.1j Each chosen creature still controlled by the active player becomes an attacking creature. It
remains an attacking creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends,
whichever comes first. See rule 506.4.
508.2. Second, any abilities that triggered on attackers being declared go on the stack. (See rule 603,
“Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
508.2a Abilities that trigger on a creature attacking trigger only at the point the creature is declared
as an attacker. They will not trigger if a creature attacks and then that creature’s characteristics
change to match the ability’s trigger condition.
Example: A permanent has the ability “Whenever a green creature attacks, destroy that
creature at end of combat.” If a blue creature attacks and is later turned green, the
ability will not trigger.
508.3. Third, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities.
508.4. If a creature is put onto the battlefield attacking, its controller chooses which defending player or
which planeswalker a defending player controls it’s attacking as it enters the battlefield (unless the
effect that put it onto the battlefield specifies what it’s attacking). Such creatures are “attacking”
but, for the purposes of trigger events and effects, they never “attacked.”
508.4a If the effect that put a creature onto the battlefield attacking specifies it’s attacking a certain
player, and that player is no longer in the game when the effect resolves, the creature is put onto
the battlefield but is never considered an attacking creature. The same is true if the effect
specifies a creature is put onto the battlefield attacking a planeswalker and that planeswalker is
no longer on the battlefield or is no longer a planeswalker when the effect resolves.
508.5. If an ability of an attacking creature refers to a defending player, or a spell or ability refers to
both an attacking creature and a defending player, then unless otherwise specified, the defending
player it’s referring to is the player that creature was attacking at the time it became an attacking
creature that combat, or the controller of the planeswalker that creature was attacking at the time it
became an attacking creature that combat.
508.5a In a multiplayer game, any rule, object, or effect that refers to a “defending player” refers to
one specific defending player, not to all of the defending players. If a spell or ability could apply
to multiple attacking creatures, the appropriate defending player is individually determined for
each of those attacking creatures. If there are multiple defending players that could be chosen,
the controller of the spell or ability chooses one.
508.6. If no creatures are declared as attackers or put onto the battlefield attacking, skip the declare
blockers and combat damage steps.
509. Declare Blockers Step
509.1. First, the defending player declares blockers. This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack. To
declare blockers, the defending player follows the steps below, in order. If at any point during the
declaration of blockers, the defending player is unable to comply with any of the steps listed below,
the declaration is illegal; the game returns to the moment before the declaration (see rule 716,
“Handling Illegal Actions”).

509.1a The defending player chooses which creatures that he or she controls, if any, will block. The
chosen creatures must be untapped. For each of the chosen creatures, the defending player
chooses one creature for it to block that’s attacking him, her, or a planeswalker he or she
controls.
509.1b The defending player checks each creature he or she controls to see whether it’s affected by
any restrictions (effects that say a creature can’t block, or that it can’t block unless some
condition is met). If any restrictions are being disobeyed, the declaration of blockers is illegal.
A restriction may be created by an evasion ability (a static ability an attacking creature has
that restricts what can block it). If an attacking creature gains or loses an evasion ability after a
legal block has been declared, it doesn’t affect that block. Different evasion abilities are
cumulative.
Example: An attacking creature with flying and shadow can’t be blocked by a creature
with flying but without shadow.
509.1c The defending player checks each creature he or she controls to see whether it’s affected by
any requirements (effects that say a creature must block, or that it must block if some condition
is met). If the number of requirements that are being obeyed is fewer than the maximum
possible number of requirements that could be obeyed without disobeying any restrictions, the
declaration of blockers is illegal. If a creature can’t block unless a player pays a cost, that player
is not required to pay that cost, even if blocking with that creature would increase the number of
requirements being obeyed.
Example: A player controls one creature that “blocks if able” and another creature
with no abilities. An effect states “Creatures can’t be blocked except by two or more
creatures.” Having only the first creature block violates the restriction. Having neither
creature block fulfills the restriction but not the requirement. Having both creatures
block the same attacking creature fulfills both the restriction and the requirement, so
that’s the only option.
509.1d If any of the chosen creatures require paying costs to block, the defending player determines
the total cost to block. Costs may include paying mana, tapping permanents, sacrificing
permanents, discarding cards, and so on. Once the total cost is determined, it becomes “locked
in.” If effects would change the total cost after this time, ignore this change.
509.1e If any of the costs require mana, the defending player then has a chance to activate mana
abilities (see rule 605, “Mana Abilities”).
509.1f Once the player has enough mana in his or her mana pool, he or she pays all costs in any
order. Partial payments are not allowed.
509.1g Each chosen creature still controlled by the defending player becomes a blocking creature.
Each one is blocking the attacking creatures chosen for it. It remains a blocking creature until
it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule 506.4.
509.1h An attacking creature with one or more creatures declared as blockers for it becomes a
blocked creature; one with no creatures declared as blockers for it becomes an unblocked
creature. This remains unchanged until the creature is removed from combat, an effect says that
it becomes blocked or unblocked, or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. A creature
remains blocked even if all the creatures blocking it are removed from combat.
509.2. Second, for each attacking creature that’s become blocked, the active player announces that
creature’s damage assignment order, which consists of the creatures blocking it in an order of that
player’s choice. (During the combat damage step, an attacking creature can’t assign combat damage
to a creature that’s blocking it unless each creature ahead of that blocking creature in its order is
assigned lethal damage.) This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.

Example: Craw Wurm is blocked by Llanowar Elves, Runeclaw Bear, and Serra Angel. The
Craw Wurm’s controller announces the Craw Wurm’s damage assignment order as Serra
Angel, then Runeclaw Bear, then Llanowar Elves.
509.2a During the declare blockers step, if a blocking creature is removed from combat or a spell or
ability causes it to stop blocking an attacking creature, the blocking creature is removed from all
relevant damage assignment orders. The relative order among the remaining blocking creatures
is unchanged.
509.3. Third, for each blocking creature, the defending player announces that creature’s damage
assignment order, which consists of the creatures it’s blocking in an order of that player’s choice.
(During the combat damage step, a blocking creature can’t assign combat damage to a creature it’s
blocking unless each creature ahead of that blocked creature in its order is assigned lethal damage.)
This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
509.3a During the declare blockers step, if an attacking creature is removed from combat or a spell
or ability causes it to stop being blocked by a blocking creature, the attacking creature is
removed from all relevant damage assignment orders. The relative order among the remaining
attacking creatures is unchanged.
509.4. Fourth, any abilities that triggered on blockers being declared go on the stack. (See rule 603,
“Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
509.4a An ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] blocks, . . .” generally triggers only once
each combat for that creature, even if it blocks multiple creatures. It triggers if the creature is
declared as a blocker. It will also trigger if that creature becomes a blocker as the result of an
effect, but only if it wasn’t a blocking creature at that time. (See rule 509.1g.) It won’t trigger if
the creature is put onto the battlefield blocking.
509.4b An ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] blocks a creature, . . .” triggers once for each
attacking creature the creature with the ability blocks. It triggers if the creature is declared as a
blocker. It will also trigger if an effect causes that creature to block an attacking creature, but
only if it wasn’t already blocking that attacking creature at that time. It won’t trigger if the
creature is put onto the battlefield blocking.
509.4c An ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] becomes blocked, . . .” generally triggers
only once each combat for that creature, even if it’s blocked by multiple creatures. It will trigger
if that creature becomes blocked by at least one creature declared as a blocker. It will also
trigger if that creature becomes blocked by an effect or by a creature that’s put onto the
battlefield as a blocker, but only if the attacking creature was an unblocked creature at that time.
(See rule 509.1h.)
509.4d An ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] becomes blocked by a creature, . . .” triggers
once for each creature that blocks the named creature. It triggers if a creature is declared as a
blocker for the attacking creature. It will also trigger if an effect causes a creature to block the
attacking creature, but only if it wasn’t already blocking that attacking creature at that time. In
addition, it will trigger if a creature is put onto the battlefield blocking that creature. It won’t
trigger if the creature becomes blocked by an effect rather than a creature.
509.4e If an ability triggers when a creature blocks or becomes blocked by a particular number of
creatures, the ability triggers if the creature blocks or is blocked by that many creatures when
blockers are declared. Effects that add or remove blockers can also cause such abilities to
trigger. This applies to abilities that trigger on a creature blocking or being blocked by at least a
certain number of creatures as well.

509.4f If an ability triggers when a creature with certain characteristics blocks, it will trigger only if
the creature has those characteristics at the point blockers are declared, or at the point an effect
causes it to block. If an ability triggers when a creature with certain characteristics becomes
blocked, it will trigger only if the creature has those characteristics at the point it becomes a
blocked creature. If an ability triggers when a creature becomes blocked by a creature with
certain characteristics, it will trigger only if the latter creature has those characteristics at the
point it becomes a blocking creature. None of those abilities will trigger if the relevant
creature’s characteristics change to match the ability’s trigger condition later on.
Example: A creature has the ability “Whenever this creature becomes blocked by a
white creature, destroy that creature at end of combat.” If the creature becomes blocked
by a black creature that is later turned white, the ability will not trigger.
509.4g An ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] attacks and isn’t blocked, . . .” triggers if no
creatures are declared as blockers for that creature. It won’t trigger if the attacking creature is
blocked and then all its blockers are removed from combat.
509.5. Fifth, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities.
509.6. If a spell or ability causes a creature on the battlefield to block an attacking creature, the active
player announces the blocking creature’s placement in the attacking creature’s damage assignment
order. The relative order among the remaining blocking creatures is unchanged. Then the defending
player announces the attacking creature’s placement in the blocking creature’s damage assignment
order. The relative order among the remaining attacking creatures is unchanged. This is done as part
of the blocking effect.
509.7. If a creature is put onto the battlefield blocking, its controller chooses which attacking creature
it’s blocking as it enters the battlefield (unless the effect that put it onto the battlefield specifies
what it’s blocking), then the active player announces the new creature’s placement in the blocked
creature’s damage assignment order. The relative order among the remaining blocking creatures is
unchanged. A creature put onto the battlefield this way is “blocking” but, for the purposes of trigger
events and effects, it never “blocked.”
Example: Lumengrid Warden is blocked by Runeclaw Bear. The defending player casts
Flash Foliage, which puts a Saproling token onto the battlefield blocking the Lumengrid
Warden. Lumengrid Warden’s controller announces the Lumengrid Warden’s damage
assignment order as the Saproling token, then Runeclaw Bear.
510. Combat Damage Step
510.1. First, the active player announces how each attacking creature assigns its combat damage, then
the defending player announces how each blocking creature assigns its combat damage. This turn-
based action doesn’t use the stack. A player assigns a creature’s combat damage according to the
following rules:
510.1a Each attacking creature and each blocking creature assigns combat damage equal to its
power. Creatures that would assign 0 or less damage this way don’t assign combat damage at
all.
510.1b An unblocked creature assigns its combat damage to the player or planeswalker it’s
attacking. If it isn’t currently attacking anything (if, for example, it was attacking a planeswalker
that has left the battlefield), it assigns no combat damage.
510.1c A blocked creature assigns its combat damage to the creatures blocking it. If no creatures are
currently blocking it (if, for example, they were destroyed or removed from combat), it assigns
no combat damage. If exactly one creature is blocking it, it assigns all its combat damage to that
creature. If two or more creatures are blocking it, it assigns its combat damage to those creatures
according to the damage assignment order announced for it. This may allow the blocked

creature to divide its combat damage. However, it can’t assign combat damage to a creature
that’s blocking it unless each creature that precedes that blocking creature in its order is
assigned lethal damage. When checking for assigned lethal damage, take into account damage
already marked on the creature and damage from other creatures that’s being assigned during
the same combat damage step, but not any abilities or effects that might change the amount of
damage that’s actually dealt. An amount of damage that’s greater than a creature’s lethal
damage may be assigned to it.
Example: The damage assignment order of an attacking Craw Wurm (a 6/4 creature) is
Wall of Wood (a 0/3 creature) then Eager Cadet (a 1/1 creature). Craw Wurm can
assign 3 damage to the Wall and 3 damage to the Cadet, 4 damage to the Wall and 2
damage to the Cadet, 5 damage to the Wall and 1 damage to the Cadet, or 6 damage to
the Wall.
Example: The damage assignment order of an attacking Craw Wurm (a 6/4 creature) is
Wall of Wood (a 0/3 creature) then Eager Cadet (a 1/1 creature). During the declare
blockers step, the defending player casts Giant Growth targeting Wall of Wood, which
gives it +3/+3 until end of turn. Craw Wurm must assign its 6 damage to the Wall.
Example: The damage assignment order of an attacking Craw Wurm (a 6/4 creature) is
Wall of Wood (a 0/3 creature) then Eager Cadet (a 1/1 creature). During the declare
blockers step, the defending player casts Mending Hands targeting Wall of Wood, which
prevents the next 4 damage that would be dealt to it. Craw Wurm can assign 3 damage
to the Wall and 3 damage to the Cadet, 4 damage to the Wall and 2 damage to the
Cadet, 5 damage to the Wall and 1 damage to the Cadet, or 6 damage to the Wall.
Example: The damage assignment order of an attacking Enormous Baloth (a 7/7
creature) is Trained Armodon (a 3/3 creature) that already has 2 damage marked on it,
then Foriysian Brigade (a 2/4 creature that can block an additional creature), then
Silverback Ape (a 5/5 creature). The damage assignment order of an attacking
Durkwood Boars (a 4/4 creature) is the same Foriysian Brigade, then Goblin Piker (a
2/1 creature). Among other possibilities, the active player may have the Baloth assign 1
damage to the Armodon, 1 damage to the Brigade, and 5 damage to the Ape, and have
the Boars assign 3 damage to the Brigade and 1 damage to the Piker.
510.1d A blocking creature assigns combat damage to the creatures it’s blocking. If it isn’t currently
blocking any creatures (if, for example, they were destroyed or removed from combat), it
assigns no combat damage. If it’s blocking exactly one creature, it assigns all its combat damage
to that creature. If it’s blocking two or more creatures, it assigns its combat damage to those
creatures according to the damage assignment order announced for it. This may allow the
blocking creature to divide its combat damage. However, it can’t assign combat damage to a
creature that it’s blocking unless each creature that precedes that blocked creature is assigned
lethal damage. When checking for assigned lethal damage, take into account damage already
marked on the creature and damage from other creatures that’s being assigned during the same
combat damage step, but not any abilities or effects that might change the amount of damage
that’s actually dealt. An amount of damage that’s greater than a creature’s lethal damage may be
assigned to it.
510.1e Each creature’s damage must be assigned fully before another creature’s damage may be
assigned.
510.1f Once a player has assigned combat damage from each attacking or blocking creature he or
she controls, the total damage assignment is checked to see if it complies with the above rules. If
it doesn’t, the combat damage assignment is illegal; the game returns to the moment before that
player began to assign combat damage. (See rule 716, “Handling Illegal Actions”).
510.2. Second, all combat damage that’s been assigned is dealt simultaneously. This turn-based action
doesn’t use the stack. No player has the chance to cast spells or activate abilities between the time
combat damage is assigned and the time it’s dealt. This is a change from previous rules.

Example: Suntail Hawk (a 1/1 creature with flying) and Goblin Piker (a 2/1 creature) are
attacking. Mogg Fanatic (a 1/1 creature with the ability “Sacrifice Mogg Fanatic: Mogg
Fanatic deals 1 damage to target creature or player) blocks the Goblin Piker. The defending
player sacrifices Mogg Fanatic during the declare blockers step to deal 1 damage to the
Suntail Hawk. The Hawk is destroyed. The Piker deals and is dealt no combat damage this
turn. If the defending player instead left Mogg Fanatic on the battlefield, the Fanatic and the
Piker would have dealt lethal damage to one another, but the Suntail Hawk couldn’t have
been dealt damage.
510.3. Third, any abilities that triggered on damage being assigned or dealt go on the stack. (See rule
603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
510.4. Fourth, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities.
510.5. If at least one attacking or blocking creature has first strike (see rule 702.7) or double strike (see
rule 702.4) as the combat damage step begins, the only creatures that assign combat damage in that
step are those with first strike or double strike. After that step, instead of proceeding to the end of
combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only creatures that assign combat
damage in that step are the remaining attackers and blockers that had neither first strike nor double
strike as the first combat damage step began, as well as the remaining attackers and blockers that
currently have double strike. After that step, the phase proceeds to the end of combat step.
511. End of Combat Step
511.1. First, all “at end of combat” abilities trigger and go on the stack. (See rule 603, “Handling
Triggered Abilities.”)
511.2. Second, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities.
511.3. As soon as the end of combat step ends, all creatures and planeswalkers are removed from
combat. After the end of combat step ends, the combat phase is over and the postcombat main phase
begins (see rule 505).
512. Ending Phase
512.1. The ending phase consists of two steps: end and cleanup.
513. End Step
513.1. First, all abilities that trigger “at the beginning of the end step” or “at the beginning of the next
end step” go on the stack. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
513.1a Previously, abilities that trigger at the beginning of the end step were printed with the trigger
condition “at end of turn.” Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the
Oracle card reference to say “at the beginning of the end step” or “at the beginning of the next
end step.”
513.2. Second, the active player gets priority. Players may cast spells and activate abilities.
513.3. If a permanent with an ability that triggers “at the beginning of the end step” enters the
battlefield during this step, that ability won’t trigger until the next turn’s end step. Likewise, if a
delayed triggered ability that triggers “at the beginning of the next end step” is created during this
step, that ability won’t trigger until the next turn’s end step. In other words, the step doesn’t “back
up” so those abilities can go on the stack. This rule applies only to triggered abilities; it doesn’t
apply to continuous effects whose durations say “until end of turn” or “this turn.” (See rule 514,
“Cleanup Step.”)

514. Cleanup Step
514.1. First, if the active player’s hand contains more cards than his or her maximum hand size
(normally seven), he or she discards enough cards to reduce his or her hand size to that number.
This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
514.2. Second, the following actions happen simultaneously: all damage marked on permanents
(including phased-out permanents) is removed and all “until end of turn” and “this turn” effects end.
This turn-based action doesn’t use the stack.
514.3. Normally, no player receives priority during the cleanup step, so no spells can be cast and no
abilities can be activated. However, this rule is subject to the following exception:
514.3a At this point, the game checks to see if any state-based actions would be performed and/or
any triggered abilities are waiting to be put onto the stack (including those that trigger “at the
beginning of the next cleanup step”). If so, those state-based actions are performed, then those
triggered abilities are put on the stack, then the active player gets priority. Players may cast
spells and activate abilities. Once the stack is empty and all players pass in succession, another
cleanup step begins.

6. Spells, Abilities, and Effects
600. General
601. Casting Spells
601.1. Previously, the action of casting a spell, or casting a card as a spell, was referred to on cards as
“playing” that spell or that card. Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the
Oracle card reference so they now refer to “casting” that spell or that card.
601.1a Some effects still refer to “playing” a card. “Playing a card” means playing that card as a
land or casting that card as a spell, whichever is appropriate.
601.2. To cast a spell is to take it from where it is (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and pay its
costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its effect. Casting a spell follows the steps listed
below, in order. If, at any point during the casting of a spell, a player is unable to comply with any
of the steps listed below, the casting of the spell is illegal; the game returns to the moment before
that spell started to be cast (see rule 716, “Handling Illegal Actions”). Announcements and
payments can’t be altered after they’ve been made.
601.2a The player announces that he or she is casting the spell. That card (or that copy of a card)
moves from where it is to the stack. It becomes the topmost object on the stack. It has all the
characteristics of the card (or the copy of a card) associated with it, and that player becomes its
controller. The spell remains on the stack until it’s countered, it resolves, or an effect moves it
elsewhere.
601.2b If the spell is modal the player announces the mode choice (see rule 700.2). If the player
wishes to splice any cards onto the spell (see rule 702.45), he or she reveals those cards in his or
her hand. If the spell has alternative or additional costs that will be paid as it’s being cast such as
buyback, kicker, or convoke costs (see rules 117.8 and 117.9), the player announces his or her
intentions to pay any or all of those costs (see rule 601.2e). A player can’t apply two alternative
methods of casting or two alternative costs to a single spell. If the spell has a variable cost that
will be paid as it’s being cast (such as an {X} in its mana cost; see rule 107.3), the player
announces the value of that variable. If a cost that will be paid as the spell is being cast includes
hybrid mana symbols, the player announces the nonhybrid equivalent cost he or she intends to
pay. If a cost that will be paid as the spell is being cast includes Phyrexian mana symbols, the
player announces whether he or she intends to pay 2 life or the corresponding colored mana cost
for each of those symbols. Previously made choices (such as choosing to cast a spell with
flashback from a graveyard or choosing to cast a creature with morph face down) may restrict
the player’s options when making these choices.
601.2c The player announces his or her choice of an appropriate player, object, or zone for each
target the spell requires. A spell may require some targets only if an alternative or additional
cost (such as a buyback or kicker cost), or a particular mode, was chosen for it; otherwise, the
spell is cast as though it did not require those targets. If the spell has a variable number of
targets, the player announces how many targets he or she will choose before he or she
announces those targets. The same target can’t be chosen multiple times for any one instance of
the word “target” on the spell. However, if the spell uses the word “target” in multiple places,
the same object, player, or zone can be chosen once for each instance of the word “target” (as
long as it fits the targeting criteria). If any effects say that an object or player must be chosen as
a target, the player chooses targets so that he or she obeys the maximum possible number of
such effects without violating any rules or effects that say that an object or player can’t be
chosen as a target. The chosen players, objects, and/or zones each become a target of that spell.
(Any abilities that trigger when those players, objects, and/or zones become the target of a spell
trigger at this point; they’ll wait to be put on the stack until the spell has finished being cast.)

Example: If a spell says “Tap two target creatures,” then the same creature can’t be
chosen twice; the spell requires two different legal targets. A spell that says “Destroy
target artifact and target land,” however, can target the same artifact land twice
because it uses the word “target” in multiple places.
601.2d If the spell requires the player to divide or distribute an effect (such as damage or counters)
among one or more targets, the player announces the division. Each of these targets must
receive at least one of whatever is being divided.
601.2e The player determines the total cost of the spell. Usually this is just the mana cost. Some
spells have additional or alternative costs. Some effects may increase or reduce the cost to pay,
or may provide other alternative costs. Costs may include paying mana, tapping permanents,
sacrificing permanents, discarding cards, and so on. The total cost is the mana cost or alternative
cost (as determined in rule 601.2b), plus all additional costs and cost increases, and minus all
cost reductions. If the mana component of the total cost is reduced to nothing by cost reduction
effects, it is considered to be {0}. It can’t be reduced to less than {0}. Once the total cost is
determined, any effects that directly affect the total cost are applied. Then the resulting total cost
becomes “locked in.” If effects would change the total cost after this time, they have no effect.
601.2f If the total cost includes a mana payment, the player then has a chance to activate mana
abilities (see rule 605, “Mana Abilities”). Mana abilities must be activated before costs are paid.
601.2g The player pays the total cost in any order. Partial payments are not allowed. Unpayable
costs can’t be paid.
Example: You cast Death Bomb, which costs {3}{B} and has an additional cost of
sacrificing a creature. You sacrifice Thunderscape Familiar, whose effect makes your
black spells cost {1} less to cast. Because a spell’s total cost is “locked in” before
payments are actually made, you pay {2}{B}, not {3}{B}, even though you’re sacrificing
the Familiar.
601.2h Once the steps described in 601.2a–g are completed, the spell becomes cast. Any abilities
that trigger when a spell is cast or put onto the stack trigger at this time. If the spell’s controller
had priority before casting it, he or she gets priority.
601.3. Some spells specify that one of their controller’s opponents does something the controller would
normally do while it’s being cast, such as choose a mode or choose targets. In these cases, the
opponent does so when the spell’s controller normally would do so.
601.3a If there is more than one opponent who could make such a choice, the spell’s controller
decides which of those opponents will make the choice.
601.3b If the spell instructs its controller and another player to do something at the same time as the
spell is being cast, the spell’s controller goes first, then the other player. This is an exception to
rule 101.4.
601.4. Casting a spell that alters costs won’t affect spells and abilities that are already on the stack.
601.5. A player can’t begin to cast a spell that’s prohibited from being cast.
601.5a If an effect allows a card that’s prohibited from being cast to be cast face down, and the
face-down spell would not be prohibited, that spell can be cast face down. See rule 707, “Face-
Down Spells and Permanents.”
602. Activating Activated Abilities

602.1. Activated abilities have a cost and an effect. They are written as “[Cost]: [Effect.] [Activation
instructions (if any).]”
602.1a The activation cost is everything before the colon (:). An ability’s activation cost must be
paid by the player who is activating it.
Example: The activation cost of an ability that reads “{2}, {T}: You gain 1 life” is two
mana of any type plus tapping the permanent that has the ability.
602.1b Some text after the colon of an activated ability states instructions that must be followed
while activating that ability. Such text may state which players can activate that ability, may
restrict when a player can activate the ability, or may define some aspect of the activation cost.
This text is not part of the ability’s effect. It functions at all times. If an activated ability has any
activation instructions, they appear last, after the ability’s effect.
602.1c An activated ability is the only kind of ability that can be activated. If an object or rule refers
to activating an ability without specifying what kind, it must be referring to an activated ability.
602.1d Previously, the action of using an activated ability was referred to on cards as “playing” that
ability. Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference
so they now refer to “activating” that ability.
602.2. To activate an ability is to put it onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve
and have its effect. Only an object’s controller (or its owner, if it doesn’t have a controller) can
activate its activated ability unless the object specifically says otherwise. Activating an ability
follows the steps listed below, in order. If, at any point during the activation of an ability, a player is
unable to comply with any of those steps, the activation is illegal; the game returns to the moment
before that ability started to be activated (see rule 716, “Handling Illegal Actions”). Announcements
and payments can’t be altered after they’ve been made.
602.2a The player announces that he or she is activating the ability. If an activated ability is being
activated from a hidden zone, the card that has that ability is revealed. That ability is created on
the stack as an object that’s not a card. It becomes the topmost object on the stack. It has the text
of the ability that created it, and no other characteristics. Its controller is the player who
activated the ability. The ability remains on the stack until it’s countered, it resolves, or an effect
moves it elsewhere.
602.2b The remainder of the process for activating an ability is identical to the process for casting a
spell listed in rules 601.2b–h. Those rules apply to activating an ability just as they apply to
casting a spell. An activated ability’s analog to a spell’s mana cost (as referenced in rule 601.2e)
is its activation cost.
602.3. Some abilities specify that one of their controller’s opponents does something the controller
would normally do while it’s being activated, such as choose a mode or choose targets. In these
cases, the opponent does so when the ability’s controller normally would do so.
602.3a If there is more than one opponent who could make such a choice, the ability’s controller
decides which of those opponents will make the choice.
602.3b If the ability instructs its controller and another player to do something at the same time as
the ability is being activated, the ability’s controller goes first, then the other player. This is an
exception to rule 101.4.
602.4. Activating an ability that alters costs won’t affect spells and abilities that are already on the
stack.
602.5. A player can’t begin to activate an ability that’s prohibited from being activated.

602.5a A creature’s activated ability with the tap symbol ({T}) or the untap symbol ({Q}) in its
activation cost can’t be activated unless the creature has been under its controller’s control since
the start of his or her most recent turn. Ignore this rule for creatures with haste (see rule 702.10).
602.5b If an activated ability has a restriction on its use (for example, “Activate this ability only
once each turn”), the restriction continues to apply to that object even if its controller changes.
602.5c If an object acquires an activated ability with a restriction on its use from another object, that
restriction applies only to that ability as acquired from that object. It doesn’t apply to other,
identically worded abilities.
602.5d Activated abilities that read “Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery”
mean the player must follow the timing rules for casting a sorcery spell, though the ability isn’t
actually a sorcery. The player doesn’t actually need to have a sorcery card that he or she could
cast.
602.5e Activated abilities that read “Activate this ability only any time you could cast an instant”
mean the player must follow the timing rules for casting an instant spell, though the ability isn’t
actually an instant. The player doesn’t actually need to have an instant card that he or she could
cast.
603. Handling Triggered Abilities
603.1. Triggered abilities have a trigger condition and an effect. They are written as “[Trigger
condition], [effect],” and begin with the word “when,” “whenever,” or “at.” They can also be
expressed as “[When/Whenever/At] [trigger event], [effect].”
603.2. Whenever a game event or game state matches a triggered ability’s trigger event, that ability
automatically triggers. The ability doesn’t do anything at this point.
603.2a Because they aren’t cast or activated, triggered abilities can trigger even when it isn’t legal
to cast spells and activate abilities. Effects that prevent abilities from being activated don’t
affect them.
603.2b When a phase or step begins, all abilities that trigger “at the beginning of” that phase or step
trigger.
603.2c An ability triggers only once each time its trigger event occurs. However, it can trigger
repeatedly if one event contains multiple occurrences. See also rule 509.4.
Example: A permanent has an ability whose trigger condition reads, “Whenever a land
is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, . . . .” If someone casts a spell that destroys
all lands, the ability will trigger once for each land put into the graveyard during the
spell’s resolution.
603.2d Some trigger events use the word “becomes” (for example, “becomes tapped” or “becomes
blocked”). These trigger only at the time the named event happens—they don’t trigger if that
state already exists or retrigger if it persists. Similarly, they don’t trigger if an object enters a
zone in that state.
Example: An ability that triggers when a permanent “becomes tapped” triggers only
when the status of a permanent that’s already on the battlefield changes from untapped
to tapped.
603.2e If a triggered ability’s trigger condition is met, but the object with that triggered ability is at
no time visible to all players, the ability does not trigger.

603.2f An ability triggers only if its trigger event actually occurs. An event that’s prevented or
replaced won’t trigger anything.
Example: An ability that triggers on damage being dealt won’t trigger if all the damage
is prevented.
603.3. Once an ability has triggered, its controller puts it on the stack as an object that’s not a card the
next time a player would receive priority. See rule 116, “Timing and Priority.” The ability becomes
the topmost object on the stack. It has the text of the ability that created it, and no other
characteristics. It remains on the stack until it’s countered, it resolves, a rule causes it to be removed
from the stack, or an effect moves it elsewhere.
603.3a A triggered ability is controlled by the player who controlled its source at the time it
triggered, unless it’s a delayed triggered ability. To determine the controller of a delayed
triggered ability, see rules 603.7d–f.
603.3b If multiple abilities have triggered since the last time a player received priority, each player,
in APNAP order, puts triggered abilities he or she controls on the stack in any order he or she
chooses. (See rule 101.4.) Then the game once again checks for and resolves state-based actions
until none are performed, then abilities that triggered during this process go on the stack. This
process repeats until no new state-based actions are performed and no abilities trigger. Then the
appropriate player gets priority.
603.3c If a triggered ability is modal, its controller announces the mode choice when he or she puts
the ability on the stack. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to choose legal
targets, for example), that mode can’t be chosen. If no mode can be chosen, the ability is
removed from the stack. (See rule 700.2.)
603.3d The remainder of the process for putting a triggered ability on the stack is identical to the
process for casting a spell listed in rules 601.2c–d. If a choice is required when the triggered
ability goes on the stack but no legal choices can be made for it, or if a rule or a continuous
effect otherwise makes the ability illegal, the ability is simply removed from the stack.
603.4. A triggered ability may read “When/Whenever/At [trigger event], if [condition], [effect].” When
the trigger event occurs, the ability checks whether the stated condition is true. The ability triggers
only if it is; otherwise it does nothing. If the ability triggers, it checks the stated condition again as it
resolves. If the condition isn’t true at that time, the ability is removed from the stack and does
nothing. Note that this mirrors the check for legal targets. This rule is referred to as the “intervening
‘if’ clause” rule. (The word “if” has only its normal English meaning anywhere else in the text of a
card; this rule only applies to an “if” that immediately follows a trigger condition.)
Example: Felidar Sovereign reads, “At the beginning of your upkeep, if you have 40 or
more life, you win the game.” Its controller’s life total is checked as that player’s upkeep
begins. If that player has 39 or less life, the ability doesn’t trigger at all. If that player has
40 or more life, the ability triggers and goes on the stack. As the ability resolves, that
player’s life total is checked again. If that player has 39 or less life at this time, the ability is
removed from the stack and has no effect. If that player has 40 or more life at this time, the
ability resolves and that player wins the game.
603.5. Some triggered abilities’ effects are optional (they contain “may,” as in “At the beginning of
your upkeep, you may draw a card”). These abilities go on the stack when they trigger, regardless of
whether their controller intends to exercise the ability’s option or not. The choice is made when the
ability resolves. Likewise, triggered abilities that have an effect “unless” something is true or a
player chooses to do something will go on the stack normally; the “unless” part of the ability is
dealt with when the ability resolves.
603.6. Trigger events that involve objects changing zones are called “zone-change triggers.” Many
abilities with zone-change triggers attempt to do something to that object after it changes zones.

During resolution, these abilities look for the object in the zone that it moved to. If the object is
unable to be found in the zone it went to, the part of the ability attempting to do something to the
object will fail to do anything. The ability could be unable to find the object because the object
never entered the specified zone, because it left the zone before the ability resolved, or because it is
in a zone that is hidden from a player, such as a library or an opponent’s hand. (This rule applies
even if the object leaves the zone and returns again before the ability resolves.) The most common
zone-change triggers are enters-the-battlefield triggers and leaves-the-battlefield triggers.
603.6a Enters-the-battlefield abilities trigger when a permanent enters the battlefield. These are
written, “When [this object] enters the battlefield, . . . ” or “Whenever a [type] enters the
battlefield, . . .” Each time an event puts one or more permanents onto the battlefield, all
permanents on the battlefield (including the newcomers) are checked for any enters-the-
battlefield triggers that match the event.
603.6b Continuous effects that modify characteristics of a permanent do so the moment the
permanent is on the battlefield (and not before then). The permanent is never on the battlefield
with its unmodified characteristics. Continuous effects don’t apply before the permanent is on
the battlefield, however (see rule 603.6e).
Example: If an effect reads “All lands are creatures” and a land card is played, the
effect makes the land card into a creature the moment it enters the battlefield, so it
would trigger abilities that trigger when a creature enters the battlefield. Conversely, if
an effect reads “All creatures lose all abilities” and a creature card with an enters-the-
battlefield triggered ability enters the battlefield, that effect will cause it to lose its
abilities the moment it enters the battlefield, so the enters-the-battlefield ability won’t
trigger.
603.6c Leaves-the-battlefield abilities trigger when a permanent moves from the battlefield to
another zone, or when a phased-in permanent leaves the game because its owner leaves the
game. These are written as, but aren’t limited to, “When [this object] leaves the battlefield, . . .”
or “Whenever [something] is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, . . . .” An ability that
attempts to do something to the card that left the battlefield checks for it only in the first zone
that it went to. An ability that triggers when a card is put into a certain zone “from anywhere” is
never treated as a leaves-the-battlefield ability, even if an object is put into that zone from the
battlefield.
603.6d Normally, objects that exist immediately after an event are checked to see if the event
matched any trigger conditions. Continuous effects that exist at that time are used to determine
what the trigger conditions are and what the objects involved in the event look like. However,
some triggered abilities must be treated specially because the object with the ability may no
longer be on the battlefield, may have moved to a hand or library, or may no longer be
controlled by the appropriate player. The game has to “look back in time” to determine if these
abilities trigger. Leaves-the-battlefield abilities, abilities that trigger when a permanent phases
out, abilities that trigger when an object that all players can see is put into a hand or library,
abilities that trigger specifically when an object becomes unattached, abilities that trigger when
a player loses control of an object, and abilities that trigger when a player planeswalks away
from a plane will trigger based on their existence, and the appearance of objects, prior to the
event rather than afterward.
Example: Two creatures are on the battlefield along with an artifact that has the ability
“Whenever a creature is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, you gain 1 life.”
Someone plays a spell that destroys all artifacts, creatures, and enchantments. The
artifact’s ability triggers twice, even though the artifact goes to its owner’s graveyard at
the same time as the creatures.
603.6e Some permanents have text that reads “[This permanent] enters the battlefield with . . . ,”
“As [this permanent] enters the battlefield . . . ,” “[This permanent] enters the battlefield as . . .
,” or “[This permanent] enters the battlefield tapped.” Such text is a static ability—not a

triggered ability—whose effect occurs as part of the event that puts the permanent onto the
battlefield.
603.6f Some Auras have triggered abilities that trigger on the enchanted permanent leaving the
battlefield. These triggered abilities can find the new object that permanent card became in the
zone it moved to; they can also find the new object the Aura card became in its owner’s
graveyard after state-based actions have been checked. See rule 400.7.
603.7. An effect may create a delayed triggered ability that can do something at a later time. A delayed
triggered ability will contain “when,” “whenever,” or “at,” although that word won’t usually begin
the ability.
603.7a Delayed triggered abilities come from spells or other abilities that create them on resolution,
or are created as the result of a replacement effect being applied. That means a delayed triggered
ability won’t trigger until it has actually been created, even if its trigger event occurred just
beforehand. Other events that happen earlier may make the trigger event impossible.
Example: Part of an effect reads “When this creature leaves the battlefield,” but the
creature in question leaves the battlefield before the spell or ability creating the effect
resolves. In this case, the delayed ability never triggers.
Example: If an effect reads “When this creature becomes untapped” and the named
creature becomes untapped before the effect resolves, the ability waits for the next time
that creature untaps.
603.7b A delayed triggered ability will trigger only once—the next time its trigger event occurs—
unless it has a stated duration, such as “this turn.”
603.7c A delayed triggered ability that refers to a particular object still affects it even if the object
changes characteristics. However, if that object is no longer in the zone it’s expected to be in at
the time the delayed triggered ability resolves, the ability won’t affect it. (Note that if that object
left that zone and then returned, it’s a new object and thus won’t be affected. See rule 400.7.)
Example: An ability that reads “Exile this creature at the beginning of the next end
step” will exile the permanent even if it’s no longer a creature during the next end step.
However, it won’t do anything if the permanent left the battlefield before then.
603.7d If a spell creates a delayed triggered ability, the source of that delayed triggered ability is
that spell. The controller of that delayed triggered ability is the player who controlled that spell
as it resolved.
603.7e If an activated or triggered ability creates a delayed triggered ability, the source of that
delayed triggered ability is the same as the source of that other ability. The controller of that
delayed triggered ability is the player who controlled that other ability as it resolved.
603.7f If a static ability generates a replacement effect which causes a delayed triggered ability to
be created, the source of that delayed triggered ability is the object with that static ability. The
controller of that delayed triggered ability is the same as the controller of that object at the time
the replacement effect was applied.
603.8. Some triggered abilities trigger when a game state (such as a player controlling no permanents of
a particular card type) is true, rather than triggering when an event occurs. These abilities trigger as
soon as the game state matches the condition. They’ll go onto the stack at the next available
opportunity. These are called state triggers. (Note that state triggers aren’t the same as state-based
actions.) A state-triggered ability doesn’t trigger again until the ability has resolved, has been
countered, or has otherwise left the stack. Then, if the object with the ability is still in the same zone
and the game state still matches its trigger condition, the ability will trigger again.
Example: A permanent’s ability reads, “Whenever you have no cards in hand, draw a
card.” If its controller plays the last card from his or her hand, the ability will trigger once

and won’t trigger again until it has resolved. If its controller casts a spell that reads
“Discard your hand, then draw that many cards,” the ability will trigger during the spell’s
resolution because the player’s hand was momentarily empty.
603.9. Some triggered abilities trigger specifically when a player loses the game. These abilities trigger
when a player loses or leaves the game, regardless of the reason, unless that player leaves the game
as the result of a draw. See rule 104.3.
603.10. Some objects have a static ability that’s linked to a triggered ability. (See rule 607, “Linked
Abilities.”) These objects combine both abilities into one paragraph, with the static ability first,
followed by the triggered ability. A very few objects have triggered abilities which are written with
the trigger condition in the middle of the ability, rather than at the beginning.
Example: An ability that reads “Reveal the first card you draw each turn. Whenever you
reveal a basic land card this way, draw a card” is a static ability linked to a triggered
ability.
604. Handling Static Abilities
604.1. Static abilities do something all the time rather than being activated or triggered. They are
written as statements, and they’re simply true.
604.2. Static abilities create continuous effects, some of which are prevention effects or replacement
effects. These effects are active as long as the permanent with the ability remains on the battlefield
and has the ability, or as long as the object with the ability remains in the appropriate zone, as
described in rule 112.6.
604.3. Some static abilities are characteristic-defining abilities. A characteristic-defining ability
conveys information about an object’s characteristics that would normally be found elsewhere on
that object (such as in its mana cost, type line, or power/toughness box). Characteristic-defining
abilities function in all zones. They also function outside the game.
604.3a A static ability is a characteristic-defining ability if it meets the following criteria: (1) It
defines an object’s colors, subtypes, power, or toughness; (2) it is printed on the card it affects,
it was granted to the token it affects by the effect that created the token, or it was acquired by
the object it affects as the result of a copy effect or text-changing effect; (3) it does not directly
affect the characteristics of any other objects; (4) it is not an ability that an object grants to
itself; and (5) it does not set the values of such characteristics only if certain conditions are met.
604.4. Many Auras, Equipment, and Fortifications have static abilities that modify the object they’re
attached to, but those abilities don’t target that object. If an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification is
moved to a different object, the ability stops applying to the original object and starts modifying the
new one.
604.5. Some static abilities apply while a spell is on the stack. These are often abilities that refer to
countering the spell. Also, abilities that say “As an additional cost to cast . . . ,” “You may pay
[cost] rather than pay [this object]’s mana cost,” and “You may cast [this object] without paying its
mana cost” work while a spell is on the stack.
604.6. Some static abilities apply while a card is in any zone that you could cast or play it from (usually
your hand). These are limited to those that read, “You may [cast/play] [this card] . . . ,” “You can’t
[cast/play] [this card] . . . ,” and “[Cast/Play] [this card] only . . . .”
604.7. Unlike spells and other kinds of abilities, static abilities can’t use an object’s last known
information for purposes of determining how their effects are applied.
605. Mana Abilities

605.1. Some activated abilities and some triggered abilities are mana abilities, which are subject to
special rules. Only abilities that meet either of the following two sets of criteria are mana abilities,
regardless of what other effects they may generate or what timing restrictions (such as “Activate
this ability only any time you could cast an instant”) they may have.
605.1a An activated ability is a mana ability if it meets three criteria: it doesn’t have a target, it
could put mana into a player’s mana pool when it resolves, and it’s not a loyalty ability. (See
rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”)
605.1b A triggered ability without a target that triggers from activating a mana ability and could put
mana into a player’s mana pool when it resolves is a mana ability.
605.2. A mana ability remains a mana ability even if the game state doesn’t allow it to produce mana.
Example: A permanent has an ability that reads “{T}: Add {G} to your mana pool for each
creature you control.” This is still a mana ability even if you control no creatures or if the
permanent is already tapped.
605.3. Activating an activated mana ability follows the rules for activating any other activated ability
(see rule 602.2), with the following exceptions:
605.3a A player may activate an activated mana ability whenever he or she has priority, whenever
he or she is casting a spell or activating an ability that requires a mana payment, or whenever a
rule or effect asks for a mana payment, even if it’s in the middle of casting or resolving a spell
or activating or resolving an ability.
605.3b An activated mana ability doesn’t go on the stack, so it can’t be targeted, countered, or
otherwise responded to. Rather, it resolves immediately after it is activated. (See rule 405.6c.)
605.4. Triggered mana abilities follow all the rules for other triggered abilities (see rule 603, “Handling
Triggered Abilities”), with the following exception:
605.4a A triggered mana ability doesn’t go on the stack, so it can’t be targeted, countered, or
otherwise responded to. Rather, it resolves immediately after the mana ability that triggered it,
without waiting for priority.
Example: An enchantment reads, “Whenever a player taps a land for mana, that player
adds one mana of that type to his or her mana pool.” If a player taps lands for mana
while casting a spell, the additional mana is added to the player’s mana pool
immediately and can be used to pay for the spell.
605.5. Abilities that don’t meet the criteria specified in rules 605.1a–b and spells aren’t mana abilities.
605.5a An ability with a target is not a mana ability, even if it could put mana into a player’s mana
pool when it resolves. The same is true for a triggered ability that could produce mana but
triggers from an event other than activating a mana ability, or a triggered ability that triggers
from activating a mana ability but couldn’t produce mana. These follow the normal rules for
activated or triggered abilities, as appropriate.
605.5b A spell can never be a mana ability, even if it could put mana into a player’s mana pool
when it resolves. It’s cast and resolves just like any other spell. Some older cards were printed
with the card type “mana source”; these cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference
and are now instants.
606. Loyalty Abilities
606.1. Some activated abilities are loyalty abilities, which are subject to special rules.

606.2. An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost is a loyalty ability. Normally, only
planeswalkers have loyalty abilities.
606.3. A player may activate a loyalty ability of a permanent he or she controls any time he or she has
priority and the stack is empty during a main phase of his or her turn, but only if no player has
previously activated a loyalty ability of that permanent that turn.
606.4. The cost to activate a loyalty ability of a permanent is to put on or remove from that permanent a
certain number of loyalty counters, as shown by the loyalty symbol in the ability’s cost.
606.5. A loyalty ability with a negative loyalty cost can’t be activated unless the permanent has at least
that many loyalty counters on it.
607. Linked Abilities
607.1. An object may have two abilities printed on it such that one of them causes actions to be taken or
objects to be affected and the other one directly refers to those actions or objects. If so, these two
abilities are linked: the second refers only to actions that were taken or objects that were affected by
the first, and not by any other ability.
607.1a An ability printed on an object within another ability that grants that ability to that object is
still considered to be “printed on” that object for these purposes.
607.1b An ability printed on an object that fulfills both criteria described in rule 607.1 is linked to
itself.
607.2. There are different kinds of linked abilities.
607.2a If an object has an activated or triggered ability printed on it that instructs a player to exile
one or more cards and an ability printed on it that refers either to “the exiled cards” or to cards
“exiled with [this object],” these abilities are linked. The second ability refers only to cards in
the exile zone that were put there as a result of an instruction to exile them in the first ability.
607.2b If an object has an ability printed on it that generates a replacement effect which causes one
or more cards to be exiled and an ability printed on it that refers either to “the exiled cards” or to
cards “exiled with [this object],” these abilities are linked. The second ability refers only to
cards in the exile zone that were put there as a direct result of a replacement event caused by the
first ability. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”
607.2c If an object has an activated or triggered ability printed on it that puts one or more objects
onto the battlefield and an ability printed on it that refers to objects “put onto the battlefield with
[this object],” those abilities are linked. The second can refer only to objects put onto the
battlefield as a result of the first.
607.2d If an object has an ability printed on it that causes a player to “choose a [value]” or “name a
card” and an ability printed on it that refers to “the chosen [value],” “the last chosen [value],” or
“the named card,” those abilities are linked. The second ability refers only to a choice made as a
result of the first ability.
607.2e If an object has an ability printed on it that causes a player to choose from between two or
more words that otherwise have no rules meaning and an ability printed on it that refers to a
choice involving one or more of those words, those abilities are linked. The second can refer
only to a choice made as a result of the first ability.

607.2f If an object has an ability printed on it that causes a player to pay a cost as it enters the
battlefield and an ability printed on it that refers to the cost paid “as [this object] entered the
battlefield,” these abilities are linked. The second ability refers only to a cost paid as a result of
the first ability.
607.2g If an object has both a static ability and a triggered ability printed on it in the same
paragraph, those abilities are linked. The triggered ability refers only to actions taken as a result
of the static ability. See rule 603.10.
607.2h If an object has a kicker ability printed on it and an ability printed on it that refers to whether
that object was kicked, those abilities are linked. The second refers only to whether the intent to
pay the kicker cost listed in the first was declared as the object was cast as a spell. If a kicker
ability lists multiple costs, it will have multiple abilities linked to it. Each of those abilities will
specify which kicker cost it refers to. See rule 702.31, “Kicker.”
607.2i If an object has an ability printed on it that causes a player to pay a variable additional cost as
it’s cast and an ability printed on it that refers to the cost paid “as [this object] was cast,” these
abilities are linked. The second refers only to the value chosen for the cost listed in the first as
the object was cast as a spell. See rule 601.2b.
607.2j The two abilities represented by the champion keyword are linked abilities. See rule 702.70,
“Champion.”
607.3. An ability may be part of more than one pair of linked abilities.
Example: Paradise Plume has the following three abilities: “As Paradise Plume enters the
battlefield, choose a color,” “Whenever a player casts a spell of the chosen color, you may
gain 1 life,” and “{T}: Add one mana of the chosen color to your mana pool.” The first and
second abilities are linked. The first and third abilities are linked.
607.4. If an object acquires a pair of linked abilities as part of the same effect, the abilities will be
similarly linked to one another on that object even though they weren’t printed on that object. They
can’t be linked to any other ability, regardless of what other abilities the object may currently have
or may have had in the past.
Example: Arc-Slogger has the ability “{R}, Exile the top ten cards of your library: Arc-
Slogger deals 2 damage to target creature or player.” Sisters of Stone Death has the ability
“{B}{G}: Exile target creature blocking or blocked by Sisters of Stone Death” and the
ability “{2}{B}: Put a creature card exiled with Sisters of Stone Death onto the battlefield
under your control.” Quicksilver Elemental has the ability “{U}: Quicksilver Elemental
gains all activated abilities of target creature until end of turn.” If a player has Quicksilver
Elemental gain Arc-Slogger’s ability, activates it, then has Quicksilver Elemental gain
Sisters of Stone Death’s abilities, activates the exile ability, and then activates the return-to-
the-battlefield ability, only the creature card Quicksilver Elemental exiled with Sisters of
Stone Death’s ability can be returned to the battlefield. Creature cards Quicksilver
Elemental exiled with Arc-Slogger’s ability can’t be returned.
608. Resolving Spells and Abilities
608.1. Each time all players pass in succession, the spell or ability on top of the stack resolves. (See rule
609, “Effects.”)
608.2. If the object that’s resolving is an instant spell, a sorcery spell, or an ability, its resolution may
involve several steps. The steps described in rules 608.2a and 608.2b are followed first. The steps
described in rules 608.2c–j are then followed as appropriate, in no specific order. The step described
in rule 608.2k is followed last.

608.2a If a triggered ability has an intervening “if” clause, it checks whether the clause’s condition
is true. If it isn’t, the ability is removed from the stack and does nothing. Otherwise, it continues
to resolve. See rule 603.4.
608.2b If the spell or ability specifies targets, it checks whether the targets are still legal. A target
that’s no longer in the zone it was in when it was targeted is illegal. Other changes to the game
state may cause a target to no longer be legal; for example, its characteristics may have changed
or an effect may have changed the text of the spell. If the source of an ability has left the zone it
was in, its last known information is used during this process. The spell or ability is countered if
all its targets, for every instance of the word “target,” are now illegal. If the spell or ability is not
countered, it will resolve normally. However, if any of its targets are illegal, the part of the spell
or ability’s effect for which it is an illegal target can’t perform any actions on that target or
make that target perform any actions. The effect may still determine information about illegal
targets, though, and other parts of the effect for which those targets are not illegal may still
affect them.
Example: Aura Blast is a white instant that reads, “Destroy target enchantment. Draw a
card.” If the enchantment isn’t a legal target during Aura Blast’s resolution (say, if it
has gained protection from white or left the battlefield), then Aura Blast is countered. Its
controller doesn’t draw a card.
Example: Plague Spores reads, “Destroy target nonblack creature and target land.
They can’t be regenerated.” Suppose the same animated land is chosen both as the
nonblack creature and as the land, and the color of the creature land is changed to black
before Plague Spores resolves. Plagues Spores isn’t countered because the black
creature land is still a legal target for the “target land” part of the spell. The “destroy
target nonblack creature” part of the spell won’t affect that permanent, but the “destroy
target land” part of the spell will still destroy it. It can’t be regenerated.
608.2c The controller of the spell or ability follows its instructions in the order written. However,
replacement effects may modify these actions. In some cases, later text on the card may modify
the meaning of earlier text (for example, “Destroy target creature. It can’t be regenerated” or
“Counter target spell. If that spell is countered this way, put it on top of its owner’s library
instead of into its owner’s graveyard.”) Don’t just apply effects step by step without thinking in
these cases—read the whole text and apply the rules of English to the text.
608.2d If an effect of a spell or ability offers any choices other than choices already made as part of
casting the spell, activating the ability, or otherwise putting the spell or ability on the stack, the
player announces these while applying the effect. The player can’t choose an option that’s
illegal or impossible, with the exception that having library with no cards in it doesn’t make
drawing a card an impossible action (see rule 120.3). If an effect divides or distributes
something, such as damage or counters, as a player chooses among any number of untargeted
players and/or objects, the player chooses the amount and division such that at least one player
or object is chosen if able, and each chosen player or object receives at least one of whatever is
being divided. (Note that if an effect divides or distributes something, such as damage or
counters, as a player chooses among some number of target objects and/or players, the amount
and division were determined as the spell or ability was put onto the stack rather than at this
time; see rule 601.2d.)
Example: A spell’s instruction reads, “You may sacrifice a creature. If you don’t, you
lose 4 life.” A player who controls no creatures can’t choose the sacrifice option.
608.2e Some spells and abilities have multiple steps or actions, denoted by separate sentences or
clauses, that involve multiple players. In these cases, the choices for the first action are made in
APNAP order, and then the first action is processed simultaneously. Then the choices for the
second action are made in APNAP order, and then that action is processed simultaneously, and
so on. See rule 101.4.

608.2f If an effect gives a player the option to pay mana, he or she may activate mana abilities
before taking that action. If an effect specifically instructs or allows a player to cast a spell
during resolution, he or she does so by putting that spell on top of the stack, then continuing to
cast it by following the steps in rules 601.2a–h, except no player receives priority after it’s cast.
The currently resolving spell or ability then continues to resolve, which may include casting
other spells this way. No other spells can normally be cast and no other abilities can normally be
activated during resolution.
608.2g If an effect requires information from the game (such as the number of creatures on the
battlefield), the answer is determined only once, when the effect is applied. If the effect requires
information from a specific object, including the source of the ability itself or a target that’s
become illegal, the effect uses the current information of that object if it’s in the public zone it
was expected to be in; if it’s no longer in that zone, or if the effect has moved it from a public
zone to a hidden zone, the effect uses the object’s last known information. See rule 112.7a. If an
ability states that an object does something, it’s the object as it exists—or as it most recently
existed—that does it, not the ability.
608.2h If an effect refers to certain characteristics, it checks only for the value of the specified
characteristics, regardless of any related ones an object may also have.
Example: An effect that reads “Destroy all black creatures” destroys a white-and-black
creature, but one that reads “Destroy all nonblack creatures” doesn’t.
608.2i If an ability’s effect refers to a specific untargeted object that has been previously referred to
by that ability’s cost or trigger condition, it still affects that object even if the object has changed
characteristics.
Example: Wall of Tears says “Whenever Wall of Tears blocks a creature, return that
creature to its owner’s hand at end of combat.” If Wall of Tears blocks a creature, then
that creature ceases to be a creature before the triggered ability resolves, the permanent
will still be returned to its owner’s hand.
608.2j If an instant spell, sorcery spell, or ability that can legally resolve leaves the stack once it
starts to resolve, it will continue to resolve fully.
608.2k As the final part of an instant or sorcery spell’s resolution, the spell is put into its owner’s
graveyard. As the final part of an ability’s resolution, the ability is removed from the stack and
ceases to exist.
608.3. If the object that’s resolving is a permanent spell, its resolution involves a single step (unless it’s
an Aura). The spell card becomes a permanent and is put onto the battlefield under the control of the
spell’s controller.
608.3a If the object that’s resolving is an Aura spell, its resolution involves two steps. First, it
checks whether the target specified by its enchant ability is still legal, as described in rule
608.2b. (See rule 702.5, “Enchant.”) If so, the spell card becomes a permanent and is put onto
the battlefield under the control of the spell’s controller attached to the object it was targeting.
608.3b If a permanent spell resolves but its controller can’t put it onto the battlefield, that player
puts it into its owner’s graveyard.
Example: Worms of the Earth says “If a land would enter the battlefield, instead it
doesn’t.” Clone says “You may have Clone enter the battlefield as a copy of any
creature on the battlefield.” If a player casts Clone and chooses to copy Dryad Arbor (a
land creature) while Worms of the Earth is on the battlefield, Clone can’t enter the
battlefield from the stack. It’s put into its owner’s graveyard.
609. Effects

609.1. An effect is something that happens in the game as a result of a spell or ability. When a spell,
activated ability, or triggered ability resolves, it may create one or more one-shot or continuous
effects. Static abilities may create one or more continuous effects. Text itself is never an effect.
609.2. Effects apply only to permanents unless the instruction’s text states otherwise or they clearly can
apply only to objects in one or more other zones.
Example: An effect that changes all lands into creatures won’t alter land cards in players’
graveyards. But an effect that says spells cost more to cast will apply only to spells on the
stack, since a spell is always on the stack while a player is casting it.
609.3. If an effect attempts to do something impossible, it does only as much as possible.
Example: If a player is holding only one card, an effect that reads “Discard two cards”
causes him or her to discard only that card. If an effect moves cards out of the library (as
opposed to drawing), it moves as many as possible.
609.4. Some effects state that a player may do something “as though” some condition were true or a
creature can do something “as though” some condition were true. This applies only to the stated
effect. For purposes of that effect, treat the game exactly as if the stated condition were true. For all
other purposes, treat the game normally.
609.4a If two effects state that a player may (or a creature can) do the same thing “as though”
different conditions were true, both conditions could apply. If one “as though” effect satisfies
the requirements for another “as though” effect, then both effects will apply.
Example: A player controls Vedalken Orrery, an artifact that says “You may cast
nonland cards as though they had flash.” That player casts Shaman’s Trance, an instant
that says, in part, “You may play cards from other players’ graveyards as though they
were in your graveyard.” The player may cast a sorcery with flashback from another
player’s graveyard as though it were in that player’s graveyard and as though it had
flash.
609.5. If an effect could result in a tie, the text of the spell or ability that created the effect will specify
what to do in the event of a tie. The Magic game has no default for ties.
609.6. Some continuous effects are replacement effects or prevention effects. See rules 614 and 615.
609.7. Some effects apply to damage from a source—for example, “The next time a red source of your
choice would deal damage to you this turn, prevent that damage.”
609.7a If an effect requires a player to choose a source of damage, he or she may choose a
permanent; a spell on the stack (including a permanent spell); any object referred to by an object
on the stack, by a replacement or prevention effect that’s waiting to apply, or by a delayed
triggered ability that’s waiting to trigger (even if that object is no longer in the zone it used to be
in); or, for certain casual variant games, a face-up card in the command zone. A source doesn’t
need to be capable of dealing damage to be a legal choice. The source is chosen when the effect
is created. If the player chooses a permanent, the effect will apply to the next damage dealt by
that permanent, regardless of whether it’s combat damage or damage dealt as the result of a
spell or ability. If the player chooses a permanent spell, the effect will apply to any damage dealt
by that spell and any damage dealt by the permanent that spell becomes when it resolves.
609.7b Some effects from resolved spells and abilities prevent or replace damage from sources with
certain properties, such as a creature or a source of a particular color. When the source would
deal damage, the “shield” rechecks the source’s properties. If the properties no longer match, the
damage isn’t prevented or replaced. If for any reason the shield prevents no damage or replaces
no damage, the shield isn’t used up.

609.7c Some effects from static abilities prevent or replace damage from sources with certain
properties. For these effects, the prevention or replacement applies to sources that are
permanents with that property and to any sources that aren’t on the battlefield that have that
property.
610. One-Shot Effects
610.1. A one-shot effect does something just once and doesn’t have a duration. Examples include
dealing damage, destroying a permanent, putting a token onto the battlefield, and moving an object
from one zone to another.
610.2. Some one-shot effects create a delayed triggered ability, which instructs a player to do
something later in the game (usually at a specific time) rather than as the spell or ability that’s
creating the one-shot effect resolves. See rule 603.7.
611. Continuous Effects
611.1. A continuous effect modifies characteristics of objects, modifies control of objects, or affects
players or the rules of the game, for a fixed or indefinite period.
611.2. A continuous effect may be generated by the resolution of a spell or ability.
611.2a A continuous effect generated by the resolution of a spell or ability lasts as long as stated by
the spell or ability creating it (such as “until end of turn”). If no duration is stated, it lasts until
the end of the game.
611.2b Some continuous effects generated by the resolution of a spell or ability have durations
worded “for as long as . . . .” If the “for as long as” duration never starts, or it ends before the
moment the effect would first be applied, the effect does nothing. It doesn’t start and
immediately stop again, and it doesn’t last forever.
Example: Endoskeleton is an artifact with an activated ability that reads “{2}, {T}:
Target creature gets +0/+3 for as long as Endoskeleton remains tapped.” If you activate
this ability and then Endoskeleton becomes untapped before the ability resolves, it does
nothing, because its duration—remaining tapped—was over before the effect began.
611.2c If a continuous effect generated by the resolution of a spell or ability modifies the
characteristics or changes the controller of any objects, the set of objects it affects is determined
when that continuous effect begins. After that point, the set won’t change. (Note that this works
differently than a continuous effect from a static ability.) A continuous effect generated by the
resolution of a spell or ability that doesn’t modify the characteristics or change the controller of
any objects modifies the rules of the game, so it can affect objects that weren’t affected when
that continuous effect began.
Example: An effect that reads “All white creatures get +1/+1 until end of turn” gives
the bonus to all permanents that are white creatures when the spell or ability resolves—
even if they change color later—and doesn’t affect those that enter the battlefield or turn
white afterward.
Example: An effect that reads “Prevent all damage creatures would deal this turn”
doesn’t modify any object’s characteristics, so it’s modifying the rules of the game. That
means the effect will apply even to damage from creatures that weren’t on the battlefield
when the continuous effect began. It also affects damage from permanents that become
creatures later in the turn.
611.2d If a resolving spell or ability that creates a continuous effect contains a variable such as X,
the value of that variable is determined only once, on resolution. See rule 608.2g.
611.3. A continuous effect may be generated by the static ability of an object.

611.3a A continuous effect generated by a static ability isn’t “locked in”; it applies at any given
moment to whatever its text indicates.
611.3b The effect applies at all times that the permanent generating it is on the battlefield or the
object generating it is in the appropriate zone.
Example: A permanent with the static ability “All white creatures get +1/+1” generates
an effect that continuously gives +1/+1 to each white creature on the battlefield. If a
creature becomes white, it gets this bonus; a creature that stops being white loses it.
611.3c Continuous effects that modify characteristics of permanents do so simultaneously with the
permanent entering the battlefield. They don’t wait until the permanent is on the battlefield and
then change it. Because such effects apply as the permanent enters the battlefield, they are
applied before determining whether the permanent will cause an ability to trigger when it enters
the battlefield.
Example: A permanent with the static ability “All white creatures get +1/+1” is on the
battlefield. A creature spell that would normally create a 1/1 white creature instead
creates a 2/2 white creature. The creature doesn’t enter the battlefield as 1/1 and then
change to 2/2.
612. Text-Changing Effects
612.1. Some continuous effects change an object’s text. This can apply to any words or symbols printed
on that object, but generally affects only that object’s rules text (which appears in its text box)
and/or the text that appears in its type line. Such an effect is a text-changing effect.
612.2. A text-changing effect changes only those words that are used in the correct way (for example, a
Magic color word being used as a color word, a land type word used as a land type, or a creature
type word used as a creature type). An effect that changes a color word or a subtype can’t change a
card name, even if that name contains a word or a series of letters that is the same as a Magic color
word, basic land type, or creature type.
612.2a Most spells and abilities that create creature tokens use creature types to define both the
creature types and the names of the tokens. A text-changing effect that affects such a spell or an
object with such an ability can change these words because they’re being used as creature types,
even though they’re also being used as names.
612.3. Effects that add or remove abilities don’t change the text of the objects they affect, so any
abilities that are granted to an object can’t be modified by text-changing effects that affect that
object.
612.4. A token’s subtypes and rules text are defined by the spell or ability that created the token. A text-
changing effect that affects a token can change these characteristics.
612.5. One card (Volrath’s Shapeshifter) states that an object has the “full text” of another object. This
changes not just the text that appears in the object’s text box and type line, but also changes the text
that represents its name, mana cost, expansion symbol, power, and toughness.
613. Interaction of Continuous Effects
613.1. The values of an object’s characteristics are determined by starting with the actual object. For a
card, that means the values of the characteristics printed on that card. For a token or a copy of a
spell or card, that means the values of the characteristics defined by the effect that created it. Then
all applicable continuous effects are applied in a series of layers in the following order:
613.1a Layer 1: Copy effects are applied. See rule 706, “Copying Objects.”

613.1b Layer 2: Control-changing effects are applied.
613.1c Layer 3: Text-changing effects are applied. See rule 612, “Text-Changing Effects.”
613.1d Layer 4: Type-changing effects are applied. These include effects that change an object’s
card type, subtype, and/or supertype.
613.1e Layer 5: Color-changing effects are applied.
613.1f Layer 6: Ability-adding and ability-removing effects are applied.
613.1g Layer 7: Power- and/or toughness-changing effects are applied.
613.2. Within layers 1–6, apply effects from characteristic-defining abilities first (see rule 604.3), then
all other effects in timestamp order (see rule 613.6). Note that dependency may alter the order in
which effects are applied within a layer. (See rule 613.7.)
613.3. Within layer 7, apply effects in a series of sublayers in the order described below. Within each
sublayer, apply effects in timestamp order. (See rule 613.6.) Note that dependency may alter the
order in which effects are applied within a sublayer. (See rule 613.7.)
613.3a Layer 7a: Effects from characteristic-defining abilities are applied. See rule 604.3.
613.3b Layer 7b: Effects that set power and/or toughness to a specific number or value are applied.
613.3c Layer 7c: Effects that modify power and/or toughness (but don’t set power and/or toughness
to a specific number or value) are applied.
613.3d Layer 7d: Power and/or toughness changes from counters are applied. See rule 121,
“Counters.”
613.3e Layer 7e: Effects that switch a creature’s power and toughness are applied. Such effects take
the value of power and apply it to the creature’s toughness, and take the value of toughness and
apply it to the creature’s power.
Example: A 1/3 creature is given +0/+1 by an effect. Then another effect switches the
creature’s power and toughness. Its new power and toughness is 4/1. A new effect gives
the creature +5/+0. Its “unswitched” power and toughness would be 6/4, so its actual
power and toughness is 4/6.
Example: A 1/3 creature is given +0/+1 by an effect. Then another effect switches the
creature’s power and toughness. Its new power and toughness is 4/1. If the +0/+1 effect
ends before the switch effect ends, the creature becomes 3/1.
613.4. The application of continuous effects as described by the layer system is continually and
automatically performed by the game. All resulting changes to an object’s characteristics are
instantaneous.
Example: Crusade is an enchantment that reads “White creatures get +1/+1.” Crusade and
a 2/2 black creature are on the battlefield. If an effect then turns the creature white (layer
5), it gets +1/+1 from Crusade (layer 7c), becoming 3/3. If the creature’s color is later
changed to red (layer 5), Crusade’s effect stops applying to it, and it will return to being
2/2.
Example: Gray Ogre, a 2/2 creature, is on the battlefield. An effect puts a +1/+1 counter on
it (layer 7d), making it 3/3. A spell targeting it that says “Target creature gets +4/+4 until
end of turn” resolves (layer 7c), making it 7/7. An enchantment that says “Creatures you
control get +0/+2” enters the battlefield (layer 7c), making it 7/9. An effect that says
“Target creature becomes 0/1 until end of turn” is applied to it (layer 7b), making it 5/8

(0/1, plus +4/+4 from the resolved spell, plus +0/+2 from the enchantment, plus +1/+1
from the counter).
613.5. If an effect should be applied in different layers and/or sublayers, the parts of the effect each
apply in their appropriate ones. If an effect starts to apply in one layer and/or sublayer, it will
continue to be applied to the same set of objects in each other applicable layer and/or sublayer, even
if the ability generating the effect is removed during this process.
Example: An effect that reads “Wild Mongrel gets +1/+1 and becomes the color of your
choice until end of turn” is both a power- and toughness-changing effect and a color-
changing effect. The “becomes the color of your choice” part is applied in layer 5, and then
the “gets +1/+1” part is applied in layer 7.
Example: Grab the Reins has an effect that reads “Until end of turn, you gain control of
target creature and it gains haste.” This is both a control-changing effect and an effect that
adds an ability to an object. The “you gain control” part is applied in layer 2, and then the
“it gains haste” part is applied in layer 6.
Example: An effect that reads “All noncreature artifacts become 2/2 artifact creatures until
end of turn” is both a type-changing effect and a power- and toughness-setting effect. The
type-changing effect is applied to all noncreature artifacts in layer 4 and the power- and
toughness-setting effect is applied to those same permanents in layer 7, even though those
permanents aren’t noncreature artifacts by then.
Example: Svogthos, the Restless Tomb, is on the battlefield. An effect that says “Until end of
turn, target land becomes a 3/3 creature that’s still a land” is applied to it (layers 4 and 7b).
An effect that says “Target creature gets +1/+1 until end of turn” is applied to it (layer 7c),
making it a 4/4 land creature. Then while you have ten creature cards in your graveyard,
you activate Svogthos’s ability: “Until end of turn, Svogthos, the Restless Tomb becomes a
black and green Plant Zombie creature with ‘This creature’s power and toughness are each
equal to the number of creature cards in your graveyard.’ It’s still a land.” (layers 4, 5, and
7b). It becomes an 11/11 land creature. If a creature card enters or leaves your graveyard,
Svogthos’s power and toughness will be modified accordingly. If the first effect is applied to
it again, it will become a 4/4 land creature again.
613.6. Within a layer or sublayer, determining which order effects are applied in is usually done using a
timestamp system. An effect with an earlier timestamp is applied before an effect with a later
timestamp.
613.6a A continuous effect generated by a static ability has the same timestamp as the object the
static ability is on, or the timestamp of the effect that created the ability, whichever is later.
613.6b A continuous effect generated by the resolution of a spell or ability receives a timestamp at
the time it’s created.
613.6c An object’s timestamp is the time it entered the zone it’s currently in, unless it’s an Aura,
Equipment, or Fortification that’s attached to another object or player, or it’s a face-up plane
card.
613.6d If an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification becomes attached to an object or player, the Aura,
Equipment, or Fortification receives a new timestamp at that time.
613.6e A face-up plane card or scheme card receives a timestamp at the time it’s turned face up.
613.6f A face-up vanguard card receives a timestamp at the beginning of the game.
613.6g If two or more objects would receive a timestamp simultaneously, such as by entering a
zone simultaneously or becoming attached simultaneously, the active player determines their
timestamp order at that time.

613.7. Within a layer or sublayer, determining which order effects are applied in is sometimes done
using a dependency system. If a dependency exists, it will override the timestamp system.
613.7a An effect is said to “depend on” another if (a) it’s applied in the same layer (and, if
applicable, sublayer) as the other effect (see rules 613.1 and 613.3); (b) applying the other
would change the text or the existence of the first effect, what it applies to, or what it does to
any of the things it applies to; and (c) neither effect is from a characteristic-defining ability.
Otherwise, the effect is considered to be independent of the other effect.
613.7b An effect dependent on one or more other effects waits to apply until just after all of those
effects have been applied. If multiple dependent effects would apply simultaneously in this way,
they’re applied in timestamp order relative to each other. If several dependent effects form a
dependency loop, then this rule is ignored and the effects in the dependency loop are applied in
timestamp order.
613.7c After each effect is applied, the order of remaining effects is reevaluated and may change if
an effect that has not yet been applied becomes dependent on or independent of one or more
other effects that have not yet been applied.
613.8. One continuous effect can override another. Sometimes the results of one effect determine
whether another effect applies or what another effect does.
Example: Two effects are affecting the same creature: one from an Aura that says
“Enchanted creature gains flying” and one from an Aura that says “Enchanted creature
loses flying.” Neither of these depends on the other, since nothing changes what they affect
or what they’re doing to it. Applying them in timestamp order means the one that was
generated last “wins.” The same process would be followed, and the same result reached, if
either of the effects had a duration (such as “Target creature loses flying until end of turn”)
or came from a non-Aura source (such as “All creatures lose flying”).
Example: One effect reads, “White creatures get +1/+1,” and another reads, “Enchanted
creature is white.” The enchanted creature gets +1/+1 from the first effect, regardless of its
previous color.
613.9. Some continuous effects affect players rather than objects. For example, an effect might give a
player protection from red. All such effects are applied in timestamp order after the determination
of objects’ characteristics. See also the rules for timestamp order and dependency (rules 613.6 and
613.7).
613.10. Some continuous effects affect game rules rather than objects. For example, effects may modify
a player’s maximum hand size, or say that a creature is indestructible. These effects are applied
after all other continuous effects have been applied. Continuous effects that affect the costs of spells
or abilities are applied according to the order specified in rule 601.2e. All other such effects are
applied in timestamp order. See also the rules for timestamp order and dependency (rules 613.6 and
613.7).
614. Replacement Effects
614.1. Some continuous effects are replacement effects. Like prevention effects (see rule 615),
replacement effects apply continuously as events happen—they aren’t locked in ahead of time. Such
effects watch for a particular event that would happen and completely or partially replace that event
with a different event. They act like “shields” around whatever they’re affecting.
614.1a Effects that use the word “instead” are replacement effects. Most replacement effects use the
word “instead” to indicate what events will be replaced with other events.
614.1b Effects that use the word “skip” are replacement effects. These replacement effects use the
word “skip” to indicate what events, steps, phases, or turns will be replaced with nothing.

614.1c Effects that read “[This permanent] enters the battlefield with . . . ,” “As [this permanent]
enters the battlefield . . . ,” or “[This permanent] enters the battlefield as . . . ” are replacement
effects.
614.1d Continuous effects that read “[This permanent] enters the battlefield . . .” or “[Objects] enter
the battlefield . . .” are replacement effects.
614.1e Effects that read “As [this permanent] is turned face up . . . ,” are replacement effects.
614.2. Some replacement effects apply to damage from a source. See rule 609.7.
614.3. There are no special restrictions on casting a spell or activating an ability that generates a
replacement effect. Such effects last until they’re used up or their duration has expired.
614.4. Replacement effects must exist before the appropriate event occurs—they can’t “go back in
time” and change something that’s already happened. Spells or abilities that generate these effects
are often cast or activated in response to whatever would produce the event and thus resolve before
that event would occur.
Example: A player can activate an ability to regenerate a creature in response to a spell
that would destroy it. Once the spell resolves, though, it’s too late to regenerate the
creature.
614.5. A replacement effect doesn’t invoke itself repeatedly; it gets only one opportunity to affect an
event or any modified events that may replace it.
Example: A player controls two permanents, each with an ability that reads “If a creature
you control would deal damage to a creature or player, it deals double that damage to that
creature or player instead.” A creature that normally deals 2 damage will deal 8 damage—
not just 4, and not an infinite amount.
614.6. If an event is replaced, it never happens. A modified event occurs instead, which may in turn
trigger abilities. Note that the modified event may contain instructions that can’t be carried out, in
which case the impossible instruction is simply ignored.
614.7. If a replacement effect would replace an event, but that event never happens, the replacement
effect simply doesn’t do anything.
614.7a If a source would deal 0 damage, it does not deal damage at all. Replacement effects that
would increase the damage dealt by that source, or would have that source deal that damage to a
different object or player, have no event to replace, so they have no effect.
614.8. Regeneration is a destruction-replacement effect. The word “instead” doesn’t appear on the card
but is implicit in the definition of regeneration. “Regenerate [permanent]” means “The next time
[permanent] would be destroyed this turn, instead remove all damage marked on it and tap it. If it’s
an attacking or blocking creature, remove it from combat.” Abilities that trigger from damage being
dealt still trigger even if the permanent regenerates. See rule 701.11.
614.9. Some effects replace damage dealt to one creature, planeswalker, or player with the same
damage dealt to another creature, planeswalker, or player; such effects are called redirection effects.
If either creature or planeswalker is no longer on the battlefield when the damage would be
redirected, or is no longer a creature or planeswalker when the damage would be redirected, the
effect does nothing. If damage would be redirected to or from a player who has left the game, the
effect does nothing.

614.10. An effect that causes a player to skip an event, step, phase, or turn is a replacement effect.
“Skip [something]” is the same as “Instead of doing [something], do nothing.” Once a step, phase,
or turn has started, it can no longer be skipped—any skip effects will wait until the next occurrence.
614.10a Anything scheduled for a skipped step, phase, or turn won’t happen. Anything scheduled
for the “next” occurrence of something waits for the first occurrence that isn’t skipped. If two
effects each cause a player to skip his or her next occurrence, that player must skip the next two;
one effect will be satisfied in skipping the first occurrence, while the other will remain until
another occurrence can be skipped.
614.10b Some effects cause a player to skip a step, phase, or turn, then take another action. That
action is considered to be the first thing that happens during the next step, phase, or turn to
actually occur.
614.11. Some effects replace card draws. These effects are applied even if no cards could be drawn
because there are no cards in the affected player’s library.
614.11a If an effect replaces a draw within a sequence of card draws, all actions required by the
replacement are completed, if possible, before resuming the sequence.
614.11b If an effect would have a player both draw a card and perform an additional action on that
card, and the draw is replaced, the additional action is not performed on any cards that are
drawn as a result of that replacement effect.
614.12. Some replacement effects modify how a permanent enters the battlefield. (See rules 614.1c–d.)
Such effects may come from the permanent itself if they affect only that permanent (as opposed to a
general subset of permanents that includes it). They may also come from other sources. To
determine which replacement effects apply and how they apply, check the characteristics of the
permanent as it would exist on the battlefield, taking into account replacement effects that have
already modified how it enters the battlefield, continuous effects generated by the resolution of
spells or abilities that changed the permanent’s characteristics on the stack (see rule 400.7a), and
continuous effects from the permanent’s own static abilities, but ignoring continuous effects from
any other source that would affect it.
Example: Voice of All says “As Voice of All enters the battlefield, choose a color” and
“Voice of All has protection from the chosen color.” An effect creates a token that’s a copy
of Voice of All. As that token is put onto the battlefield, its controller chooses a color for it.
Example: Yixlid Jailer says “Cards in graveyards have no abilities.” Scarwood Treefolk
says “Scarwood Treefolk enters the battlefield tapped.” A Scarwood Treefolk that’s put onto
the battlefield from a graveyard enters the battlefield tapped.
Example: Orb of Dreams is an artifact that says “Permanents enter the battlefield tapped.”
It won’t affect itself, so Orb of Dreams enters the battlefield untapped.
614.13. An effect that modifies how a permanent enters the battlefield may cause other objects to
change zones. Such an effect can’t cause the permanent itself to not enter the battlefield.
Example: Sutured Ghoul says, in part, “As Sutured Ghoul enters the battlefield, exile any
number of creature cards from your graveyard.” If Sutured Ghoul enters the battlefield from
your graveyard, Sutured Ghoul itself can’t be exiled by this replacement effect.
614.14. An object may have one ability printed on it that generates a replacement effect which causes
one or more cards to be exiled, and another ability that refers either to “the exiled cards” or to cards
“exiled with [this object].” These abilities are linked: the second refers only to cards in the exile
zone that were put there as a direct result of the replacement event caused by the first. If another
object gains a pair of linked abilities, the abilities will be similarly linked on that object. They can’t
be linked to any other ability, regardless of what other abilities the object may currently have or
may have had in the past. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”

614.15. Some replacement effects are not continuous effects. Rather, they are an effect of a resolving
spell or ability that replace part or all of that spell or ability’s own effect(s). Such effects are called
self-replacement effects. When applying replacement effects to an event, self-replacement effects
are applied before other replacement effects.
615. Prevention Effects
615.1. Some continuous effects are prevention effects. Like replacement effects (see rule 614),
prevention effects apply continuously as events happen—they aren’t locked in ahead of time. Such
effects watch for a damage event that would happen and completely or partially prevent the damage
that would be dealt. They act like “shields” around whatever they’re affecting.
615.1a Effects that use the word “prevent” are prevention effects. Prevention effects use “prevent”
to indicate what damage will not be dealt.
615.2. Many preventions effects apply to damage from a source. See rule 609.7.
615.3. There are no special restrictions on casting a spell or activating an ability that generates a
prevention effect. Such effects last until they’re used up or their duration has expired.
615.4. Prevention effects must exist before the appropriate damage event occurs—they can’t “go back
in time” and change something that’s already happened. Spells or abilities that generate these
effects are often cast or activated in response to whatever would produce the event and thus resolve
before that event would occur.
Example: A player can activate an ability that prevents damage in response to a spell that
would deal damage. Once the spell resolves, though, it’s too late to prevent the damage.
615.5. Some prevention effects also include an additional effect, which may refer to the amount of
damage that was prevented. The prevention takes place at the time the original event would have
happened; the rest of the effect takes place immediately afterward.
615.6. If damage that would be dealt is prevented, it never happens. A modified event may occur
instead, which may in turn trigger abilities. Note that the modified event may contain instructions
that can’t be carried out, in which case the impossible instruction is simply ignored.
615.7. Some prevention effects generated by the resolution of a spell or ability refer to a specific
amount of damage—for example, “Prevent the next 3 damage that would be dealt to target creature
or player this turn.” These work like shields. Each 1 damage that would be dealt to the “shielded”
creature or player is prevented. Preventing 1 damage reduces the remaining shield by 1. If damage
would be dealt to the shielded creature or player by two or more applicable sources at the same
time, the player or the controller of the creature chooses which damage the shield prevents. Once
the shield has been reduced to 0, any remaining damage is dealt normally. Such effects count only
the amount of damage; the number of events or sources dealing it doesn’t matter.
615.8. Some prevention effects generated by the resolution of a spell or ability refer to the next time a
specific source would deal damage. These effects prevent the next instance of damage from that
source, regardless of how much damage that is. Once an instance of damage from that source has
been prevented, any subsequent instances of damage that would be dealt by that source are dealt
normally.
615.9. Some prevention effects generated by static abilities refer to a specific amount of damage—for
example, “If a source would deal damage to you, prevent 1 of that damage.” Such an effect prevents
only the indicated amount of damage in any applicable damage event at any given time. It will
apply separately to damage from other applicable events that would happen at the same time, or at a
different time.

Example: Daunting Defender says “If a source would deal damage to a Cleric creature you
control, prevent 1 of that damage.” Pyroclasm says “Pyroclasm deals 2 damage to each
creature.” Pyroclasm will deal 1 damage to each Cleric creature controlled by Daunting
Defender’s controller. It will deal 2 damage to each other creature that player controls.
615.10. Some prevention effects prevent the next N damage that would be dealt to each of a number of
untargeted creatures. Such an effect creates a prevention shield for each applicable creature when
the spell or ability that generates that effect resolves.
Example: Wojek Apothecary has an ability that says “{T}: Prevent the next 1 damage that
would be dealt to target creature and each other creature that shares a color with it this
turn.” When the ability resolves, it gives the target creature and each other creature on the
battlefield that shares a color with it at that time a shield preventing the next 1 damage that
would be dealt to it. Changing creatures’ colors after the ability resolves doesn’t add or
remove shields, and creatures that enter the battlefield later in the turn don’t get the shield.
615.11. Some effects state that damage “can’t be prevented.” If unpreventable damage would be dealt,
any applicable prevention effects are still applied to it. Those effects won’t prevent any damage, but
any additional effects they have will take place.
615.11a A prevention effect is applied to any particular unpreventable damage event just once. It
won’t invoke itself repeatedly trying to prevent that damage.
616. Interaction of Replacement and/or Prevention Effects
616.1. If two or more replacement and/or prevention effects are attempting to modify the way an event
affects an object or player, the affected object’s controller (or its owner if it has no controller) or the
affected player chooses one to apply, following the steps listed below. If two or more players have
to make these choices at the same time, choices are made in APNAP order (see rule 101.4).
616.1a If any of the replacement and/or prevention effects are self-replacement effects (see rule
614.15), one of them must be chosen. If not, proceed to rule 616.1b.
616.1b If any of the replacement and/or prevention effects would modify under whose control an
object would enter the battlefield, one of them must be chosen. If not, proceed to rule 616.1c.
616.1c Any of the applicable replacement and/or prevention effects may be chosen.
616.1d Once the chosen effect has been applied, this process is repeated (taking into account only
replacement or prevention effects that would now be applicable) until there are no more left to
apply.
Example: Two permanents are on the battlefield. One is an enchantment that reads “If a
card would be put into a graveyard from anywhere, instead exile it,” and the other is a
creature that reads “If [this creature] would be put into a graveyard from the
battlefield, instead shuffle it into its owner’s library.” The controller of the creature that
would be destroyed decides which replacement to apply first; the other does nothing.
616.2. A replacement or prevention effect can become applicable to an event as the result of another
replacement or prevention effect that modifies the event.
Example: One effect reads “If you would gain life, draw that many cards instead,” and
another reads “If you would draw a card, return a card from your graveyard to your hand
instead.” Both effects combine (regardless of the order they came into existence): Instead of
gaining 1 life, the player puts a card from his or her graveyard into his or her hand.

7. Additional Rules
700. General
700.1. Anything that happens in a game is an event. Multiple events may take place during the
resolution of a spell or ability. The text of triggered abilities and replacement effects defines the
event they’re looking for. One “happening” may be treated as a single event by one ability and as
multiple events by another.
Example: If an attacking creature is blocked by two defending creatures, this is one event
for a triggered ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] becomes blocked” but two
events for a triggered ability that reads “Whenever [this creature] becomes blocked by a
creature.”
700.2. A spell or ability is modal if it has two or more options preceded by “Choose one —,” “Choose
two —,” “Choose one or both —,” or “[a specified player] chooses one —.” Each of those options
is a mode.
700.2a The controller of a modal spell or activated ability chooses the mode(s) as part of casting
that spell or activating that ability. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to
choose legal targets, for example), that mode can’t be chosen. (See rule 601.2b.)
700.2b The controller of a modal triggered ability chooses the mode(s) as part of putting that ability
on the stack. If one of the modes would be illegal (due to an inability to choose legal targets, for
example), that mode can’t be chosen. If no mode can be chosen, the ability is removed from the
stack. (See rule 603.3c.)
700.2c If a spell or ability targets one or more targets only if a particular mode is chosen for it, its
controller will need to choose those targets only if he or she chose that mode. Otherwise, the
spell or ability is treated as though it did not have those targets. (See rule 601.2c.)
700.2d Some spells and abilities specify that a player other than their controller chooses a mode for
it. In that case, the other player does so when the spell or ability’s controller normally would do
so. If there is more than one other player who could make such a choice, the spell or ability’s
controller decides which of those players will make the choice.
700.2e Modal spells and abilities may have different targeting requirements for each mode.
Changing a spell or ability’s target can’t change its mode.
700.2f A copy of a modal spell or ability copies the mode(s) chosen for it. The controller of the
copy can’t choose a different mode. (See rule 706.9.)
700.3. Sometimes an effect will cause objects to be temporarily grouped into two or more piles.
700.3a Each of the affected objects must be put into exactly one of those piles, unless the effect
specifies otherwise.
700.3b Each object in a pile is still an individual object. The pile is not an object.
700.3c Objects grouped into piles don’t leave the zone they’re currently in. If cards in a graveyard
are split into piles, the order of the graveyard must be maintained.
Example: Fact or Fiction reads, “Reveal the top five cards of your library. An opponent
separates those cards into two piles. Put one pile into your hand and the other into your
graveyard.” While an opponent is separating the revealed cards into piles, they’re still
in their owner’s library. They don’t leave the library until they’re put into their owner’s
hand or graveyard.

 700.3d A pile can contain zero or more objects.
700.4. If a permanent is indestructible, rules and effects can’t destroy it. (See rule 701.6, “Destroy.”)
Such permanents are not destroyed by lethal damage, and they ignore the lethal-damage state-based
action (see rule 704.5g). Rules or effects may cause an indestructible permanent to be sacrificed, put
into a graveyard, or exiled.
700.4a Although the text “[This permanent] is indestructible” is an ability, actually being
indestructible is neither an ability nor a characteristic. It’s just something that’s true about a
permanent.
700.5. If an attacking creature is unblockable, no creature can legally block it. (See rule 509, “Declare
Blockers Step.”) Spells or abilities may still cause it to become blocked.
700.5a Although the text “[This permanent] is unblockable” is an ability, actually being
unblockable is neither an ability nor a characteristic. It’s just something that’s true about a
creature.
700.6. The term dies means “is put into a graveyard from the battlefield.” It is used only when referring
to creatures. (This term will be introduced in the Magic 2012 core set. Some older cards will receive
updated wordings in the mid-July 2011 Oracle update. These updates will not affect how those
cards function.)
701. Keyword Actions
701.1. Most actions described in a card’s rules text use the standard English definitions of the verbs
within, but some specialized verbs are used whose meanings may not be clear. These “keywords”
are game terms; sometimes reminder text summarizes their meanings.
701.2. Activate
701.2a To activate an activated ability is to put it onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will
eventually resolve and have its effect. Only an object’s controller (or its owner, if it doesn’t
have a controller) can activate its activated ability unless the object specifically says otherwise.
A player may activate an ability if he or she has priority. See rule 602, “Activating Activated
Abilities.”
701.3. Attach
701.3a To attach an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to an object means to take it from where it
currently is and put it onto that object. If something is attached to a permanent on the battlefield,
it’s customary to place it so that it’s physically touching the permanent. An Aura, Equipment, or
Fortification can’t be attached to an object it couldn’t enchant, equip, or fortify, respectively.
701.3b If an effect tries to attach an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to an object it can’t be
attached to, the Aura, Equipment, or Fortification doesn’t move. If an effect tries to attach an
Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to the object it’s already attached to, the effect does nothing.
701.3c Attaching an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification on the battlefield to a different object causes
the Aura, Equipment, or Fortification to receive a new timestamp.
701.3d To “unattach” an Equipment from a creature means to move it away from that creature so
the Equipment is on the battlefield but is not equipping anything. It should no longer be
physically touching any creature. If an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification that was attached to
something ceases to be attached to it, that counts as “becoming unattached”; this includes if that
object and/or that Aura, Equipment, or Fortification leaves the battlefield.

701.4. Cast
701.4a To cast a spell is to take it from the zone it’s in (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and
pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its effect. A player may cast a spell if he
or she has priority. See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
701.4b To cast a card is to cast it as a spell.
701.5. Counter
701.5a To counter a spell or ability means to cancel it, removing it from the stack. It doesn’t resolve
and none of its effects occur. A countered spell is put into its owner’s graveyard.
701.5b The player who cast a countered spell or activated a countered ability doesn’t get a “refund”
of any costs that were paid.
701.6. Destroy
701.6a To destroy a permanent, move it from the battlefield to its owner’s graveyard.
701.6b The only ways a permanent can be destroyed are as a result of an effect that uses the word
“destroy” or as a result of the state-based actions that check for lethal damage (see rule 704.5g)
or damage from a source with deathtouch (see rule 704.5h). If a permanent is put into its
owner’s graveyard for any other reason, it hasn’t been “destroyed.”
701.6c A regeneration effect replaces a destruction event. See rule 701.11, “Regenerate.”
701.7. Discard
701.7a To discard a card, move it from its owner’s hand to that player’s graveyard.
701.7b By default, effects that cause a player to discard a card allow the affected player to choose
which card to discard. Some effects, however, require a random discard or allow another player
to choose which card is discarded.
701.7c If a card is discarded, but an effect causes it to be put into a hidden zone instead of into its
owner’s graveyard without being revealed, all values of that card’s characteristics are
considered to be undefined. If a card is discarded this way to pay a cost that specifies a
characteristic about the discarded card, that cost payment is illegal; the game returns to the
moment before the cost was paid (see rule 716, “Handling Illegal Actions”).
701.8. Exchange
701.8a A spell or ability may instruct players to exchange something (for example, life totals or
control of two permanents) as part of its resolution. When such a spell or ability resolves, if the
entire exchange can’t be completed, no part of the exchange occurs.
Example: If a spell attempts to exchange control of two target creatures but one of those
creatures is destroyed before the spell resolves, the spell does nothing to the other
creature.
701.8b When control of two permanents is exchanged, if those permanents are controlled by
different players, each of those players simultaneously gains control of the permanent that was
controlled by the other player. If, on the other hand, those permanents are controlled by the
same player, the exchange effect does nothing.

701.8c When life totals are exchanged, each player gains or loses the amount of life necessary to
equal the other player’s previous life total. Replacement effects may modify these gains and
losses, and triggered abilities may trigger on them.
701.8d Some spells or abilities may instruct a player to exchange cards in one zone with cards in a
different zone (for example, exiled cards and cards in a player’s hand). These spells and abilities
work the same as other “exchange” spells and abilities, except they can exchange the cards only
if all the cards are owned by the same player.
701.8e If a card in one zone is exchanged with a card in a different zone, and either of them is
attached to an object, that card stops being attached to that object and the other card becomes
attached to that object.
701.8f If a spell or ability instructs a player to simply exchange two zones, and one of the zones is
empty, the cards in the zones are still exchanged.
701.9. Exile
701.9a To exile an object, move it to the exile zone from wherever it is. See rule 406, “Exile.”
701.10. Play
701.10a To play a land means to put it onto the battlefield from the zone it’s in (usually the hand).
A player may play a land if he or she has priority, it’s the main phase of his or her turn, the stack
is empty, and he or she hasn’t yet played a land this turn. Playing a land is a special action (see
rule 115), so it doesn’t use the stack; it simply happens. Putting a land onto the battlefield as the
result of a spell or ability isn’t the same as playing a land. See rule 305, “Lands.”
701.10b To play a card means to play that card as a land or to cast that card as a spell, whichever is
appropriate.
701.10c Some effects instruct a player to “play” with a certain aspect of the game changed, such as
“Play with the top card of your library revealed.” “Play” in this sense means to play the Magic
game.
701.10d Previously, the action of casting a spell, or casting a card as a spell, was referred to on
cards as “playing” that spell or that card. Cards that were printed with that text have received
errata in the Oracle card reference so they now refer to “casting” that spell or that card.
701.10e Previously, the action of using an activated ability was referred to on cards as “playing”
that ability. Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card
reference so they now refer to “activating” that ability.
701.11. Regenerate
701.11a If the effect of a resolving spell or ability regenerates a permanent, it creates a replacement
effect that protects the permanent the next time it would be destroyed this turn. In this case,
“Regenerate [permanent]” means “The next time [permanent] would be destroyed this turn,
instead remove all damage marked on it and tap it. If it’s an attacking or blocking creature,
remove it from combat.”
701.11b If the effect of a static ability regenerates a permanent, it replaces destruction with an
alternate effect each time that permanent would be destroyed. In this case, “Regenerate
[permanent]” means “Instead remove all damage marked on [permanent] and tap it. If it’s an
attacking or blocking creature, remove it from combat.”

701.11c Neither activating an ability that creates a regeneration shield nor casting a spell that
creates a regeneration shield is the same as regenerating a permanent. Effects that say that a
permanent can’t be regenerated don’t prevent such abilities from being activated or such spells
from being cast; rather, they prevent regeneration shields from having any effect.
701.12. Reveal
701.12a To reveal a card, show that card to all players for a brief time. If an effect causes a card to
be revealed, it remains revealed for as long as necessary to complete the parts of the effect that
card is relevant to. If the cost to cast a spell or activate an ability includes revealing a card, the
card remains revealed from the time the spell or ability is announced until it the time it leaves
the stack.
701.12b Revealing a card doesn’t cause it to leave the zone it’s in.
701.13. Sacrifice
701.13a To sacrifice a permanent, its controller moves it from the battlefield directly to its owner’s
graveyard. A player can’t sacrifice something that isn’t a permanent, or something that’s a
permanent he or she doesn’t control. Sacrificing a permanent doesn’t destroy it, so regeneration
or other effects that replace destruction can’t affect this action.
701.14. Search
701.14a To search for a card in a zone, look at all cards in that zone (even if it’s a hidden zone) and
find a card that matches the given description.
701.14b If a player is searching a hidden zone for cards with a stated quality, such as a card with a
certain card type or color, that player isn’t required to find some or all of those cards even if
they’re present in that zone.
Example: Splinter says “Exile target artifact. Search its controller’s graveyard, hand,
and library for all cards with the same name as that artifact and exile them. That player
then shuffles his or her library.” A player casts Splinter targeting Howling Mine (an
artifact). Howling Mine’s controller has another Howling Mine in her graveyard and
two more in her library. Splinter’s controller must find the Howling Mine in the
graveyard, but may choose to find zero, one, or two of the Howling Mines in the library.
701.14c If a player is searching a hidden zone simply for a quantity of cards, such as “a card” or
“three cards,” that player must find that many cards (or as many as possible, if the zone doesn’t
contain enough cards).
701.14d If the effect that contains the search instruction doesn’t also contain instructions to reveal
the found card(s), then they’re not revealed.
701.15. Shuffle
701.15a To shuffle a library or a face-down pile of cards, randomize the cards within it so that no
player knows their order.
701.15b Some effects cause a player to search a library for a card or cards, shuffle that library, then
put the found card or cards in a certain position in that library. Even though the found card or
cards never leave that library, they aren’t included in the shuffle. Rather, all the cards in that
library except those are shuffled. Abilities that trigger when a library is shuffled will still trigger.
701.15c If an effect would cause a player to shuffle one or more specific objects into a library, but
none of those objects are in the zone they’re expected to be in, that library is not shuffled.

Example: Guile says, in part, “When Guile is put into a graveyard from anywhere,
shuffle it into its owner’s library.” It’s put into a graveyard and its ability triggers, then
a player exiles it from that graveyard in response. When the ability resolves, nothing
happens.
701.15d If an effect would cause a player to shuffle one or more specific objects into a library, and a
replacement or prevention effect causes all such objects to be moved to another zone instead,
that library isn’t shuffled.
Example: Black Sun’s Zenith says, in part, “Shuffle Black Sun’s Zenith into its owner’s
library.” Black Sun’s Zenith is in a graveyard, has gained flashback (due to Recoup,
perhaps), and is cast from that graveyard. Black Sun’s Zenith will be exiled, and its
owner’s library won’t be shuffled.
701.15e If an effect would cause a player to shuffle a set of objects into a library, that library is
shuffled even if there are no objects in that set.
Example: Loaming Shaman says “When Loaming Shaman enters the battlefield, target
player shuffles any number of target cards from his or her graveyard into his or her
library.” It enters the battlefield, its ability triggers, and no cards are targeted. When
the ability resolves, the targeted player will still have to shuffle his or her library.
701.15f If an effect causes a player to shuffle a library containing zero or one cards, abilities that
trigger when a library is shuffled will still trigger.
701.15g If two or more effects cause a library to be shuffled multiple times simultaneously, abilities
that trigger when that library is shuffled will trigger that many times.
701.16. Tap and Untap
701.16a To tap a permanent, turn it sideways from an upright position. Only untapped permanents
can be tapped.
701.16b To untap a permanent, rotate it back to the upright position from a sideways position. Only
tapped permanents can be untapped.
701.17. Scry
701.17a To “scry N” means to look at the top N cards of your library, put any number of them on
the bottom of your library in any order, and put the rest on top of your library in any order.
701.18. Fateseal
701.18a To “fateseal N” means to look at the top N cards of an opponent’s library, put any number
of them on the bottom of that library in any order, and put the rest on top of that library in any
order.
701.19. Clash
701.19a To clash, a player reveals the top card of his or her library. That player may then put that
card on the bottom of his or her library.
701.19b “Clash with an opponent” means “Choose an opponent. You and that opponent each
clash.”
701.19c A player wins a clash if that player revealed a card with a higher converted mana cost than
all other cards revealed in that clash.

701.20. Planeswalk
701.20a A player may planeswalk only during a Planar Magic game. Only the planar controller may
planeswalk. See rule 901, “Planar Magic.”
701.20b To planeswalk is to put the face-up plane card on the bottom of its owner’s planar deck
face down, then move the top card of your planar deck off that planar deck and turn it face up.
701.20c A player may planeswalk as the result of the “planeswalking ability” (see rule 309.6) or
because the owner of the face-up plane card leaves the game (see rule 901.9).
701.20d The plane card that’s turned face up is the plane the player planeswalks to. The plane card
that’s turned face down, or that leaves the game, is the plane the player planeswalks away from.
701.21. Set in Motion
701.21a Only a scheme card may be set in motion, and only during an Archenemy game. Only the
archenemy may set a scheme card in motion. See rule 311, “Schemes,” and rule 904,
“Archenemy.”
701.21b To set a scheme in motion, move it off the top of your scheme deck and turn it face up.
701.22. Abandon
701.22a Only a face-up ongoing scheme card may be abandoned, and only during an Archenemy
game. See rule 311, “Schemes,” and rule 904, “Archenemy.”
701.22b To abandon a scheme, turn it face down and put it on the bottom of its owner’s scheme
deck.
701.23. Proliferate
701.23a To proliferate means to choose any number of permanents and/or players that have a
counter, then give each exactly one additional counter of a kind that permanent or player already
has.
701.23b If a permanent or player chosen this way has more than one kind of counter, the player who
is proliferating chooses which kind of counter to add.
701.23c To proliferate in a Two-Headed Giant game means to choose any number of permanents
and/or teams that have a counter, then give each exactly one additional counter of a kind that
permanent or team already has. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
702. Keyword Abilities
702.1. Most abilities describe exactly what they do in the card’s rules text. Some, though, are very
common or would require too much space to define on the card. In these cases, the object lists only
the name of the ability as a “keyword”; sometimes reminder text summarizes the game rule.
702.2. Deathtouch
702.2a Deathtouch is a static ability.
702.2b Any nonzero amount of combat damage assigned to a creature by a source with deathtouch
is considered to be lethal damage, regardless of that creature’s toughness. See rules 510.1c–d.

702.2c A creature with toughness greater than 0 that’s been dealt damage by a source with
deathtouch since the last time state-based actions were checked is destroyed as a state-based
action. See rule 704.
702.2d The deathtouch rules function no matter what zone an object with deathtouch deals damage
from.
702.2e If an object changes zones before an effect causes it to deal damage, its last known
information is used to determine whether it had deathtouch.
702.2f Multiple instances of deathtouch on the same object are redundant.
702.3. Defender
702.3a Defender is a static ability.
702.3b A creature with defender can’t attack.
702.3c Multiple instances of defender on the same creature are redundant.
702.4. Double Strike
702.4a Double strike is a static ability that modifies the rules for the combat damage step. (See rule
510, “Combat Damage Step.”)
702.4b If at least one attacking or blocking creature has first strike (see rule 702.7) or double strike
as the combat damage step begins, the only creatures that assign combat damage in that step are
those with first strike or double strike. After that step, instead of proceeding to the end of
combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only creatures that assign combat
damage in that step are the remaining attackers and blockers that had neither first strike nor
double strike as the first combat damage step began, as well as the remaining attackers and
blockers that currently have double strike. After that step, the phase proceeds to the end of
combat step.
702.4c Removing double strike from a creature during the first combat damage step will stop it
from assigning combat damage in the second combat damage step.
702.4d Giving double strike to a creature with first strike after it has already dealt combat damage
in the first combat damage step will allow the creature to assign combat damage in the second
combat damage step.
702.4e Multiple instances of double strike on the same creature are redundant.
702.5. Enchant
702.5a Enchant is a static ability, written “Enchant [object or player].” The enchant ability restricts
what an Aura spell can target and what an Aura can enchant.
702.5b For more information on Auras, see rule 303, “Enchantments.”
702.5c If an Aura has multiple instances of enchant, all of them apply. The Aura’s target must
follow the restrictions from all the instances of enchant. The Aura can enchant only objects or
players that match all of its enchant abilities.
702.5d Auras that can enchant a player can target and be attached to players. Such Auras can’t
target permanents and can’t be attached to permanents.

702.6. Equip
702.6a Equip is an activated ability of Equipment cards. “Equip [cost]” means “[Cost]: Attach this
permanent to target creature you control. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a
sorcery.”
702.6b For more information about Equipment, see rule 301, “Artifacts.”
702.6c If a permanent has multiple instances of equip, any of its equip abilities may be activated.
702.7. First Strike
702.7a First strike is a static ability that modifies the rules for the combat damage step. (See rule
510, “Combat Damage Step.”)
702.7b If at least one attacking or blocking creature has first strike or double strike (see rule 702.4)
as the combat damage step begins, the only creatures that assign combat damage in that step are
those with first strike or double strike. After that step, instead of proceeding to the end of
combat step, the phase gets a second combat damage step. The only creatures that assign combat
damage in that step are the remaining attackers and blockers that had neither first strike nor
double strike as the first combat damage step began, as well as the remaining attackers and
blockers that currently have double strike. After that step, the phase proceeds to the end of
combat step.
702.7c Giving first strike to a creature without it after combat damage has already been dealt in the
first combat damage step won’t prevent that creature from assigning combat damage in the
second combat damage step. Removing first strike from a creature after it has already dealt
combat damage in the first combat damage step won’t allow it to also assign combat damage in
the second combat damage step (unless the creature has double strike).
702.7d Multiple instances of first strike on the same creature are redundant.
702.8. Flash
702.8a Flash is a static ability that functions in any zone from which you could play the card it’s on.
“Flash” means “You may play this card any time you could cast an instant.”
702.8b Multiple instances of flash on the same object are redundant.
702.9. Flying
702.9a Flying is an evasion ability.
702.9b A creature with flying can’t be blocked except by creatures with flying and/or reach. A
creature with flying can block a creature with or without flying. (See rule 509, “Declare
Blockers Step,” and rule 702.16, “Reach.”)
702.9c Multiple instances of flying on the same creature are redundant.
702.10. Haste
702.10a Haste is a static ability.
702.10b If a creature has haste, it can attack even if it hasn’t been controlled by its controller
continuously since his or her most recent turn began. (See rule 302.6.)

702.10c If a creature has haste, its controller can activate its activated abilities whose cost includes
the tap symbol or the untap symbol even if that creature hasn’t been controlled by that player
continuously since his or her most recent turn began. (See rule 302.6.)
702.10d Multiple instances of haste on the same creature are redundant.
702.11. Hexproof
702.11a Hexproof is a static ability.
702.11b “Hexproof” on a permanent means “This permanent can’t be the target of spells or abilities
your opponents control.”
702.11c “Hexproof” on a player means “You can’t be the target of spells or abilities your opponents
control.”
702.11d Multiple instances of hexproof on the same permanent or player are redundant.
702.12. Intimidate
702.12a Intimidate is an evasion ability.
702.12b A creature with intimidate can’t be blocked except by artifact creatures and/or creatures
that share a color with it. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
702.12c Multiple instances of intimidate on the same creature are redundant.
702.13. Landwalk
702.13a Landwalk is a generic term that appears within an object’s rules text as “[type]walk,”
where [type] is usually a subtype, but can be the card type land, any land type, any supertype, or
any combination thereof.
702.13b Landwalk is an evasion ability.
702.13c A creature with landwalk is unblockable as long as the defending player controls at least
one land with the specified subtype (as in “islandwalk”), with the specified supertype (as in
“legendary landwalk”), without the specified supertype (as in “nonbasic landwalk”), or with
both the specified supertype and the specified subtype (as in “snow swampwalk”). (See rule
509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
702.13d Landwalk abilities don’t “cancel” one another.
Example: If a player controls a snow Forest, that player can’t block an attacking
creature with snow forestwalk even if he or she also controls a creature with snow
forestwalk.
702.13e Multiple instances of the same kind of landwalk on the same creature are redundant.
702.14. Lifelink
702.14a Lifelink is a static ability.
702.14b Damage dealt by a source with lifelink causes that source’s controller, or its owner if it has
no controller, to gain that much life (in addition to any other results that damage causes). See
rule 119.3.

702.14c If a permanent leaves the battlefield before an effect causes it to deal damage, its last
known information is used to determine whether it had lifelink.
702.14d The lifelink rules function no matter what zone an object with lifelink deals damage from.
702.14e Multiple instances of lifelink on the same object are redundant.
702.15. Protection
702.15a Protection is a static ability, written “Protection from [quality].” This quality is usually a
color (as in “protection from black”) but can be any characteristic value. If the quality happens
to be a card name, it is treated as such only if the protection ability specifies that the quality is a
name. If the quality is a card type, subtype, or supertype, the ability applies to sources that are
permanents with that card type, subtype, or supertype and to any sources not on the battlefield
that are of that card type, subtype, or supertype. This is an exception to rule 109.2.
702.15b A permanent or player with protection can’t be targeted by spells with the stated quality
and can’t be targeted by abilities from a source with the stated quality.
702.15c A permanent or player with protection can’t be enchanted by Auras that have the stated
quality. Such Auras attached to the permanent or player with protection will be put into their
owners’ graveyards as a state-based action. (See rule 704, “State-Based Actions.”)
702.15d A permanent with protection can’t be equipped by Equipment that have the stated quality
or fortified by Fortifications that have the stated quality. Such Equipment or Fortifications
become unattached from that permanent as a state-based action, but remain on the battlefield.
(See rule 704, “State-Based Actions.”)
702.15e Any damage that would be dealt by sources that have the stated quality to a permanent or
player with protection is prevented.
702.15f Attacking creatures with protection can’t be blocked by creatures that have the stated
quality.
702.15g “Protection from [quality A] and from [quality B]” is shorthand for “protection from
[quality A]” and “protection from [quality B]”; it behaves as two separate protection abilities. If
an effect causes an object with such an ability to lose protection from [quality A], for example,
that object would still have protection from [quality B].
702.15h “Protection from all [characteristic]” is shorthand for “protection from [quality A],”
“protection from [quality B],” and so on for each possible quality the listed characteristic could
have; it behaves as multiple separate protection abilities. If an effect causes an object with such
an ability to lose protection from [quality A], for example, that object would still have
protection from [quality B], [quality C], and so on.
702.15i “Protection from everything” is a variant of the protection ability. A permanent with
protection from everything has protection from each object regardless of that object’s
characteristic values. Such a permanent can’t be targeted by spells or abilities, enchanted by
Auras, equipped by Equipment, fortified by Fortifications, or blocked by creatures, and all
damage that would be dealt to it is prevented.
702.15j Multiple instances of protection from the same quality on the same permanent or player are
redundant.
702.16. Reach

702.16a Reach is a static ability.
702.16b A creature with flying can’t be blocked except by creatures with flying and/or reach. (See
rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step,” and rule 702.9, “Flying.”)
702.16c Multiple instances of reach on the same creature are redundant.
702.17. Shroud
702.17a Shroud is a static ability. “Shroud” means “This permanent or player can’t be the target of
spells or abilities.”
702.17b Multiple instances of shroud on the same permanent or player are redundant.
702.18. Trample
702.18a Trample is a static ability that modifies the rules for assigning an attacking creature’s
combat damage. The ability has no effect when a creature with trample is blocking or is dealing
noncombat damage. (See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”)
702.18b The controller of an attacking creature with trample first assigns damage to the creature(s)
blocking it. Once all those blocking creatures are assigned lethal damage, any remaining
damage is assigned as its controller chooses among those blocking creatures and the player or
planeswalker the creature is attacking. When checking for assigned lethal damage, take into
account damage already marked on the creature and damage from other creatures that’s being
assigned during the same combat damage step, but not any abilities or effects that might change
the amount of damage that’s actually dealt. The attacking creature’s controller need not assign
lethal damage to all those blocking creatures but in that case can’t assign any damage to the
player or planeswalker it’s attacking.
Example: A 2/2 creature with an ability that enables it to block multiple attackers blocks
two attackers: a 1/1 with no abilities a 3/3 with trample. The active player could assign
1 damage from the first attacker and 1 damage from the second to the blocking creature,
and 2 damage to the defending player from the creature with trample.
Example: A 6/6 green creature with trample is blocked by a 2/2 creature with protection
from green. The attacking creature’s controller must assign at least 2 damage to the
blocker, even though that damage will be prevented by the blocker’s protection ability.
The attacking creature’s controller can divide the rest of the damage as he or she
chooses between the blocking creature and the defending player.
702.18c If an attacking creature with trample is blocked, but there are no creatures blocking it when
damage is assigned, all its damage is assigned to the player or planeswalker it’s attacking.
702.18d If a creature with trample is attacking a planeswalker, none of its combat damage can be
assigned to the defending player, even if that planeswalker has been removed from combat or
the damage the attacking creature could assign is greater than the planeswalker’s loyalty.
702.18e Multiple instances of trample on the same creature are redundant.
702.19. Vigilance
702.19a Vigilance is a static ability that modifies the rules for the declare attackers step.
702.19b Attacking doesn’t cause creatures with vigilance to tap. (See rule 508, “Declare Attackers
Step.”)

702.19c Multiple instances of vigilance on the same creature are redundant.
702.20. Banding
702.20a Banding is a static ability that modifies the rules for combat.
702.20b “Bands with other” is a special form of banding. If an effect causes a permanent to lose
banding, the permanent loses all “bands with other” abilities as well.
702.20c As a player declares attackers, he or she may declare that one or more attacking creatures
with banding and up to one attacking creature without banding (even if it has “bands with
other”) are all in a “band.” He or she may also declare that one or more attacking [quality]
creatures with “bands with other [quality]” and any number of other attacking [quality] creatures
are all in a band. A player may declare as many attacking bands as he or she wants, but each
creature may be a member of only one of them. (Defending players can’t declare bands but may
use banding in a different way; see rule 702.20j.)
702.20d All creatures in an attacking band must attack the same player or planeswalker.
702.20e Once an attacking band has been announced, it lasts for the rest of combat, even if
something later removes banding or “bands with other” from one or more of the creatures in the
band.
702.20f An attacking creature that’s removed from combat is also removed from the band it was in.
702.20g Banding doesn’t cause attacking creatures to share abilities, nor does it remove any
abilities. The attacking creatures in a band are separate permanents.
702.20h If an attacking creature becomes blocked by a creature, each other creature in the same
band as the attacking creature becomes blocked by that same blocking creature.
Example: A player attacks with a band consisting of a creature with flying and a
creature with swampwalk. The defending player, who controls a Swamp, can block the
flying creature if able. If he or she does, then the creature with swampwalk will also
become blocked by the blocking creature(s).
702.20i If one member of a band would become blocked due to an effect, the entire band becomes
blocked.
702.20j During the combat damage step, if an attacking creature is being blocked by a creature with
banding, or by both a [quality] creature with “bands with other [quality]” and another [quality]
creature, the defending player (rather than the active player) chooses how the attacking
creature’s damage is assigned. That player can divide that creature’s combat damage as he or
she chooses among any number of creatures blocking it. This is an exception to the procedure
described in rule 510.1c.
702.20k During the combat damage step, if a blocking creature is blocking a creature with banding,
or both a [quality] creature with “bands with other [quality]” and another [quality] creature, the
active player (rather than the defending player) chooses how the blocking creature’s damage is
assigned. That player can divide that creature’s combat damage as he or she chooses among any
number of creatures it’s blocking. This is an exception to the procedure described in rule
510.1d.
702.20m Multiple instances of banding on the same creature are redundant. Multiple instances of
“bands with other” of the same kind on the same creature are redundant.
702.21. Rampage

702.21a Rampage is a triggered ability. “Rampage N” means “Whenever this creature becomes
blocked, it gets +N/+N until end of turn for each creature blocking it beyond the first.” (See rule
509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
702.21b The rampage bonus is calculated only once per combat, when the triggered ability resolves.
Adding or removing blockers later in combat won’t change the bonus.
702.21c If a creature has multiple instances of rampage, each triggers separately.
702.22. Cumulative Upkeep
702.22a Cumulative upkeep is a triggered ability that imposes an increasing cost on a permanent.
“Cumulative upkeep [cost]” means “At the beginning of your upkeep, if this permanent is on the
battlefield, put an age counter on this permanent. Then you may pay [cost] for each age counter
on it. If you don’t, sacrifice it.” If [cost] has choices associated with it, each choice is made
separately for each age counter, then either the entire set of costs is paid, or none of them is
paid. Partial payments aren’t allowed.
Example: A creature has “Cumulative upkeep {W} or {U}” and two age counters on it.
When its ability next triggers and resolves, the creature’s controller puts an age counter
on it and then may pay {W}{W}{W}, {W}{W}{U}, {W}{U}{U}, or {U}{U}{U} to keep the
creature on the battlefield.
Example: A creature has “Cumulative upkeep—Sacrifice a creature” and one age
counter on it. When its ability next triggers and resolves, its controller can’t choose the
same creature to sacrifice twice. Either two different creatures must be sacrificed, or the
creature with cumulative upkeep must be sacrificed.
702.22b If a permanent has multiple instances of cumulative upkeep, each triggers separately.
However, the age counters are not connected to any particular ability; each cumulative upkeep
ability will count the total number of age counters on the permanent at the time that ability
resolves.
Example: A creature has two instances of “Cumulative upkeep—Pay 1 life.” The
creature currently has no counters but both cumulative upkeep abilities trigger. When
the first ability resolves, the controller adds a counter and then chooses to pay 1 life.
When the second ability resolves, the controller adds another counter and then chooses
to pay an additional 2 life.
702.23. Flanking
702.23a Flanking is a triggered ability that triggers during the declare blockers step. (See rule 509,
“Declare Blockers Step.”) “Flanking” means “Whenever this creature becomes blocked by a
creature without flanking, the blocking creature gets -1/-1 until end of turn.”
702.23b If a creature has multiple instances of flanking, each triggers separately.
702.24. Phasing
702.24a Phasing is a static ability that modifies the rules of the untap step. During each player’s
untap step, before the active player untaps his or her permanents, all phased-in permanents with
phasing that player controls “phase out.” Simultaneously, all phased-out permanents that had
phased out under that player’s control “phase in.”
702.24b If a permanent phases out, its status changes to “phased out.” Except for rules and effects
that specifically mention phased-out permanents, a phased-out permanent is treated as though it
does not exist. It can’t affect or be affected by anything else in the game.

Example: You control three creatures, one of which is phased out. You cast a spell that
says “Draw a card for each creature you control.” You draw two cards.
Example: You control a phased-out creature. You cast Wrath of God, which says
“Destroy all creatures. They can’t be regenerated.” The phased-out creature is not
destroyed.
702.24c If a permanent phases in, its status changes to “phased in.” The game once again treats it as
though it exists.
702.24d The phasing event doesn’t actually cause a permanent to change zones or control, even
though it’s treated as though it’s not on the battlefield and not under its controller’s control
while it’s phased out. Zone-change triggers don’t trigger when a permanent phases in or out.
Counters remain on a permanent while it’s phased out. Effects that check a phased-in
permanent’s history won’t treat the phasing event as having caused the permanent to leave or
enter the battlefield or its controller’s control.
702.24e Continuous effects that affect a phased-out permanent may expire while that permanent is
phased out. If so, they will no longer affect that permanent once it’s phased in. In particular,
effects with “for as long as” durations that track that permanent (see rule 611.2b) end when that
permanent phases out because they can no longer see it.
702.24f When a permanent phases out, any Auras, Equipment, or Fortifications attached to that
permanent phase out at the same time. This alternate way of phasing out is known as phasing
out “indirectly.” An Aura, Equipment, or Fortification that phased out indirectly won’t phase in
by itself, but instead phases in along with the permanent it’s attached to.
702.24g If an object would simultaneously phase out directly and indirectly, it just phases out
indirectly.
702.24h An Aura, Equipment, or Fortification that phased out directly will phase in attached to the
object or player it was attached to when it phased out, if that object is still in the same zone or
that player is still in the game. If not, that Aura, Equipment, or Fortification phases in
unattached. State-based actions apply as appropriate. (See rules 704.5n and 704.5p.)
702.24i Abilities that trigger when a permanent becomes attached or unattached from an object or
player don’t trigger when that permanent phases in or out.
702.24j Phased-out permanents owned by a player who leaves the game also leave the game. This
doesn’t trigger zone-change triggers. See rule 800.4.
702.24k Phased-out tokens cease to exist as a state-based action. See rule 704.5d.
702.24m If an effect causes a player to skip his or her untap step, the phasing event simply doesn’t
occur that turn.
702.24n Multiple instances of phasing on the same permanent are redundant.
702.25. Buyback
702.25a Buyback appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents two static abilities that
function while the spell is on the stack. “Buyback [cost]” means “You may pay an additional
[cost] as you cast this spell” and “If the buyback cost was paid, put this spell into its owner’s
hand instead of into that player’s graveyard as it resolves.” Paying a spell’s buyback cost
follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.26. Shadow

702.26a Shadow is an evasion ability.
702.26b A creature with shadow can’t be blocked by creatures without shadow, and a creature
without shadow can’t be blocked by creatures with shadow. (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers
Step.”)
702.26c Multiple instances of shadow on the same creature are redundant.
702.27. Cycling
702.27a Cycling is an activated ability that functions only while the card with cycling is in a
player’s hand. “Cycling [cost]” means “[Cost], Discard this card: Draw a card.”
702.27b Although the cycling ability can be activated only if the card is in a player’s hand, it
continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all other zones. Therefore objects
with cycling will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one or more activated
abilities.
702.27c Some cards with cycling have abilities that trigger when they’re cycled. “When you cycle
[this card]” means “When you discard [this card] to pay a cycling cost.” These abilities trigger
from whatever zone the card winds up in after it’s cycled.
702.27d Typecycling is a variant of the cycling ability. “[Type]cycling [cost]” means “[Cost],
Discard this card: Search your library for a [type] card, reveal it, and put it into your hand. Then
shuffle your library.” This type is usually a subtype (as in “mountaincycling”) but can be any
card type, subtype, supertype, or combination thereof (as in “basic landcycling”).
702.27e Typecycling abilities are cycling abilities, and typecycling costs are cycling costs. Any
cards that trigger when a player cycles a card will trigger when a card is discarded to pay a
typecycling cost. Any effect that stops players from cycling cards will stop players from
activating cards’ typecycling abilities. Any effect that increases or reduces a cycling cost will
increase or reduce a typecycling cost.
702.28. Echo
702.28a Echo is a triggered ability. “Echo [cost]” means “At the beginning of your upkeep, if this
permanent came under your control since the beginning of your last upkeep, sacrifice it unless
you pay [cost].”
702.28b Urza block cards with the echo ability were printed without an echo cost. These cards have
been given errata in the Oracle card reference; each one now has an echo cost equal to its mana
cost.
702.29. Horsemanship
702.29a Horsemanship is an evasion ability.
702.29b A creature with horsemanship can’t be blocked by creatures without horsemanship. A
creature with horsemanship can block a creature with or without horsemanship. (See rule 509,
“Declare Blockers Step.”)
702.29c Multiple instances of horsemanship on the same creature are redundant.
702.30. Fading

702.30a Fading is a keyword that represents two abilities. “Fading N” means “This permanent
enters the battlefield with N fade counters on it” and “At the beginning of your upkeep, remove
a fade counter from this permanent. If you can’t, sacrifice the permanent.”
702.31. Kicker
702.31a Kicker is a static ability that functions while the spell with kicker is on the stack. “Kicker
[cost]” means “You may pay an additional [cost] as you cast this spell.” Paying a spell’s kicker
cost(s) follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.31b The phrase “Kicker [cost 1] and/or [cost 2]” means the same thing as “Kicker [cost 1],
kicker [cost 2].”
702.31c Multikicker is a variant of the kicker ability. “Multikicker [cost]” means “You may pay an
additional [cost] any number of times as you cast this spell.” A multikicker cost is a kicker cost.
702.31d If a spell’s controller declares the intention to pay any of that spell’s kicker costs, that spell
has been “kicked.” If a spell has two kicker costs or has multikicker, it may be kicked multiple
times. See rule 601.2b.
702.31e Objects with kicker or multikicker have additional abilities that specify what happens if
they are kicked. These abilities are linked to the kicker or multikicker abilities printed on that
object: they can refer only to those specific kicker or multikicker abilities. See rule 607, “Linked
Abilities.”
702.31f Objects with more than one kicker cost have abilities that each correspond to a specific
kicker cost. They contain the phrases “if it was kicked with its [A] kicker” and “if it was kicked
with its [B] kicker,” where A and B are the first and second kicker costs listed on the card,
respectively. Each of those abilities is linked to the appropriate kicker ability.
702.31g If part of a spell’s ability has its effect only if that spell was kicked, and that part of the
ability includes any targets, the spell’s controller chooses those targets only if that spell was
kicked. Otherwise, the spell is cast as if it did not have those targets. See rule 601.2c.
702.32. Flashback
702.32a Flashback appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents two static abilities: one that
functions while the card is in a player’s graveyard and the other that functions while the card is
on the stack. “Flashback [cost]” means “You may cast this card from your graveyard by paying
[cost] rather than paying its mana cost” and “If the flashback cost was paid, exile this card
instead of putting it anywhere else any time it would leave the stack.” Casting a spell using its
flashback ability follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.33. Madness
702.33a Madness is a keyword that represents two abilities. The first is a static ability that functions
while the card with madness is in a player’s hand. The second is a triggered ability that
functions when the first ability is applied. “Madness [cost]” means “If a player would discard
this card, that player discards it, but may exile it instead of putting it into his or her graveyard”
and “When this card is exiled this way, its owner may cast it by paying [cost] rather than paying
its mana cost. If that player doesn’t, he or she puts this card into his or her graveyard.”
702.33b Casting a spell using its madness ability follows the rules for paying alternative costs in
rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.34. Fear

702.34a Fear is an evasion ability.
702.34b A creature with fear can’t be blocked except by artifact creatures and/or black creatures.
(See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
702.34c Multiple instances of fear on the same creature are redundant.
702.35. Morph
702.35a Morph is a static ability that functions in any zone from which you could play the card it’s
on, and the morph effect works any time the card is face down. “Morph [cost]” means “You
may cast this card as a 2/2 face-down creature, with no text, no name, no subtypes, no expansion
symbol, and no mana cost by paying {3} rather than paying its mana cost.” (See rule 707,
“Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”)
702.35b To cast a card using its morph ability, turn it face down. It becomes a 2/2 face-down
creature card, with no text, no name, no subtypes, no expansion symbol, and no mana cost. Any
effects or prohibitions that would apply to casting a card with these characteristics (and not the
face-up card’s characteristics) are applied to casting this card. These values are the copiable
values of that object’s characteristics. (See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous Effects,” and
rule 706, “Copying Objects.”) Put it onto the stack (as a face-down spell with the same
characteristics), and pay {3} rather than pay its mana cost. This follows the rules for paying
alternative costs. You can use morph to cast a card from any zone from which you could
normally play it. When the spell resolves, it enters the battlefield with the same characteristics
the spell had. The morph effect applies to the face-down object wherever it is, and it ends when
the permanent is turned face up.
702.35c You can’t cast a card face down if it doesn’t have morph.
702.35d If you have priority, you may turn a face-down permanent you control face up. This is a
special action; it doesn’t use the stack (see rule 115). To do this, show all players what the
permanent’s morph cost would be if it were face up, pay that cost, then turn the permanent face
up. (If the permanent wouldn’t have a morph cost if it were face up, it can’t be turned face up
this way.) The morph effect on it ends, and it regains its normal characteristics. Any abilities
relating to the permanent entering the battlefield don’t trigger when it’s turned face up and don’t
have any effect, because the permanent has already entered the battlefield.
702.35e See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents,” for more information on how to cast
cards with morph.
702.36. Amplify
702.36a Amplify is a static ability. “Amplify N” means “As this object enters the battlefield, reveal
any number of cards from your hand that share a creature type with it. This permanent enters the
battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it for each card revealed this way. You can’t reveal this
card or any other cards that are entering the battlefield at the same time as this card.”
702.36b If a creature has multiple instances of amplify, each one works separately.
702.37. Provoke
702.37a Provoke is a triggered ability. “Provoke” means “Whenever this creature attacks, you may
choose to have target creature defending player controls block this creature this combat if able.
If you do, untap that creature.”

702.37b If a creature has multiple instances of provoke, each triggers separately.
702.38. Storm
702.38a Storm is a triggered ability that functions on the stack. “Storm” means “When you cast this
spell, put a copy of it onto the stack for each other spell that was cast before it this turn. If the
spell has any targets, you may choose new targets for any of the copies.”
702.38b If a spell has multiple instances of storm, each triggers separately.
702.39. Affinity
702.39a Affinity is a static ability that functions while the spell is on the stack. “Affinity for [text]”
means “This spell costs you {1} less to cast for each [text] you control.”
702.39b The affinity ability reduces only the amount of generic mana a spell’s controller has to pay;
it doesn’t reduce how much colored mana that player has to pay.
702.39c If a spell has multiple instances of affinity, each of them applies.
702.40. Entwine
702.40a Entwine is a static ability of modal spells (see rule 700.2) that functions while the spell is
on the stack. “Entwine [cost]” means “You may choose all modes of this spell instead of just
one. If you do, you pay an additional [cost].” Using the entwine ability follows the rules for
choosing modes and paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.40b If the entwine cost was paid, follow the text of each of the modes in the order written on
the card when the spell resolves.
702.41. Modular
702.41a Modular represents both a static ability and a triggered ability. “Modular N” means “This
permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it” and “When this permanent is put
into a graveyard from the battlefield, you may put a +1/+1 counter on target artifact creature for
each +1/+1 counter on this permanent.”
702.41b If a creature has multiple instances of modular, each one works separately.
702.42. Sunburst
702.42a Sunburst is a static ability that functions as an object is entering the battlefield from the
stack. “Sunburst” means “If this object is entering the battlefield from the stack as a creature, it
enters the battlefield with a +1/+1 counter on it for each color of mana spent to cast it. If this
object is entering the battlefield from the stack and isn’t entering the battlefield as a creature, it
enters the battlefield with a charge counter on it for each color of mana spent to cast it.”
702.42b Sunburst applies only as the spell is resolving and only if one or more colored mana was
spent on its costs. Mana paid for additional or alternative costs applies.
702.42c Sunburst can also be used to set a variable number for another ability. If the keyword is
used in this way, it doesn’t matter whether the ability is on a creature spell or on a noncreature
spell.
Example: The ability “Modular—Sunburst” means “This permanent enters the
battlefield with a +1/+1 counter on it for each color of mana spent to cast it” and

“When this permanent is put into a graveyard from the battlefield, you may put a +1/+1
counter on target artifact creature for each +1/+1 counter on this permanent.”
702.42d If an object has multiple instances of sunburst, each one works separately.
702.43. Bushido
702.43a Bushido is a triggered ability. “Bushido N” means “Whenever this creature blocks or
becomes blocked, it gets +N/+N until end of turn.” (See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”)
702.43b If a creature has multiple instances of bushido, each triggers separately.
702.44. Soulshift
702.44a Soulshift is a triggered ability. “Soulshift N” means “When this permanent is put into a
graveyard from the battlefield, you may return target Spirit card with converted mana cost N or
less from your graveyard to your hand.”
702.44b If a permanent has multiple instances of soulshift, each triggers separately.
702.45. Splice
702.45a Splice is a static ability that functions while a card is in your hand. “Splice onto [subtype]
[cost]” means “You may reveal this card from your hand as you cast a [subtype] spell. If you do,
copy this card’s text box onto that spell and pay [cost] as an additional cost to cast that spell.”
Paying a card’s splice cost follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and
601.2e–g.
Example: Since the card with splice remains in the player’s hand, it can later be cast
normally or spliced onto another spell. It can even be discarded to pay a “discard a
card” cost of the spell it’s spliced onto.
702.45b You can’t choose to use a splice ability if you can’t make the required choices (targets,
etc.) for that card’s instructions. You can’t splice any one card onto the same spell more than
once. If you’re splicing more than one card onto a spell, reveal them all at once and choose the
order in which their instructions will be followed. The instructions on the main spell have to be
followed first.
702.45c The spell has the characteristics of the main spell, plus the text boxes of each of the spliced
cards. The spell doesn’t gain any other characteristics (name, mana cost, color, supertypes, card
types, subtypes, etc.) of the spliced cards. Text copied onto the spell that refers to a card by
name refers to the spell on the stack, not the card from which the text was copied.
Example: Glacial Ray is a red card with splice onto Arcane that reads, “Glacial Ray
deals 2 damage to target creature or player.” Suppose Glacial Ray is spliced onto
Reach Through Mists, a blue spell. The spell is still blue, and Reach Through Mists
deals the damage. This means that the ability can target a creature with protection from
red and deal 2 damage to that creature.
702.45d Choose targets for the added text normally (see rule 601.2c). Note that a spell with one or
more targets will be countered if all of its targets are illegal on resolution.
702.45e The spell loses any splice changes once it leaves the stack (for example, when it’s
countered, it’s exiled, or it resolves).
702.46. Offering

702.46a Offering is a static ability of a card that functions in any zone from which the card can be
cast. “[Subtype] offering” means “You may cast this card any time you could cast an instant by
sacrificing a [subtype] permanent. If you do, the total cost to cast this card is reduced by the
sacrificed permanent’s mana cost.”
702.46b The permanent is sacrificed at the same time the spell is announced (see rule 601.2a). The
total cost of the spell is reduced by the sacrificed permanent’s mana cost (see rule 601.2e).
702.46c Generic mana in the sacrificed permanent’s mana cost reduces generic mana in the total
cost to cast the card with offering. Colored mana in the sacrificed permanent’s mana cost
reduces mana of the same color in the total cost to cast the card with offering. Colored mana in
the sacrificed permanent’s mana cost that doesn’t match colored mana in the colored mana cost
of the card with offering, or is in excess of the card’s colored mana cost, reduces that much
generic mana in the total cost.
702.47. Ninjutsu
702.47a Ninjutsu is an activated ability that functions only while the card with ninjutsu is in a
player’s hand. “Ninjutsu [cost]” means “[Cost], Reveal this card from your hand, Return an
unblocked attacking creature you control to its owner’s hand: Put this card onto the battlefield
from your hand tapped and attacking.”
702.47b The card with ninjutsu remains revealed from the time the ability is announced until the
ability leaves the stack.
702.47c A ninjutsu ability may be activated only while a creature on the battlefield is unblocked
(see rule 509.1h). The creature with ninjutsu is put onto the battlefield unblocked. It will be
attacking the same player or planeswalker as the creature that was returned to its owner’s hand.
702.48. Epic
702.48a Epic represents two spell abilities, one of which creates a delayed triggered ability. “Epic”
means “For the rest of the game, you can’t cast spells,” and “At the beginning of each of your
upkeeps for the rest of the game, copy this spell except for its epic ability. If the spell has any
targets, you may choose new targets for the copy.” See rule 706.9.
702.48b A player can’t cast spells once a spell with epic he or she controls resolves, but effects
(such as the epic ability itself) can still put copies of spells onto the stack.
702.49. Convoke
702.49a Convoke is a static ability that functions while the spell with convoke is on the stack.
“Convoke” means “As an additional cost to cast this spell, you may tap any number of untapped
creatures you control. Each creature tapped this way reduces the cost to cast this spell by {1} or
by one mana of any of that creature’s colors.” Using the convoke ability follows the rules for
paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
Example: You cast Guardian of Vitu-Ghazi, a spell with convoke that costs {6}{G}{W}.
You announce that you’re going to tap a colorless creature, a red creature, and a green-
and-white creature to help pay for it. The colorless creature and the red creature each
reduce the spell’s cost by {1}. You choose whether the green-white creature reduces the
spell’s cost by {1}, {G}, or {W}. Then the creatures become tapped as you pay Guardian
of Vitu-Ghazi’s cost.
702.49b Multiple instances of convoke on the same spell are redundant.
702.50. Dredge

702.50a Dredge is a static ability that functions only while the card with dredge is in a player’s
graveyard. “Dredge N” means “As long as you have at least N cards in your library, if you
would draw a card, you may instead put N cards from the top of your library into your
graveyard and return this card from your graveyard to your hand.”
702.50b A player with fewer cards in his or her library than the number required by a dredge ability
can’t put any of them into his or her graveyard this way.
702.51. Transmute
702.51a Transmute is an activated ability that functions only while the card with transmute is in a
player’s hand. “Transmute [cost]” means “[Cost], Discard this card: Search your library for a
card with the same converted mana cost as the discarded card, reveal that card, and put it into
your hand. Then shuffle your library. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a
sorcery.”
702.51b Although the transmute ability can be activated only if the card is in a player’s hand, it
continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all other zones. Therefore objects
with transmute will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one or more activated
abilities.
702.52. Bloodthirst
702.52a Bloodthirst is a static ability. “Bloodthirst N” means “If an opponent was dealt damage this
turn, this permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it.”
702.52b “Bloodthirst X” is a special form of bloodthirst. “Bloodthirst X” means “This permanent
enters the battlefield with X +1/+1 counters on it, where X is the total damage your opponents
have been dealt this turn.”
702.52c If an object has multiple instances of bloodthirst, each applies separately.
702.53. Haunt
702.53a Haunt is a triggered ability. “Haunt” on a permanent means “When this permanent is put
into a graveyard from the battlefield, exile it haunting target creature.” “Haunt” on an instant or
sorcery spell means “When this spell is put into a graveyard during its resolution, exile it
haunting target creature.”
702.53b Cards that are in the exile zone as the result of a haunt ability “haunt” the creature targeted
by that ability. The phrase “creature it haunts” refers to the object targeted by the haunt ability,
regardless of whether or not that object is still a creature.
702.53c Triggered abilities of cards with haunt that refer to the haunted creature can trigger in the
exile zone.
702.54. Replicate
702.54a Replicate is a keyword that represents two abilities. The first is a static ability that
functions while the spell with replicate is on the stack. The second is a triggered ability that
functions while the spell with replicate is on the stack. “Replicate [cost]” means “As an
additional cost to cast this spell, you may pay [cost] any number of times” and “When you cast
this spell, if a replicate cost was paid for it, copy it for each time its replicate cost was paid. If
the spell has any targets, you may choose new targets for any of the copies.” Paying a spell’s
replicate cost follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.

702.54b If a spell has multiple instances of replicate, each is paid separately and triggers based on
the payments made for it, not any other instance of replicate.
702.55. Forecast
702.55a A forecast ability is a special kind of activated ability that can be activated only from a
player’s hand. It’s written “Forecast — [Activated ability].”
702.55b A forecast ability may be activated only during the upkeep step of the card’s owner and
only once each turn. The controller of the forecast ability reveals the card with that ability from
his or her hand as the ability is activated. That player plays with that card revealed in his or her
hand until it leaves the player’s hand or until a step or phase that isn’t an upkeep step begins,
whichever comes first.
702.56. Graft
702.56a Graft represents both a static ability and a triggered ability. “Graft N” means “This
permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters on it” and “Whenever another creature
enters the battlefield, if this permanent has a +1/+1 counter on it, you may move a +1/+1
counter from this permanent onto that creature.”
702.56b If a creature has multiple instances of graft, each one works separately.
702.57. Recover
702.57a Recover is a triggered ability that functions only while the card with recover is in a player’s
graveyard. “Recover [cost]” means “When a creature is put into your graveyard from the
battlefield, you may pay [cost]. If you do, return this card from your graveyard to your hand.
Otherwise, exile this card.”
702.58. Ripple
702.58a Ripple is a triggered ability that functions only while the card with ripple is on the stack.
“Ripple N” means “When you cast this spell, you may reveal the top N cards of your library, or,
if there are fewer than N cards in your library, you may reveal all the cards in your library. If
you reveal cards from your library this way, you may cast any of those cards with the same
name as this spell without paying their mana costs, then put all revealed cards not cast this way
on the bottom of your library in any order.”
702.58b If a spell has multiple instances of ripple, each triggers separately.
702.59. Split Second
702.59a Split second is a static ability that functions only while the spell with split second is on the
stack. “Split second” means “As long as this spell is on the stack, players can’t cast other spells
or activate abilities that aren’t mana abilities.”
702.59b Players may activate mana abilities and take special actions while a spell with split second
is on the stack. Triggered abilities trigger and are put on the stack as normal while a spell with
split second is on the stack.
702.59c Multiple instances of split second on the same spell are redundant.
702.60. Suspend

702.60a Suspend is a keyword that represents three abilities. The first is a static ability that
functions while the card with suspend is in a player’s hand. The second and third are triggered
abilities that function in the exile zone. “Suspend N—[cost]” means “If you could begin to cast
this card by putting it onto the stack from your hand, you may pay [cost] and exile it with N
time counters on it. This action doesn’t use the stack,” and “At the beginning of your upkeep, if
this card is suspended, remove a time counter from it,” and “When the last time counter is
removed from this card, if it’s exiled, play it without paying its mana cost if able. If you can’t, it
remains exiled. If you cast a creature spell this way, it gains haste until you lose control of the
spell or the permanent it becomes.”
702.60b A card is “suspended” if it’s in the exile zone, has suspend, and has a time counter on it.
702.60c Casting a spell as an effect of its suspend ability follows the rules for paying alternative
costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.61. Vanishing
702.61a Vanishing is a keyword that represents three abilities. “Vanishing N” means “This
permanent enters the battlefield with N time counters on it,” “At the beginning of your upkeep,
if this permanent has a time counter on it, remove a time counter from it,” and “When the last
time counter is removed from this permanent, sacrifice it.”
702.61b Vanishing without a number means “At the beginning of your upkeep, if this permanent
has a time counter on it, remove a time counter from it” and “When the last time counter is
removed from this permanent, sacrifice it.”
702.61c If a permanent has multiple instances of vanishing, each works separately.
702.62. Absorb
702.62a Absorb is a static ability. “Absorb N” means “If a source would deal damage to this
creature, prevent N of that damage.”
702.62b Each absorb ability can prevent only N damage from any one source at any one time. It
will apply separately to damage from other sources, or to damage dealt by the same source at a
different time.
702.62c If an object has multiple instances of absorb, each applies separately.
702.63. Aura Swap
702.63a Aura swap is an activated ability of some Aura cards. “Aura swap [cost]” means “[Cost]:
You may exchange this permanent with an Aura card in your hand.”
702.63b If either half of the exchange can’t be completed, the ability has no effect.
Example: You activate the aura swap ability of an Aura. The only Aura card in your
hand can’t enchant the permanent that’s enchanted by the Aura with aura swap. The
ability has no effect.
Example: You activate the aura swap ability of an Aura that you control but you don’t
own. The ability has no effect.
702.64. Delve
702.64a Delve is a static ability that functions while the spell that has delve is on the stack. “Delve”
means “As an additional cost to cast this spell, you may exile any number of cards from your

graveyard. Each card exiled this way reduces the cost to cast this spell by {1}.” Using the delve
ability follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.64b Multiple instances of delve on the same spell are redundant.
702.65. Fortify
702.65a Fortify is an activated ability of Fortification cards. “Fortify [cost]” means “[Cost]: Attach
this Fortification to target land you control. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a
sorcery.”
702.65b For more information about Fortifications, see rule 301, “Artifacts.”
702.65c If a Fortification has multiple instances of fortify, any of its fortify abilities may be used.
702.66. Frenzy
702.66a Frenzy is a triggered ability. “Frenzy N” means “Whenever this creature attacks and isn’t
blocked, it gets +N/+0 until end of turn.”
702.66b If a creature has multiple instances of frenzy, each triggers separately.
702.67. Gravestorm
702.67a Gravestorm is a triggered ability that functions on the stack. “Gravestorm” means “When
you cast this spell, put a copy of it onto the stack for each permanent that was put into a
graveyard from the battlefield this turn. If the spell has any targets, you may choose new targets
for any of the copies.”
702.67b If a spell has multiple instances of gravestorm, each triggers separately.
702.68. Poisonous
702.68a Poisonous is a triggered ability. “Poisonous N” means “Whenever this creature deals
combat damage to a player, that player gets N poison counters.” (For information about poison
counters, see rule 104.3d.)
702.68b If a creature has multiple instances of poisonous, each triggers separately.
702.69. Transfigure
702.69a Transfigure is an activated ability. “Transfigure [cost]” means “[Cost], Sacrifice this
permanent: Search your library for a creature card with the same converted mana cost as this
permanent and put it onto the battlefield. Then shuffle your library. Activate this ability only
any time you could cast a sorcery.”
702.70. Champion
702.70a Champion represents two triggered abilities. “Champion an [object]” means “When this
permanent enters the battlefield, sacrifice it unless you exile another [object] you control” and
“When this permanent leaves the battlefield, return the exiled card to the battlefield under its
owner’s control.”
702.70b The two abilities represented by champion are linked. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”

702.70c A permanent is “championed” by another permanent if the latter exiles the former as the
direct result of a champion ability.
702.71. Changeling
702.71a Changeling is a characteristic-defining ability. “Changeling” means “This object is every
creature type.” This ability works everywhere, even outside the game. See rule 604.3.
702.71b Multiple instances of changeling on the same object are redundant.
702.72. Evoke
702.72a Evoke represents two abilities: a static ability that functions in any zone from which the
card with evoke can be cast and a triggered ability that functions on the battlefield. “Evoke
[cost]” means “You may cast this card by paying [cost] rather than paying its mana cost” and
“When this permanent enters the battlefield, if its evoke cost was paid, its controller sacrifices
it.” Paying a card’s evoke cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and
601.2e–g.
702.73. Hideaway
702.73a Hideaway represents a static ability and a triggered ability. “Hideaway” means “This
permanent enters the battlefield tapped” and “When this permanent enters the battlefield, look at
the top four cards of your library. Exile one of them face down and put the rest on the bottom of
your library in any order. The exiled card gains ‘Any player who has controlled the permanent
that exiled this card may look at this card in the exile zone.’”
702.74. Prowl
702.74a Prowl is a static ability that functions on the stack. “Prowl [cost]” means “You may pay
[cost] rather than pay this spell’s mana cost if a player was dealt combat damage this turn by a
source that, at the time it dealt that damage, was under your control and had any of this spell’s
creature types.” Paying a spell’s prowl cost follows the rules for paying alternative costs in rules
601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.75. Reinforce
702.75a Reinforce is an activated ability that functions only while the card with reinforce is in a
player’s hand. “Reinforce N—[cost]” means “[Cost], Discard this card: Put N +1/+1 counters on
target creature.”
702.75b Although the reinforce ability can be activated only if the card is in a player’s hand, it
continues to exist while the object is on the battlefield and in all other zones. Therefore objects
with reinforce will be affected by effects that depend on objects having one or more activated
abilities.
702.76. Conspire
702.76a Conspire is a keyword that represents two abilities. The first is a static ability that functions
while the spell with conspire is on the stack. The second is a triggered ability that functions
while the spell with conspire is on the stack. “Conspire” means “As an additional cost to cast
this spell, you may tap two untapped creatures you control that each share a color with it” and
“When you cast this spell, if its conspire cost was paid, copy it. If the spell has any targets, you
may choose new targets for the copy.” Paying a spell’s conspire cost follows the rules for
paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.

702.76b If a spell has multiple instances of conspire, each is paid separately and triggers based on
its own payment, not any other instance of conspire.
702.77. Persist
702.77a Persist is a triggered ability. “Persist” means “When this permanent is put into a graveyard
from the battlefield, if it had no -1/-1 counters on it, return it to the battlefield under its owner’s
control with a -1/-1 counter on it.”
702.78. Wither
702.78a Wither is a static ability. Damage dealt to a creature by a source with wither isn’t marked
on that creature. Rather, it causes that many -1/-1 counters to be put on that creature. See rule
119.3.
702.78b If a permanent leaves the battlefield before an effect causes it to deal damage, its last
known information is used to determine whether it had wither.
702.78c The wither rules function no matter what zone an object with wither deals damage from.
702.78d Multiple instances of wither on the same object are redundant.
702.79. Retrace
702.79a Retrace appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents a static ability that functions
while the card with retrace is in a player’s graveyard. “Retrace” means “You may cast this card
from your graveyard by discarding a land card as an additional cost to cast it.” Casting a spell
using its retrace ability follows the rules for paying additional costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–
g.
702.80. Devour
702.80a Devour is a static ability. “Devour N” means “As this object enters the battlefield, you may
sacrifice any number of creatures. This permanent enters the battlefield with N +1/+1 counters
on it for each creature sacrificed this way.”
702.80b Some objects have abilities that refer to the number of creatures the permanent devoured.
“It devoured” means “sacrificed as a result of its devour ability as it entered the battlefield.”
702.81. Exalted
702.81a Exalted is a triggered ability. “Exalted” means “Whenever a creature you control attacks
alone, that creature gets +1/+1 until end of turn.”
702.81b A creature “attacks alone” if it’s the only creature declared as an attacker in a given combat
phase. See rule 506.5.
702.82. Unearth
702.82a Unearth is an activated ability that functions while the card with unearth is in a graveyard.
“Unearth [cost]” means “[Cost]: Return this card from your graveyard to the battlefield. It gains
haste. Exile it at the beginning of the next end step. If it would leave the battlefield, exile it
instead of putting it anywhere else. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
702.83. Cascade

702.83a Cascade is a triggered ability that functions only while the spell with cascade is on the
stack. “Cascade” means “When you cast this spell, exile cards from the top of your library until
you exile a nonland card whose converted mana cost is less than this spell’s converted mana
cost. You may cast that card without paying its mana cost. Then put all cards exiled this way
that weren’t cast on the bottom of your library in a random order.”
702.83b If a spell has multiple instances of cascade, each triggers separately.
702.84. Annihilator
702.84a Annihilator is a triggered ability. “Annihilator N” means “Whenever this creature attacks,
defending player sacrifices N permanents.”
702.84b If a creature has multiple instances of annihilator, each triggers separately.
702.85. Level Up
702.85a Level up is an activated ability. “Level up [cost]” means “[Cost]: Put a level counter on this
permanent. Activate this ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
702.85b Each card printed with a level up ability is known as a leveler card. It has a nonstandard
layout and includes two level symbols that are themselves keyword abilities. See rule 710,
“Leveler Cards.”
702.86. Rebound
702.86a Rebound appears on some instants and sorceries. It represents a static ability that functions
while the spell is on the stack and may create a delayed triggered ability. “Rebound” means “If
this spell was cast from your hand, instead of putting it into your graveyard as it resolves, exile
it and, at the beginning of your next upkeep, you may cast this card from exile without paying
its mana cost.”
702.86b Casting a card without paying its mana cost as the result of a rebound ability follows the
rules for paying alternative costs in rules 601.2b and 601.2e–g.
702.86c Multiple instances of rebound on the same spell are redundant.
702.87. Totem Armor
702.87a Totem armor is a static ability that appears on some Auras. “Totem armor” means “If
enchanted permanent would be destroyed, instead remove all damage marked on it and destroy
this Aura.”
702.88. Infect
702.88a Infect is a static ability.
702.88b Damage dealt to a player by a source with infect doesn’t cause that player to lose life.
Rather, it causes the player to get that many poison counters. See rule 119.3.
702.88c Damage dealt to a creature by a source with infect isn’t marked on that creature. Rather, it
causes that many -1/-1 counters to be put on that creature. See rule 119.3.
702.88d If a permanent leaves the battlefield before an effect causes it to deal damage, its last
known information is used to determine whether it had infect.

 702.88e The infect rules function no matter what zone an object with infect deals damage from.
702.88f Multiple instances of infect on the same object are redundant.
702.89. Battle Cry
702.89a Battle cry is a triggered ability. “Battle cry” means “Whenever this creature attacks, each
other attacking creature gets +1/+0 until end of turn.”
702.89b If a creature has multiple instances of battle cry, each triggers separately.
702.90. Living Weapon
702.90a Living weapon is a triggered ability. “Living weapon” means “When this Equipment enters
the battlefield, put a 0/0 black Germ creature token onto the battlefield, then attach this
Equipment to it.”
703. Turn-Based Actions
703.1. Turn-based actions are game actions that happen automatically when certain steps or phases
begin, or when each step and phase ends. Turn-based actions don’t use the stack.
703.1a Abilities that watch for a specified step or phase to begin are triggered abilities, not turn-
based actions. (See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
703.2. Turn-based actions are not controlled by any player.
703.3. Whenever a step or phase begins, if it’s a step or phase that has any turn-based action associated
with it, those turn-based actions are automatically dealt with first. This happens before state-based
actions are checked, before triggered abilities are put on the stack, and before players receive
priority.
703.4. The turn-based actions are as follows:
703.4a Immediately after the untap step begins, all phased-in permanents with phasing that the
active player controls phase out, and all phased-out permanents that the active player controlled
when they phased out phase in. This all happens simultaneously. See rule 502.1.
703.4b Immediately after the phasing action has been completed during the untap step, the active
player determines which permanents he or she controls will untap. Then he or she untaps them
all simultaneously. See rule 502.2.
703.4c Immediately after the draw step begins, the active player draws a card. See rule 504.1.
703.4d In an Archenemy game (see rule 904), immediately after the archenemy’s precombat main
phase begins, that player sets the top card of his or her scheme deck in motion. See rule 701.21.
703.4e Immediately after the beginning of combat step begins, if the game being played is a
multiplayer game in which the active player’s opponent’s don’t all automatically become
defending players, the active player chooses one of his or her opponents. That player becomes
the defending player. See rule 507.1.
703.4f Immediately after the declare attackers step begins, the active player declares attackers. See
rule 508.1.

703.4g Immediately after the declare blockers step begins, the defending player declares blockers.
See rule 509.1.
703.4h Immediately after blockers have been declared during the declare blockers step, for each
attacking creature that’s become blocked by multiple creatures, the active player announces the
damage assignment order among the blocking creatures. See rule 509.2.
703.4i Immediately after the active player has announced damage assignment orders (if necessary)
during the declare blockers step, for each creature that’s blocking multiple creatures, the
defending player announces the damage assignment order among the attacking creatures. See
rule 509.3.
703.4j Immediately after the combat damage step begins, each player in APNAP order announces
how each attacking or blocking creature he or she controls assigns its combat damage. See rule
510.1.
703.4k Immediately after combat damage has been assigned during the combat damage step, all
combat damage is dealt simultaneously. See rule 510.2.
703.4m Immediately after the cleanup step begins, if the active player’s hand contains more cards
than his or her maximum hand size (normally seven), he or she discards enough cards to reduce
his or her hand size to that number. See rule 514.1.
703.4n Immediately after the active player has discarded cards (if necessary) during the cleanup
step, all damage is removed from permanents and all “until end of turn” and “this turn” effects
end. These actions happen simultaneously. See rule 514.2.
703.4p When each step or phase ends, any unused mana left in a player’s mana pool empties. See
rule 500.4.
704. State-Based Actions
704.1. State-based actions are game actions that happen automatically whenever certain conditions
(listed below) are met. State-based actions don’t use the stack.
704.1a Abilities that watch for a specified game state are triggered abilities, not state-based actions.
(See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”)
704.2. State-based actions are checked throughout the game and are not controlled by any player.
704.3. Whenever a player would get priority (see rule 116, “Timing and Priority”), the game checks for
any of the listed conditions for state-based actions, then performs all applicable state-based actions
simultaneously as a single event. If any state-based actions are performed as a result of a check, the
check is repeated; otherwise all triggered abilities that are waiting to be put on the stack are put on
the stack, then the check is repeated. Once no more state-based actions have been performed as the
result of a check and no triggered abilities are waiting to be put on the stack, the appropriate player
gets priority. This process also occurs during the cleanup step (see rule 514), except that if no state-
based actions are performed as the result of the step’s first check and no triggered abilities are
waiting to be put on the stack, then no player gets priority and the step ends.
704.4. Unlike triggered abilities, state-based actions pay no attention to what happens during the
resolution of a spell or ability.
Example: A player controls a creature with the ability “This creature’s power and
toughness are each equal to the number of cards in your hand” and casts a spell whose
effect is “Discard your hand, then draw seven cards.” The creature will temporarily have
toughness 0 in the middle of the spell’s resolution but will be back up to toughness 7 when

the spell finishes resolving. Thus the creature will survive when state-based actions are
checked. In contrast, an ability that triggers when the player has no cards in hand goes on
the stack after the spell resolves, because its trigger event happened during resolution.
704.5. The state-based actions are as follows:
704.5a If a player has 0 or less life, he or she loses the game.
704.5b If a player attempted to draw a card from a library with no cards in it since the last time
state-based actions were checked, he or she loses the game.
704.5c If a player has ten or more poison counters, he or she loses the game. Ignore this rule in
Two-Headed Giant games; see rule 704.5u instead.
704.5d If a token is phased out, or is in a zone other than the battlefield, it ceases to exist.
704.5e If a copy of a spell is in a zone other than the stack, it ceases to exist. If a copy of a card is in
any zone other than the stack or the battlefield, it ceases to exist.
704.5f If a creature has toughness 0 or less, it’s put into its owner’s graveyard. Regeneration can’t
replace this event.
704.5g If a creature has toughness greater than 0, and the total damage marked on it is greater than
or equal to its toughness, that creature has been dealt lethal damage and is destroyed.
Regeneration can replace this event.
704.5h If a creature has toughness greater than 0, and it’s been dealt damage by a source with
deathtouch since the last time state-based actions were checked, that creature is destroyed.
Regeneration can replace this event.
704.5i If a planeswalker has loyalty 0, it’s put into its owner’s graveyard.
704.5j If two or more planeswalkers that share a planeswalker type are on the battlefield, all are put
into their owners’ graveyards. This is called the “planeswalker uniqueness rule.”
704.5k If two or more legendary permanents with the same name are on the battlefield, all are put
into their owners’ graveyards. This is called the “legend rule.” If only one of those permanents
is legendary, this rule doesn’t apply.
704.5m If two or more permanents have the supertype world, all except the one that has been a
permanent with the world supertype on the battlefield for the shortest amount of time are put
into their owners’ graveyards. In the event of a tie for the shortest amount of time, all are put
into their owners’ graveyards. This is called the “world rule.”
704.5n If an Aura is attached to an illegal object or player, or is not attached to an object or player,
that Aura is put into its owner’s graveyard.
704.5p If an Equipment or Fortification is attached to an illegal permanent, it becomes unattached
from that permanent. It remains on the battlefield.
704.5q If a creature is attached to an object or player, it becomes unattached and remains on the
battlefield. Similarly, if a permanent that’s neither an Aura, an Equipment, nor a Fortification is
attached to an object or player, it becomes unattached and remains on the battlefield.

704.5r If a permanent has both a +1/+1 counter and a -1/-1 counter on it, N +1/+1 and N -1/-1
counters are removed from it, where N is the smaller of the number of +1/+1 and -1/-1 counters
on it.
704.5s If a permanent with an ability that says it can’t have more than N counters of a certain kind
on it has more than N counters of that kind on it, all but N of those counters are removed from
it.
704.5t In a Two-Headed Giant game, if a team has 0 or less life, that team loses the game. See rule
810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
704.5u In a Two-Headed Giant game, if a team has fifteen or more poison counters, that team loses
the game. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
704.5v In a Commander game, a player that’s been dealt 21 or more combat damage by the same
commander over the course of the game loses the game. See rule 903, “Commander.”
704.5w In an Archenemy game, if a non-ongoing scheme card is face up in the command zone, and
it isn’t the source of a triggered ability that has triggered but not yet left the stack, that scheme
card is turned face down and put on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck. See rule 904,
“Archenemy.”
704.6. If multiple state-based actions would have the same result at the same time, a single replacement
effect will replace all of them.
Example: You control Lich’s Mirror, which says “If you would lose the game, instead
shuffle your hand, your graveyard, and all permanents you own into your library, then draw
seven cards and your life total becomes 20.” There’s one card in your library and your life
total is 1. A spell causes you to draw two cards and lose 2 life. The next time state-based
actions are checked, you’d lose the game due to rule 704.5a and rule 704.5b. Instead, Lich’s
Mirror replaces that game loss and you keep playing.
705. Flipping a Coin
705.1. To flip a coin for an object that cares whether a player wins or loses the flip, the affected player
flips the coin and calls “heads” or “tails.” If the call matches the result, that player wins the flip.
Otherwise, the player loses the flip. Only the player who flips the coin wins or loses the flip; no
other players are involved.
705.2. To flip a coin for an object that cares whether the coin comes up heads or tails, each affected
player flips a coin without making a call. No player wins or loses this kind of flip.
705.3. A coin used in a flip must be a two-sided object with easily distinguished sides and equal
likelihood that either side lands face up. If the coin that’s being flipped doesn’t have an obvious
“heads” or “tails,” designate one side to be “heads,” and the other side to be “tails.” Other methods
of randomization may be substituted for flipping a coin as long as there are two possible outcomes
of equal likelihood and all players agree to the substitution. For example, the player may roll an
even-sided die and call “odds” or “evens,” or roll an even-sided die and designate that “odds”
means “heads” and “evens” means “tails.”
706. Copying Objects
706.1. Some objects become or turn another object into a “copy” of a spell, permanent, or card. Some
effects put a token onto the battlefield that’s a copy of another object. (Certain older cards were
printed with the phrase “search for a copy.” This section doesn’t cover those cards, which have
received new text in the Oracle card reference.)

706.2. When copying an object, the copy acquires the copiable values of the original object’s
characteristics and, for an object on the stack, choices made when casting or activating it (mode,
targets, the value of X, whether it was kicked, how it will affect multiple targets, and so on). The
“copiable values” are the values derived from the text printed on the object (that text being name,
mana cost, card type, subtype, supertype, expansion symbol, rules text, power, toughness, and/or
loyalty), as modified by other copy effects, by “as . . . enters the battlefield” and “as . . . is turned
face up” abilities that set characteristics, and by abilities that caused the object to be face down.
Other effects (including type-changing and text-changing effects), status, and counters are not
copied.
Example: Chimeric Staff is an artifact that reads “{X}: Chimeric Staff becomes an X/X
artifact creature until end of turn.” Clone is a creature that reads, “You may have Clone
enter the battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield.” After a Staff has become a
5/5 artifact creature, a Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of it. The Clone is an artifact,
not a 5/5 artifact creature. (The copy has the Staff’s ability, however, and will become a
creature if that ability is activated.)
Example: Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of a face-down Grinning Demon (a creature
with morph {2}{B}{B}). The Clone is a colorless 2/2 creature with no name, no types, no
abilities, and no mana cost. It will still be face up. Its controller can’t pay {2}{B}{B} to turn
it face up.
706.2a A copy acquires the color of the object it’s copying because that value is derived from its
mana cost. A copy acquires the abilities of the object it’s copying because those values are
derived from its rules text. A copy doesn’t wind up with two values of each ability (that is, it
doesn’t copy the object’s abilities and its rules text, then have that rules text define a new set of
abilities).
706.3. The copy’s copiable values become the copied information, as modified by the copy’s status (see
rule 110.6). Objects that copy the object will use the new copiable values.
Example: Vesuvan Doppelganger reads, “You may have Vesuvan Doppelganger enter the
battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield except it doesn’t copy that creature’s
color and it gains ‘At the beginning of your upkeep, you may have this creature become a
copy of target creature except it doesn’t copy that creature’s color. If you do, this creature
gains this ability.’” A Vesuvan Doppelganger enters the battlefield as a copy of Runeclaw
Bear (a 2/2 green Bear creature with no abilities). Then a Clone enters the battlefield as a
copy of the Doppelganger. The Clone is a 2/2 blue Bear named Runeclaw Bear that has the
Doppelganger’s upkeep-triggered ability.
Example: Tomoya the Revealer (a flipped flip card) becomes a copy of Nezumi Shortfang
(an unflipped flip card). Tomoya’s characteristics become the characteristics of Stabwhisker
the Odious, which is the flipped version of Nezumi Shortfang.
Example: A face-down Grinning Demon (a creature with morph) becomes a copy of a face-
up Branchsnap Lorian (a 4/1 green creature with trample and morph {G}). The Demon’s
characteristics become the characteristics of Branchsnap Lorian. However, since the
creature is face down, it remains a 2/2 colorless creature with no name, types, or abilities,
and no mana cost. It can be turned face up for {G}. If it’s turned face up, it will have the
characteristics of Branchsnap Lorian.
Example: A face-down Grinning Demon (a creature with morph) becomes a copy of
Wandering Ones (a 1/1 blue Spirit creature that doesn’t have morph). It will be a face-down
Wandering Ones. It remains a 2/2 colorless creature with no name, types, or abilities, and
no mana cost. Its controller can’t turn it face up as a special action. If an effect turns it face
up, it will have the characteristics of Wandering Ones.
706.4. Some effects cause a permanent that’s copying a permanent to copy a different object while
remaining on the battlefield. The change doesn’t trigger enters-the-battlefield or leaves-the-
battlefield abilities. This also doesn’t change any noncopy effects presently affecting the permanent.
Example: Unstable Shapeshifter reads, “Whenever a creature enters the battlefield,
Unstable Shapeshifter becomes a copy of that creature and gains this ability.” It’s affected

by Giant Growth, which reads “Target creature gets +3/+3 until end of turn.” If a creature
enters the battlefield later this turn, Unstable Shapeshifter will become a copy of that
creature, but it will still get +3/+3 from the Giant Growth.
706.5. An object that enters the battlefield “as a copy” or “that’s a copy” of another object becomes a
copy as it enters the battlefield. It doesn’t enter the battlefield, and then become a copy of that
permanent. If the text that’s being copied includes any abilities that replace the enters-the-battlefield
event (such as “enters the battlefield with” or “as [this] enters the battlefield” abilities), those
abilities will take effect. Also, any enters-the-battlefield triggered abilities of the copy will have a
chance to trigger.
Example: Skyshroud Behemoth reads, “Fading 2 (This creature enters the battlefield with
two fade counters on it. At the beginning of your upkeep, remove a fade counter from it. If
you can’t, sacrifice it.)” and “Skyshroud Behemoth enters the battlefield tapped.” A Clone
that enters the battlefield as a copy of a Skyshroud Behemoth will also enter the battlefield
tapped with two fade counters on it.
Example: Striped Bears reads, “When Striped Bears enters the battlefield, draw a card.” A
Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of Striped Bears. The Clone has the Bears’ enters-the-
battlefield triggered ability, so the Clone’s controller draws a card.
706.6. When copying a permanent, any choices that have been made for that permanent aren’t copied.
Instead, if an object enters the battlefield as a copy of another permanent, the object’s controller will
get to make any “as [this] enters the battlefield” choices for it.
Example: A Clone enters the battlefield as a copy of Chameleon Spirit. Chameleon Spirit
reads, in part, “As Chameleon Spirit enters the battlefield, choose a color.” The Clone
won’t copy the color choice of the Spirit; rather, the controller of the Clone will get to make
a new choice.
706.7. If a pair of linked abilities are copied, those abilities will be similarly linked to one another on
the object that copied them. One ability refers only to actions that were taken or objects that were
affected by the other. They can’t be linked to any other ability, regardless of what other abilities the
copy may currently have or may have had in the past. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”
706.7a If an ability causes a player to “choose a [value]” or “name a card,” and a second, linked
ability refers to that choice, the second ability is the only ability that can refer to that choice. An
object doesn’t “remember” that choice and use it for other abilities it may copy later. If an
object copies an ability that refers to a choice, but either (a) doesn’t copy that ability’s linked
ability or (b) does copy the linked ability but no choice is made for it, then the choice is
considered to be “undefined.” If an ability refers to an undefined choice, that part of the ability
won’t do anything.
Example: Voice of All enters the battlefield and Unstable Shapeshifter copies it. Voice
of All reads, in part, “As Voice of All enters the battlefield, choose a color.” and “Voice
of All has protection from the chosen color.” Unstable Shapeshifter never had a chance
for a color to be chosen for it, because it didn’t enter the battlefield as a Voice of All
card, so the protection ability doesn’t protect it from anything at all.
Example: A Vesuvan Doppelganger enters the battlefield as a copy of Chameleon Spirit,
and the Doppelganger’s controller chooses blue. Later, the Doppelganger copies
Quirion Elves. The Elves has the ability, “{T}: Add one mana of the chosen color to your
mana pool.” Even though a color was chosen for the Doppelganger, it wasn’t chosen for
the ability linked to the mana ability copied from the Elves. If that mana ability of the
Doppelganger is activated, it will not produce mana.
706.8. Copy effects may include modifications or exceptions to the copying process.
706.8a Some copy effects cause the copy to gain an ability as part of the copying process. This
ability becomes part of the copiable values for the copy, along with any other abilities that were
copied.

Example: Quirion Elves enters the battlefield and an Unstable Shapeshifter copies it.
The copiable values of the Shapeshifter now match those of the Elves, except that the
Shapeshifter also has the ability “Whenever a creature enters the battlefield, Unstable
Shapeshifter becomes a copy of that creature and gains this ability.” Then a Clone
enters the battlefield as a copy of the Unstable Shapeshifter. The Clone copies the new
copiable values of the Shapeshifter, including the ability that the Shapeshifter gave itself
when it copied the Elves.
706.8b Some copy effects specifically state that they don’t copy certain characteristics and instead
retain their original values. These effects use the phrase “except its [characteristic] is still
[value]” or “except it’s still [value(s)].” They may also simply state that certain characteristics
are not copied.
706.8c Some copy effects modify a characteristic as part of the copying process. The final value(s)
for that characteristic becomes part of the copiable values for the copy.
Example: Copy Artifact is an enchantment that reads, “You may have Copy Artifact
enter the battlefield as a copy of any artifact on the battlefield, except it’s an
enchantment in addition to its other types.” It enters the battlefield as a copy of
Juggernaut. The copiable values of the Copy Artifact now match those of Juggernaut
with one modification: its types are now artifact, creature, and enchantment.
706.8d When applying a copy effect that doesn’t copy a certain characteristic, retains an original
value for a certain characteristic, or modifies the final value of a certain characteristic, any
characteristic-defining ability (see rule 604.3) of the object being copied that defines that
characteristic is not copied.
Example: Quicksilver Gargantuan is a creature that reads, “You may have Quicksilver
Gargantuan enter the battlefield as a copy of any creature on the battlefield, except it’s
still 7/7.” Quicksilver Gargantuan enters the battlefield as a copy of Tarmogoyf, which
has a characteristic-defining ability that defines its power and toughness. Quicksilver
Gargantuan does not have that ability. It will be 7/7.
706.9. To copy a spell or activated ability means to put a copy of it onto the stack; a copy of a spell isn’t
cast and a copy of an activated ability isn’t activated. A copy of a spell or ability copies both the
characteristics of the spell or ability and all decisions made for it, including modes, targets, the
value of X, and additional or alternative costs. (See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”) Choices that are
normally made on resolution are not copied. If an effect of the copy refers to objects used to pay its
costs, it uses the objects used to pay the costs of the original spell or ability. A copy of a spell is
owned by the player under whose control it was put on the stack. A copy of a spell or ability is
controlled by the player under whose control it was put on the stack. A copy of a spell is itself a
spell, even though it has no spell card associated with it. A copy of an ability is itself an ability.
Example: A player casts Fork, targeting an Emerald Charm. Fork reads, “Copy target
instant or sorcery spell, except that the copy is red. You may choose new targets for the
copy.” Emerald Charm is a green instant that reads, “Choose one — Untap target
permanent; or destroy target non-Aura enchantment; or target creature loses flying until
end of turn.” When the Fork resolves, it puts a copy of the Emerald Charm on the stack
except the copy is red, not green. The copy has the same mode that was chosen for the
original Emerald Charm. It does not necessarily have the same target, but only because
Fork allows choosing of new targets.
Example: Fling is an instant that reads, “As an additional cost to cast Fling, sacrifice a
creature” and “Fling deals damage equal to the sacrificed creature’s power to target
creature or player.” When determining how much damage a copy of Fling deals, it checks
the power of the creature sacrificed to pay for the original Fling.
706.9a If a copy of a spell is in a zone other than the stack, it ceases to exist. If a copy of a card is in
any zone other than the stack or the battlefield, it ceases to exist. These are state-based actions.
See rule 704.

706.9b A copy of an ability has the same source as the original ability. If the ability refers to its
source by name, the copy refers to that same object and not to any other object with the same
name. The copy is considered to be the same ability by effects that count how many times that
ability has resolved during the turn.
706.9c Some effects copy a spell or ability and state that its controller may choose new targets for
the copy. The player may leave any number of the targets unchanged, even if those targets
would be illegal. If the player chooses to change some or all of the targets, the new targets must
be legal. Once the player has decided what the copy’s targets will be, the copy is put onto the
stack with those targets.
706.10. If an effect refers to a permanent by name, the effect still tracks that permanent even if it
changes names or becomes a copy of something else.
Example: An Unstable Shapeshifter copies a Crazed Armodon. Crazed Armodon reads,
“{G}: Crazed Armodon gets +3/+0 and gains trample until end of turn. Destroy Crazed
Armodon at the beginning of the next end step. Activate this ability only once each turn.” If
this ability of the Shapeshifter is activated, the Shapeshifter will be destroyed at the
beginning of the next end step, even if it’s no longer a copy of Crazed Armodon at that time.
706.11. An effect that instructs a player to “cast a copy” of an object follows the rules for casting spells,
except that the copy is cast while another spell or ability is resolving. Casting a copy of an object
follows steps 601.2a–g of rule 601, “Casting Spells,” and then the copy becomes cast. The cast copy
is a spell on the stack, and just like any other spell it can resolve or be countered.
707. Face-Down Spells and Permanents
707.1. Two cards (Illusionary Mask and Ixidron) and the morph ability (see rule 702.35) allow spells
and permanents to be face down.
707.2. Face-down spells and face-down permanents have no characteristics other than those listed by
the ability or rules that allowed the spell or permanent to be face down. Any listed characteristics
are the copiable values of that object’s characteristics. (See rule 613, “Interaction of Continuous
Effects,” and rule 706, “Copying Objects.”)
707.2a If a face-up permanent is turned face down by a spell or ability, it becomes a 2/2 face-down
creature with no text, no name, no subtypes, no expansion symbol, and no mana cost. These
values are the copiable values of that object’s characteristics.
707.3. Objects that are put onto the battlefield face down are turned face down before they enter the
battlefield, so the permanent’s enters-the-battlefield abilities won’t trigger (if triggered) or have any
effect (if static).
707.4. Objects that are cast face down are turned face down before they are put onto the stack, so
effects that care about the characteristics of a spell will see only the face-down spell’s
characteristics. Any effects or prohibitions that would apply to casting an object with these
characteristics (and not the face-up object’s characteristics) are applied to casting this object.
707.5. At any time, you may look at a face-down spell you control on the stack or a face-down
permanent you control (even if it’s phased out). You can’t look at face-down cards in any other
zone or face-down spells or permanents controlled by another player.
707.6. If you control multiple face-down spells or face-down permanents, you must ensure at all times
that your face-down spells and permanents can be easily differentiated from each other. This
includes, but is not limited to, knowing the order spells were cast, the order that face-down
permanents entered the battlefield, which creature attacked last turn, and any other differences

between face-down spells or permanents. Common methods for distinguishing between face-down
objects include using counters or dice to mark the different objects, or clearly placing those objects
in order on the table.
707.7. The ability or rules that allow a permanent to be face down may also allow the permanent’s
controller to turn it face up. Spells normally can’t be turned face up.
707.8. As a face-down permanent is turned face up, its copiable values revert to its normal copiable
values. Any effects that have been applied to the face-down permanent still apply to the face-up
permanent. Any abilities relating to the permanent entering the battlefield don’t trigger and don’t
have any effect, because the permanent has already entered the battlefield.
707.9. If a face-down permanent moves from the battlefield to any other zone, its owner must reveal it
to all players as he or she moves it. If a face-down spell moves from the stack to any zone other
than the battlefield, its owner must reveal it to all players as he or she moves it. At the end of each
game, all face-down permanents and spells must be revealed to all players.
707.10. If a face-down permanent becomes a copy of another permanent, its copiable values become
the copiable values of that permanent, as modified by its face-down status. Its characteristics
therefore remain the same: the characteristics listed by the ability or rules that allowed it to be
turned face down. However, if it is turned face up, its copiable values become the values it copied
from the other permanent. See rule 706.3.
707.11. If a face-down permanent would have an “As [this permanent] is turned face up . . .” ability
after it’s turned face up, that ability is applied while that permanent is being turned face up, not
afterward.
708. Split Cards
708.1. Split cards have two card faces on a single card. The back of a split card is the normal Magic
card back.
708.2. In every zone except the stack, split cards have two sets of characteristics and two converted
mana costs. As long as a split card is a spell on the stack, only the characteristics of the half being
cast exist. The other half’s characteristics are treated as though they didn’t exist.
708.2a If a player casts a split card, that player chooses which half of that split card he or she is
casting before putting it onto the stack. Only the half that is being cast is considered to be put
onto the stack.
708.3. Each split card that consists of two halves with different colored mana symbols in their mana
costs is a multicolored card while it’s not a spell on the stack. While it’s a spell on the stack, it’s
only the color or colors of the half being cast.
708.4. Although split cards have two castable halves, each split card is only one card. For example, a
player who has drawn or discarded a split card has drawn or discarded one card, not two.
708.5. An effect that asks for a particular characteristic of a split card while it’s in a zone other than the
stack gets two answers (one for each of the split card’s two halves).
Example: Infernal Genesis has an ability that reads, “At the beginning of each player’s
upkeep, that player puts the top card from his or her library into his or her graveyard. He or
she then puts X 1/1 black Minion creature tokens onto the battlefield, where X is that card’s
converted mana cost.” If the top card of your library is Assault/Battery when this ability
resolves, the game sees its converted mana cost as “1, and 4.” You get five creature tokens.

708.6. Some effects perform comparisons involving characteristics of one or more split cards in a zone
other than the stack.
708.6a An effect that performs a positive comparison (such as asking if a card is red) or a relative
comparison (such as asking if a card’s converted mana cost is less than 2) involving
characteristics of one or more split cards in any zone other than the stack gets only one answer.
This answer is “yes” if either side of each split card in the comparison would return a “yes”
answer if compared individually.
708.6b An effect that performs a negative comparison (such as asking if cards have different names)
involving characteristics of one or more split cards in any zone other than the stack also gets
only one answer. This answer is “yes” if performing the analogous positive comparison would
return a “no” answer.
708.6c If an effect performs a comparison involving multiple characteristics of one or more split
cards in any zone other than the stack, each characteristic is compared separately. If each of the
individual comparisons would return a “yes” answer, the whole comparison returns a “yes”
answer.
Example: Void reads, “Choose a number. Destroy all artifacts and creatures with
converted mana cost equal to that number. Then target player reveals his or her hand
and discards all nonland cards with converted mana cost equal to the number.” If a
player casts Void and chooses 1, his or her opponent would discard Assault/Battery
because the game sees its converted mana cost as “1, and 4.” The same is true if the
player chooses 4. If the player chooses 5, however, Assault/Battery would be unaffected.
708.7. If an effect instructs a player to name a card and the player wants to name a split card, the player
must name both halves of the split card. An object has the chosen name if it has at least one of the
two names chosen this way.
709. Flip Cards
709.1. Flip cards have a two-part card frame on a single card. The text that appears right side up on the
card defines the card’s normal characteristics. Additional alternative characteristics appear upside
down on the card. The back of a flip card is the normal Magic card back.
709.1a The top half of a flip card contains the card’s normal name, text box, type line, power, and
toughness. The text box usually contains an ability that causes the permanent to “flip” if certain
conditions are met.
709.1b The bottom half of a flip card contains an alternative name, text box, type line, power, and
toughness. These characteristics are used only if the permanent is on the battlefield and only if
the permanent is flipped.
709.1c A flip card’s color, mana cost, expansion symbol, illustration credit, and legal text don’t
change if the permanent is flipped. Also, any changes to it by external effects will still apply.
709.2. In every zone other than the battlefield, and also on the battlefield before the permanent flips, a
flip card has only the normal characteristics of the card. Once a permanent is flipped, its normal
name, text box, type line, power, and toughness don’t apply and the alternative versions of those
characteristics apply instead.
Example: Akki Lavarunner is a nonlegendary creature that flips into a legendary creature
named Tok-Tok, Volcano Born. An effect that says “search your library for a legendary
card” can’t find this flip card. An effect that says “legendary creatures get +2/+2” doesn’t
affect Akki Lavarunner, but it does affect Tok-Tok.

709.3. You must ensure that it’s clear at all times whether a permanent you control is flipped or not,
both when it’s untapped and when it’s tapped. Common methods for distinguishing between flipped
and unflipped permanents include using coins or dice to mark flipped objects.
709.4. Flipping a permanent is a one-way process. Once a permanent is flipped, it’s impossible for it to
become unflipped. However, if a flipped permanent leaves the battlefield, it retains no memory of
its status. See rule 110.6.
709.5. If an effect instructs a player to name a card and the player wants to name a flip card’s
alternative name, the player may do so.
710. Leveler Cards
710.1. Each leveler card has a striated text box and three power/toughness boxes. The text box of a
leveler card contains two level symbols.
710.2. A level symbol is a keyword ability that represents a static ability. The level symbol includes
either a range of numbers, indicated here as “N1-N2,” or a single number followed by a plus sign,
indicated here as “N3+.” Any abilities printed within the same text box striation as a level symbol
are part of its static ability. The same is true of the power/toughness box printed within that
striation, indicated here as “[P/T].”
710.2a “{LEVEL N1-N2} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this creature has at least N1 level
counters on it, but no more than N2 level counters on it, it’s [P/T] and has [abilities].”
710.2b “{LEVEL N3+} [Abilities] [P/T]” means “As long as this creature has N3 or more level
counters on it, it’s [P/T] and has [abilities].”
710.3. The text box striations have no game significance other than clearly demarcating which abilities
and which power/toughness box are associated with which level symbol. Leveler cards each contain
only one text box.
710.4. Any ability a leveler card has that isn’t preceded by a level symbol is treated normally. In
particular, each leveler permanent has its level up ability (see rule 702.85) at all times; it may be
activated regardless of how many level counters are on that permanent.
710.5. If the number of level counters on a leveler creature is less than N1 (the first number printed in
its {LEVEL N1-N2} symbol), it has the power and toughness denoted by its uppermost
power/toughness box.
710.6. In every zone other than the battlefield, a leveler card has the power and toughness denoted by
its uppermost power/toughness box.
711. Controlling Another Player
711.1. Two cards (Mindslaver and Sorin Markov) allow a player to control another player during that
player’s next turn. This effect applies to the next turn that the affected player actually takes. The
affected player is controlled during the entire turn; the effect doesn’t end until the beginning of the
next turn.
711.1a Multiple player-controlling effects that affect the same player overwrite each other. The last
one to be created is the one that works.
711.1b If a turn is skipped, any pending player-controlling effects wait until the player who would
be affected actually takes a turn.

 711.2. One card (Word of Command) allows a player to control another player for a limited duration.
711.3. Only control of the player changes. All objects are controlled by their normal controllers. A
player who’s being controlled during his or her turn is still the active player.
711.4. If information about an object would be visible to the player being controlled, it’s visible to both
that player and the controller of the player.
Example: The controller of a player can see that player’s hand and the identity of any face-
down creatures he or she controls.
711.5. While controlling another player, a player makes all choices and decisions the controlled player
is allowed to make or is told to make by the rules or by any objects. This includes choices and
decisions about what to play, and choices and decisions called for by spells and abilities.
Example: The controller of another player decides which spells that player casts and what
those spells target, and makes any required decisions when those spells resolve.
Example: The controller of another player during his or her turn decides which of that
player’s creatures attack, which player or planeswalker each one attacks, what the damage
assignment order of the creatures that block them is (if any of the attacking creatures are
blocked by multiple creatures), and how those attacking creatures assign their combat
damage.
711.5a The controller of another player can use only that player’s resources (cards, mana, and so
on) to pay costs for that player.
Example: If the controller of a player decides that the controlled player will cast a spell
with an additional cost of discarding cards, the cards are discarded from the controlled
player’s hand.
711.5b The controller of another player can’t make choices or decisions for that player that aren’t
called for by the rules or by any objects. The controller also can’t make any choices or decisions
for the player that would be called for by the tournament rules.
Example: The player who’s being controlled still chooses whether he or she leaves to
visit the restroom, trades a card to someone else, takes an intentional draw, or calls a
judge about an error or infraction.
711.6. The controller of another player can’t make that player concede. A player may concede the game
at any time, even if he or she is controlled by another player. See rule 104.3a.
711.7. The effect that gives control of a player to another player may restrict the actions the controlled
player is allowed to take or specify actions that the controlled player must take.
711.8. A player who controls another player also continues to make his or her own choices and
decisions.
711.9. A player may gain control of himself or herself. That player will make his or her own decisions
and choices as normal.
712. Ending the Turn
712.1. One card (Time Stop) ends the turn. When an effect ends the turn, follow these steps in order, as
they differ from the normal process for resolving spells and abilities (see rule 608, “Resolving
Spells and Abilities”).
712.1a Exile every object on the stack, including the object that’s resolving. Remove all creatures
and planeswalkers (including those that are phased out) from combat. All objects not on the
battlefield or in the command zone that aren’t represented by cards will cease to exist the next
time state-based actions are checked (see rule 704, “State-Based Actions”).

712.1b Check state-based actions. No player gets priority, and no triggered abilities are put onto the
stack.
712.1c The current phase and/or step ends. The game skips straight to the cleanup step. Skip any
phases or steps between this phase or step and the cleanup step.
712.2. No player gets priority during this process, so triggered abilities are not put onto the stack. If any
triggered abilities have triggered between the spell or ability resolving and the cleanup step ending,
those abilities are put onto the stack during the cleanup step, then the active player gets priority and
players can cast spells and activate abilities. Then there will be another cleanup step before the turn
finally ends. If no triggered abilities have triggered during this process, no player gets priority
during the cleanup step. See rule 514, “Cleanup Step.”
712.3. Even though the turn ends, “at the beginning of the end step” triggered abilities don’t trigger
because the end step is skipped.
713. Restarting the Game
713.1. One card (Karn Liberated) restarts the game. A game that is restarted immediately ends. No
players in that game win, lose, or draw that game. All players in that game when it ended then start
a new game following the procedures set forth in rule 103, “Starting the Game,” with the following
exception:
713.1a The starting player in the new game is the player who controlled the spell or ability that
restarted the game.
713.2. All Magic cards involved in the game that was restarted when it ended, including phased-out
permanents and nontraditional Magic cards, are involved in the new game, even if those cards were
not originally involved in the restarted game. Ownership of cards in the new game doesn’t change,
regardless of their location when the new game begins.
Example: A player casts Living Wish, bringing a creature card into the game from outside
the game. Then that game is restarted. The creature card will be part of that player’s library
when the new game begins.
713.3. Because each player draws seven cards when the new game begins, any player with fewer than
seven cards in his or her library will lose the game when state-based actions are checked during the
upkeep step of the first turn, regardless of any mulligans that player takes. (See rule 704, “State-
Based Actions.”)
713.4. The effect that restarts the game finishes resolving just before the first turn’s untap step. If the
spell or ability that generated that effect has additional instructions, those instructions are followed
at this time. No player has priority, and any triggered abilities that trigger as a result will go on the
stack the next time a player receives priority, usually during the first turn’s upkeep step.
713.5. Effects may exempt certain cards from the procedure that restarts the game. These cards are not
in their owner’s deck as the new game begins.
713.5a In a Commander game, a commander that has been exempted from the procedure that
restarts the game won’t begin the new game in the command zone. However, it remains that
deck’s commander for the new game. See rule 903, “Commander.”
713.6. If a Magic subgame (see rule 714) is restarted, the main game is unaffected. Main-game effects
that refer to the winner or loser of the subgame now refer to the winner or loser of the restarted
subgame.

713.7. If a multiplayer game using the limited range of influence option (see rule 801) is restarted, all
players in the game are involved, regardless of the range of influence of the player who controls the
ability that restarted the game.
714. Subgames
714.1. One card (Shahrazad) allows players to play a Magic subgame.
714.1a A “subgame” is a completely separate Magic game created by an effect. Essentially, it’s a
game within a game. The “main game” is the game in which the spell or ability that created the
subgame was cast or activated. The main game is temporarily discontinued while the subgame is
in progress. It resumes when the subgame ends.
714.1b No effects or definitions created in either the main game or the subgame have any meaning
in the other, except as defined by the effect that created the subgame. For example, the effect
may say that something happens in the main game to the winner or loser of the subgame.
714.2. As the subgame starts, an entirely new set of game zones is created. Each player takes all the
cards in his or her main-game library, moves them to his or her subgame library, and shuffles them.
No other cards in a main-game zone are moved to their corresponding subgame zone, except as
specified in rules 714.2a–d. Randomly determine which player goes first. The subgame proceeds
like a normal game, following all other rules in rule 103, “Starting the Game.”
714.2a As a subgame of a Planar Magic game starts, each player moves his or her planar deck from
the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone and shuffles it. (Face-up plane
cards remain in the main-game command zone.)
714.2b As a subgame of a Vanguard game starts, each player moves his or her vanguard card from
the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone.
714.2c As a subgame of a Commander game starts, each player moves his or her commander from
the main-game command zone (if it’s there) to the subgame command zone.
714.2d As a subgame of an Archenemy game starts, the archenemy moves his or her scheme deck
from the main-game command zone to the subgame command zone and shuffles it. (Face-up
scheme cards remain in the main-game command zone.)
714.3. Because each player draws seven cards when a game begins, any player with fewer than seven
cards in his or her deck will lose the subgame when state-based actions are checked during the
upkeep step of the first turn, regardless of any mulligans that player takes. (See rule 704, “State-
Based Actions.”)
714.4. All objects in the main game and all cards outside the main game are considered outside the
subgame (except those specifically brought into the subgame). All players not currently in the
subgame are considered outside the subgame.
714.4a Some effects can bring cards into a game from outside of it. If a card is brought into a
subgame from a main game, abilities in the main game that trigger on objects leaving a main-
game zone will trigger, but they won’t be put onto the stack until the main game resumes.
714.5. At the end of a subgame, each player takes all cards he or she owns that are in the subgame other
than those in the subgame command zone, puts them into his or her main-game library, then
shuffles them. This includes cards in the subgame’s exile zone. Except as specified in rules 714.5a–
c, all other objects in the subgame cease to exist, as do the zones created for the subgame. The main
game continues from the point at which it was discontinued: First, the spell or ability that created
the subgame finishes resolving, even if it was created by a spell card that’s no longer on the stack.

Then, if any main-game abilities triggered while the subgame was in progress due to cards being
removed from the main game, those abilities are put onto the stack.
Example: If a card was brought into the subgame either from the main game or from
outside the main game, that card will be put into its owner’s main-game library when the
subgame ends.
714.5a At the end of a subgame of a Planar Magic game, the face-up plane card is turned face down
and put on the bottom of its owner’s planar deck. Then each player moves his or her planar deck
from the subgame command zone to the main-game command zone and shuffles it.
714.5b At the end of a subgame of a Vanguard game, each player moves his or her vanguard card
from the subgame command zone to the main-game command zone.
714.5c At the end of a subgame of a Commander game, each player moves his or her commander
from the subgame command zone (if it’s there) to the main-game command zone.
714.6. A subgame can be created within a subgame. The existing subgame becomes the main game in
relation to the new subgame.
715. Taking Shortcuts
715.1. When playing a game, players typically make use of mutually understood shortcuts rather than
explicitly identifying each game choice (either taking an action or passing priority) a player makes.
715.1a The rules for taking shortcuts are largely unformalized. As long as each player in the game
understands the intent of each other player, any shortcut system they use is acceptable.
715.1b Occasionally the game gets into a state in which a set of actions could be repeated
indefinitely (thus creating a “loop”). In that case, the shortcut rules can be used to determine
how many times those actions are repeated without having to actually perform them, and how
the loop is broken.
715.2. Taking a shortcut follows the following procedure.
715.2a At any point in the game, the player with priority may suggest a shortcut by describing a
sequence of game choices, for all players, that may be legally taken based on the current game
state and the predictable results of the sequence of choices. This sequence may be a non-
repetitive series of choices, a loop that repeats a specified number of times, multiple loops, or
nested loops, and may even cross multiple turns. It can’t include conditional actions, where the
outcome of a game event determines the next action a player takes. The ending point of this
sequence must be a place where a player has priority, though it need not be the player proposing
the shortcut.
Example: A player controls a creature enchanted by Presence of Gond, which grants
the creature the ability “{T}: Put a 1/1 green Elf Warrior creature token onto the
battlefield,” and another player controls Intruder Alarm, which reads, in part,
“Whenever a creature enters the battlefield, untap all creatures.” When the player has
priority, he may suggest “I’ll create a million tokens,” indicating the sequence of
activating the creature’s ability, all players passing priority, letting the creature’s ability
resolve and put a token onto the battlefield (which causes Intruder Alarm’s ability to
trigger), Intruder Alarm’s controller putting that triggered ability on the stack, all
players passing priority, Intruder Alarm’s triggered ability resolving, all players passing
priority until the player proposing the shortcut has priority, and repeating that sequence
999,999 more times, ending just after the last token-creating ability resolves.
715.2b Each other player, in turn order starting after the player who suggested the shortcut, may
either accept the proposed sequence, or shorten it by naming a place where he or she will make

a game choice that’s different than what’s been proposed. (The player doesn’t need to specify at
this time what the new choice will be.) This place becomes the new ending point of the
proposed sequence.
Example: The active player draws a card during her draw step, then says, “Go.” The
nonactive player is holding Into the Fray (an instant that says “Target creature attacks
this turn if able”) and says, “I’d like to cast a spell during your beginning of combat
step.” The current proposed shortcut is that all players pass priority at all opportunities
during the turn until the nonactive player has priority during the beginning of combat
step.
715.2c Once the last player has either accepted or shortened the shortcut proposal, the shortcut is
taken. The game advances to the last proposed ending point, with all game choices contained in
the shortcut proposal having been taken. If the shortcut was shortened from the original
proposal, the player who now has priority must make a different game choice than what was
originally proposed for that player.
715.3. Sometimes a loop can be fragmented, meaning that each player involved in the loop performs an
independent action that results in the same game state being reached multiple times. If that happens,
the active player (or, if the active player is not involved in the loop, the first player in turn order
who is involved) must then make a different game choice so the loop does not continue.
Example: In a two-player game, the active player controls a creature with the ability “{0}:
[This creature] gains flying,” the nonactive player controls a permanent with the ability
“{0}: Target creature loses flying,” and nothing in the game cares how many times an
ability has been activated. Say the active player activates his creature’s ability, it resolves,
then the nonactive player activates her permanent’s ability targeting that creature, and it
resolves. This returns the game to a game state it was at before. The active player must
make a different game choice (in other words, anything other than activating that creature’s
ability again). The creature doesn’t have flying. Note that the nonactive player could have
prevented the fragmented loop simply by not activating her permanent’s ability, in which
case the creature would have had flying. The nonactive player always has the final choice
and is therefore able to determine whether the creature has flying.
715.4. If a loop contains only mandatory actions, the game is a draw. (See rules 104.4b and 104.4f.)
715.5. No player can be forced to perform an action that would end a loop other than actions called for
by objects involved in the loop.
Example: A player controls Seal of Cleansing, an enchantment that reads, “Sacrifice Seal
of Cleansing: Destroy target artifact or enchantment.” A mandatory loop that involves an
artifact begins. The player is not forced to sacrifice Seal of Cleansing to destroy the artifact
and end the loop.
715.6. If a loop contains an effect that says “[A] unless [B],” where [A] and [B] are each actions, no
player can be forced to perform [B] to break the loop. If no player chooses to perform [B], the loop
will continue as though [A] were mandatory.
716. Handling Illegal Actions
716.1. If a player realizes that he or she can’t legally take an action after starting to do so, the entire
action is reversed and any payments already made are canceled. No abilities trigger and no effects
apply as a result of an undone action. If the action was casting a spell, the spell returns to the zone it
came from. The player may also reverse any legal mana abilities activated while making the illegal
play, unless mana from them or from any triggered mana abilities they triggered was spent on
another mana ability that wasn’t reversed. Players may not reverse actions that moved cards to a
library, moved cards from a library to any zone other than the stack, or caused a library to be
shuffled.

716.2. When reversing illegal spells and abilities, the player who had priority retains it and may take
another action or pass. The player may redo the reversed action in a legal way or take any other
action allowed by the rules.

 8. Multiplayer Rules
800. General
800.1. A multiplayer game is a game that begins with more than two players. This section contains
additional optional rules that can be used for multiplayer play.
800.2. These rules consist of a series of options that can be added to a multiplayer game and a number
of variant styles of multiplayer play. A single game may use multiple options but only one variant.
800.3. Many multiplayer Magic tournaments have additional rules not included here, including rules
for deck construction. See the most current Magic: The Gathering Tournament Rules for more
information. They can be found at www.wizards.com/WPN/Events/Rules.aspx.
800.4. Unlike two-player games, multiplayer games can continue after one or more players have left the
game.
800.4a. When a player leaves the game, all objects (see rule 109) owned by that player leave the
game, all spells and abilities controlled by that player on the stack cease to exist, and any effects
which give that player control of any objects or players end. Then, if there are any objects still
controlled by that player, those objects are exiled. This is not a state-based action. It happens as
soon as the player leaves the game. If the player who left the game had priority at the time he or
she left, priority passes to the next player in turn order who’s still in the game.
Example: Alex casts Control Magic, an Aura that reads, “You control enchanted
creature,” on Bianca’s Wall of Wood. If Alex leaves the game, so does Control Magic,
and Wall of Wood reverts to Bianca’s control. If, instead, Bianca leaves the game, so
does Wall of Wood, and Control Magic is put into Alex’s graveyard.
Example: Alex casts Threaten, which reads, in part, “Untap target creature and gain
control of it until end of turn,” targeting Bianca’s Wall of Wood. If Alex leaves the
game, Threaten’s change-of-control effect ends and Wall of Wood reverts to Bianca’s
control.
Example: Alex casts Bribery, which reads, “Search target opponent’s library for a
creature card and put that card onto the battlefield under your control. Then that player
shuffles his or her library,” targeting Bianca. Alex puts Wall of Wood onto the
battlefield from Bianca’s library. If Bianca leaves the game, Wall of Wood also leaves
the game. If, instead, Alex leaves the game, Wall of Wood is exiled.
Example: Alex controls Genesis Chamber, which reads, “Whenever a nontoken creature
enters the battlefield, if Genesis Chamber is untapped, that creature’s controller puts a
1/1 colorless Myr artifact creature token onto the battlefield.” If Alex leaves the game,
all such Myr tokens that entered the battlefield under Alex’s control leave the game, and
all such Myr tokens that entered the battlefield under any other player’s control remain
in the game.
800.4b. If an object would change to the control of a player who has left the game, it doesn’t. If a
token would enter the battlefield under the control of a player who has left the game, no token is
created. If a player would be controlled by a player who has left the game, he or she isn’t.
800.4c If an object that would be owned by a player who has left the game would be created in any
zone, it isn’t created. If a triggered ability that would be controlled by a player who has left the
game would be put onto the stack, it isn’t put on the stack.
Example: Astral Slide is an enchantment that reads, “Whenever a player cycles a card,
you may exile target creature. If you do, return that creature to the battlefield under its
owner’s control at the beginning of the next end step.” During Alex’s turn, Bianca uses
Astral Slide’s ability to exile Alex’s Hypnotic Specter. Before the end of that turn,
Bianca leaves the game. At the beginning of the end step, the delayed triggered ability

generated by Astral Slide that would return Hypnotic Specter to play triggers, but it isn’t
put on the stack. Hypnotic Specter never returns to the battlefield.
800.4d If combat damage would be assigned to a player who has left the game, that damage simply
isn’t assigned.
800.4e If an object requires a player who has left the game to make a choice, the controller of the
object chooses another player to make that choice. If the original choice was to be made by an
opponent of the controller of the object, that player chooses another opponent if possible.
800.4f If an effect requires information about a specific player, the effect uses the current
information about that player if he or she is still in the game; otherwise, the effect uses the last
known information about that player before he or she left the game.
800.4g If a player leaves the game during his or her turn, that turn continues to its completion
without an active player. If the active player would receive priority, instead the next player in
turn order receives priority, or the top object on the stack resolves, or the phase or step ends,
whichever is appropriate.
800.4h When a player leaves the game, objects that player owns in the ante zone do not leave the
game. This is an exception to rule 800.4a. See rule 407, “Ante.”
800.4i In a Planar Magic game, if the player designated as the planar controller would leave the
game, instead the next player in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the planar
controller, then the old planar controller leaves the game. See rule 309.5.
800.5. In a multiplayer game, the first time a player takes a mulligan, he or she draws a new hand of
seven cards rather than six cards. Subsequent hands decrease by one card as normal.
800.6. In a multiplayer game other than a Two-Headed Giant game, the starting player doesn’t skip the
draw step of his or her first turn. In a Two-Headed Giant game, the team who plays first skips the
draw step of their first turn. See rule 103.7.
800.7. In a multiplayer game not using the limited range of influence option (see rule 801), if an effect
states that a player wins the game, all of that player’s opponents lose the game instead.
801. Limited Range of Influence Option
801.1. Limited range of influence is an option that can be applied to most multiplayer games. It’s
always used in the Emperor variant (see rule 809), and it’s often used for games involving five or
more players.
801.2. A player’s range of influence is the maximum distance from that player, measured in player
seats, that the player can affect. Players within that many seats of the player are within that player’s
range of influence. Objects controlled by players within a player’s range of influence are also within
that player’s range of influence. Range of influence covers spells, abilities, effects, damage dealing,
attacking, making choices, and winning the game.
801.2a The most commonly chosen limited ranges of influence are 1 seat and 2 seats. Different
players may have different ranges of influence.
Example: A range of influence of 1 means that only you and the players seated directly
next to you are within your range of influence.
Example: A range of influence of 2 means that you and the two players to your left and
the two players to your right are within your range of influence.
801.2b A player is always within his or her own range of influence.

801.2c The particular players within each player’s range of influence are determined as each turn
begins.
Example: In a game with a range of influence of 1, Alex is seated to the left of Rob, and
Carissa is seated to the right of Rob. Carissa is not in Alex’s range of influence. If Rob
leaves the game, Carissa will enter Alex’s range of influence at the start of the next turn.
801.2d An object is within a player’s range of influence if it’s controlled by that player or by
another player within that many seats of that player.
801.3. Creatures can attack only opponents within their controller’s range of influence or planeswalkers
controlled by those opponents. If no opponents are within a player’s range of influence, creatures
that player controls can’t attack.
801.4. Objects and players outside a player’s range of influence can’t be the targets of spells or abilities
that player controls.
801.5. Some cards require players to make choices. These cards work differently when the limited
range of influence option is used.
801.5a If a player is asked to choose an object or player, he or she must choose one within his or her
range of influence.
Example: In a game with a range of influence of 1, Alex is seated to the left of Rob. Alex
activates the ability of Cuombajj Witches, which reads, “Cuombajj Witches deals 1
damage to target creature or player and 1 damage to target creature or player of an
opponent’s choice,” targeting Rob and choosing Rob as the opponent who picks the
other target. Rob must choose a target that’s in both his range of influence and in the
range of influence of the controller of Cuombajj Witches. He must therefore choose
himself, Alex, or a creature controlled by either himself or Alex.
801.5b If a player is asked to choose between one or more options (and not between one or more
objects or players), he or she can choose between those options even if those options refer to
objects or players outside the player’s range of influence.
Example: Alex, who has a range of influence of 2, is seated to the left of Rob, and
Carissa, who has a range of influence of 1, is seated to the right of Rob. Alex casts a
spell that reads, “An opponent chooses one — You draw 2 cards; or each creature you
control gets +2/+2 until end of turn,” and chooses Carissa to make that choice. Carissa
can choose the mode even though Alex is out of her range.
801.5c If an effect requires a choice and there’s no player who can make that choice within its
controller’s range of influence, the closest appropriate player to its controller’s left makes that
choice.
Example: In an Emperor game in which all players have range of influence 1, an
emperor casts Fact or Fiction, which reads, “Reveal the top five cards of your library.
An opponent separates those cards into two piles. Put one pile into your hand and the
other into your graveyard.” Since no opponent is within the emperor’s range of
influence, the nearest opponent to the emperor’s left separates the cards into piles.
801.6. A player can’t activate the activated abilities of an object outside of his or her range of influence.
801.7. A triggered ability doesn’t trigger unless its trigger event happens entirely within the range of
influence of its source’s controller.
Example: In a game in which all players have range of influence 1, Alex is seated to the left
of Rob. Rob controls two Auras attached to Alex’s Runeclaw Bear: One with the trigger
condition “Whenever enchanted creature becomes blocked,” and one with the trigger
condition “Whenever enchanted creature becomes blocked by a creature.” Alex’s Runeclaw

Bear attacks the player to Alex’s left and becomes blocked. The ability of Rob’s first Aura
triggers because the entire event (Runeclaw Bear becomes blocked) happens within Rob’s
range of influence. The ability of Rob’s second Aura doesn’t trigger, however, because that
event includes the blocking creature, which is out of Rob’s range.
801.7a If a trigger event includes an object moving out of or into a player’s range of influence, use
the game state before or after the event as appropriate to determine whether the triggered ability
will trigger. See rule 603.6.
Example: Carissa and Alex are outside each other’s range of influence. Carissa
controls a Runeclaw Bear owned by Alex and they each control an Extractor Demon, a
creature which reads, in part, “Whenever another creature leaves the battlefield, you
may have target player put the top two cards of his or her library into his or her
graveyard.” The Runeclaw Bear is destroyed and is put into Alex’s graveyard. The
ability of Alex’s Extractor Demon doesn’t trigger because the leaves-the-battlefield
event was outside Alex’s range of influence. The ability of Carissa’s Extractor Demon
does trigger, even though the creature is going to a graveyard outside her range,
because the leaves-the-battlefield event was within her range.
801.8. An Aura can’t enchant an object or player outside its controller’s range of influence. If an Aura
is attached to an illegal object or player, the Aura is put into its owner’s graveyard as a state-based
action. See rule 704.
801.9. An Equipment can’t equip an object outside its controller’s range of influence, and a
Fortification can’t fortify an object outside its controller’s range of influence. If an Equipment or
Fortification is attached to an illegal permanent, it becomes unattached from that permanent but
remains on the battlefield. This is a state-based action. See rule 704.
801.10. Spells and abilities can’t affect objects or players outside their controller’s range of influence.
The parts of the effect that attempt to affect an out-of-range object or player will do nothing. The
rest of the effect will work normally.
Example: In a six-player game in which each player has range of influence 1, Alex casts
Pyroclasm, which reads, “Pyroclasm deals 2 damage to each creature.” Pyroclasm deals 2
damage to each creature controlled by Alex, the player to Alex’s left, and the player to
Alex’s right. No other creatures are dealt damage.
801.11. If a spell or ability requires information from the game, it gets only information from within its
controller’s range of influence. It doesn’t see objects or events outside its controller’s range of
influence.
Example: In a six-player game where each player has range of influence 1, Alex controls
Coat of Arms, which reads, “Each creature gets +1/+1 for each other creature on the
battlefield that shares at least one creature type with it.” Coat of Arms will boost Alex’s
creatures based only on what creatures are controlled by Alex, the player to Alex’s left, and
the player to Alex’s right. It won’t take other creatures into account.
Example: In the same game, Rob is sitting to the right of Alex. Coat of Arms will boost
Rob’s creatures based on what creatures are controlled by players within Alex’s range of
influence, including the player sitting to Alex’s left, who’s out of Rob’s range of influence.
801.12. The “legend rule” (see rule 704.5k) applies to a permanent only if other legendary permanents
with the same name are within its controller’s range of influence.
Example: Alex has range of influence 1, and Carissa has range of influence 2. Rob sits
between them. If Alex controls a legendary permanent and Carissa puts a legendary
permanent with the same name onto the battlefield, only the one controlled by Carissa will
be put into a graveyard.
801.13. The “world rule” (see rule 704.5m) applies to a permanent only if other world permanents are
within its controller’s range of influence.

801.14. The “planeswalker uniqueness rule” (see rule 704.5j) applies to a planeswalker only if other
planeswalkers with the same planeswalker type are within its controller’s range of influence.
801.15. Replacement and prevention effects watch for a particular event to happen and then completely
or partially replace that event. The limited range of influence option can cause the modified event to
contain instructions that can’t be carried out, in which case the player simply ignores the impossible
instructions. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects,” and rule 615, “Prevention Effects.”
801.15a If a replacement effect tries to cause a spell or ability to affect an object or player outside
its controller’s range of influence, that portion of the event does nothing.
Example: Alex casts Lava Axe (“Lava Axe deals 5 damage to target player”) targeting
Rob. In response, Rob casts Captain’s Maneuver (“The next X damage that would be
dealt to target creature or player this turn is dealt to another target creature or player
instead”) with X equal to 3, targeting Carissa. Carissa isn’t in Alex’s range of influence.
When Lava Axe resolves, it deals 2 damage to Rob and no damage to Carissa.
801.15b If a spell or ability creates an effect that prevents damage that would be dealt by a source, it
can affect only sources within the spell or ability’s controller’s range of influence. If a spell or
ability creates an effect that prevents damage that would be dealt to a creature or player, it can
affect only creatures and players within the spell or ability’s controller’s range of influence. If a
spell or ability creates an effect that prevents damage, but neither the source nor the would-be
recipient of the damage is specified, it prevents damage only if both the source and recipient of
that damage are within the spell or ability’s controller’s range of influence.
Example: Rob is within Alex’s range of influence, but Carissa is not. Alex controls an
enchantment that says, “Prevent all damage that would be dealt by creatures.” Carissa
attacks Rob with a creature. The creature deals combat damage to Rob.
Example: Rob is within Alex’s range of influence, but Carissa is not. Carissa casts
Lightning Blast (“Lightning Blast deals 4 damage to target creature or player”)
targeting Rob. In response, Alex casts Mending Hands (“Prevent the next 4 damage that
would be dealt to target creature or player this turn”) targeting Rob. The damage to
Rob is prevented.
Example: Rob is within Alex’s range of influence, but Carissa is not. Carissa attacks
Rob with a creature, and Rob blocks with a creature. Alex casts Holy Day (“Prevent all
combat damage that would be dealt this turn.”) Carissa and Rob’s creatures deal
combat damage to each other.
801.16. If an effect states that a player wins the game, all of that player’s opponents within his or her
range of influence lose the game instead.
801.17. If the effect of a spell or ability states that the game is a draw, the game is a draw for that spell
or ability’s controller and all players within his or her range of influence. They leave the game. All
remaining players continue to play the game.
801.18. If the game somehow enters a “loop” of mandatory actions, repeating a sequence of events with
no way to stop, the game is a draw for each player who controls an object that’s involved in that
loop, as well as for each player within the range of influence of any of those players. They leave the
game. All remaining players continue to play the game.
801.19. Effects that restart the game (see rule 713) are exempt from the limited range of influence
option. All players in the game will be involved in the new game.
801.20. In multiplayer Planar Magic games other than Grand Melee games, plane cards are exempt
from the limited range of influence option. Their abilities, and the effects of those abilities, affect all
applicable objects and players in the game. See rule 901, “Planar Magic.”

802. Attack Multiple Players Option
802.1. Some multiplayer games allow the active player to attack multiple other players. If this option is
used, a player can also choose to attack only one player during a particular combat.
802.2. As the combat phase starts, the attacking player doesn’t choose an opponent to become the
defending player. Instead, all the attacking player’s opponents are defending players during the
combat phase.
802.2a Any rule, object, or effect that refers to a “defending player” refers to one specific defending
player, not to all of the defending players. If an ability of an attacking creature refers to a
defending player, or a spell or ability refers to both an attacking creature and a defending player,
then unless otherwise specified, the defending player it’s referring to is the player that creature
was attacking at the time it became an attacking creature that combat, or the controller of the
planeswalker that creature was attacking at the time it became an attacking creature that combat.
If a spell or ability could apply to multiple attacking creatures, the appropriate defending player
is individually determined for each of those attacking creatures. If there are multiple defending
players that could be chosen, the controller of the spell or ability chooses one.
Example: Rob attacks Alex with Runeclaw Bear and attacks Carissa with a creature
with mountainwalk. Whether the creature with mountainwalk is unblockable depends
only on whether Carissa controls a Mountain.
802.3. As the attacking player declares each attacking creature, he or she chooses a defending player or
a planeswalker controlled by a defending player for it to attack. See rule 508, “Declare Attackers
Step.”
802.3a Restrictions and requirements that don’t apply to attacking a specific player are evaluated
based on the entire group of attacking creatures. Restrictions and requirements that apply to
attacking a specific player apply only to creatures attacking that player. The entire group of
attacking creatures must still be legal. See rule 508.1.
802.3b Creatures in a band can’t attack different players. See rule 702.20, “Banding.”
802.4. If more than one player is being attacked or controls a planeswalker that’s being attacked, each
defending player in APNAP order declares blockers as the declare blockers step begins. (See rule
101.4 and rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”) The first defending player declares all his or her
blocks, then the second defending player, and so on.
802.4a A defending player can block only with creatures he or she controls. Those creatures can
block only creatures attacking that player or a planeswalker that player controls.
802.4b When determining whether a defending player’s blocks are legal, ignore any creatures
attacking other players and any blocking creatures controlled by other players.
802.5. After blockers have been declared, if any creatures are blocking multiple creatures, each
defending player in APNAP order announces the damage assignment order among the attacking
creatures for each blocking creature he or she controls. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
802.6. Combat damage is assigned in APNAP order. Other than that, the combat damage step proceeds
just as in a two-player game. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
803. Attack Left and Attack Right Options
803.1. Some multiplayer games use the optional attack left or attack right rules.

803.1a If the attack left option is used, a player can attack only an opponent seated immediately to
his or her left. If a player’s nearest opponent to the left is more than one seat away, the player
can’t attack.
803.1b If the attack right option is used, a player can attack only an opponent seated immediately to
his or her right. If a player’s nearest opponent to the right is more than one seat away, the player
can’t attack.
804. Deploy Creatures Option
804.1. The Emperor variant always uses the deploy creatures option, and it can be used in other
variants that allow players to compete in teams. Multiplayer formats in which players compete as
individuals usually don’t use this option.
804.2. Each creature has the ability “{T}: Target teammate gains control of this creature. Activate this
ability only any time you could cast a sorcery.”
805. Shared Team Turns Option
805.1. Some multiplayer games between teams use the shared team turns option. It’s always used in the
Two-Headed Giant variant (see rule 810) and the Archenemy casual variant (see rule 811). It can be
used only if the members of each team are sitting in adjacent seats.
805.2. Within each team, the player seated in the rightmost seat from that team’s perspective is the
primary player. If the players on a team can’t agree on a choice, such as which creatures attack or
what order triggered abilities are put on the stack, the primary player makes that choice.
805.3. The methods described in rule 103.2 are used to determine which team will take the first turn.
The team determined this way is the starting team.
805.3a The process for handling mulligans is altered accordingly. First, each player on the starting
team, in whatever order that team likes, declares whether or not he or she will take a mulligan.
Then the players on each other team in turn order do the same. Teammates may consult while
making their decisions. Then all mulligans are taken at the same time. A player may take a
mulligan even after his or her teammate has decided to keep his or her opening hand. See rule
103.4.
805.3b The process for handling cards that allow a player to begin the game with them on the
battlefield is altered accordingly. First, each player on the starting team, in whatever order that
team likes, may put any or all such cards onto the battlefield from his or her opening hand.
Teammates may consult while making their decisions. Then each player on each other team in
turn order does the same.
805.4. Each team takes turns rather than each player.
805.4a The team whose turn it is is the active team. Each other team is a nonactive team.
805.4b Each player on a team draws a card during that team’s draw step.
805.4c Each player on a team may play a land during each of that team’s turns.
805.5. Teams have priority, not individual players.
805.5a A player may cast a spell, activate an ability, or take a special action when his or her team
has priority.

805.5b If a team has priority and no player on that team wishes to do anything, that team passes. If
all teams pass in succession (that is, if all teams pass without any player taking any actions in
between passing), the top object on the stack resolves, then the active team receives priority. If
the stack is empty when all teams pass in succession, the phase or step ends and the next one
begins.
805.6. The Active Player, Nonactive Player order rule (see rule 101.4) is modified if the shared team
turns option is used. If multiple teams would make choices and/or take actions at the same time,
first the active team makes any choices required, then each nonactive team in turn order makes any
choices required. If multiple players would make choices and/or take actions at the same time, first
each player on the active team makes any choices required in whatever order they like, then the
players on each nonactive team in turn order do the same. Once all choices have been made, the
actions happen simultaneously.
805.6a If an effect instructs more than one player to draw cards in a game that’s using the shared
team turns option, first each player on the active team, in whatever order that team likes,
performs his or her draws, then each player on each nonactive team in turn order does the same.
805.7. If multiple triggered abilities have triggered since the last time a team received priority, the
members of the active team put all triggered abilities any of them controls on the stack in any order
they choose, then the members of each nonactive team in turn order do the same.
805.8. If an effect gives a player an extra turn or adds a phase or step to that player’s turn, that player’s
team takes the extra turn, phase, or step. If an effect causes a player to skip a step, phase, or turn,
that player’s team does so. If a single effect causes more than one player on the same team to add or
skip the same step, phase, or turn, that team adds or skips only that step, phase, or turn. If an effect
causes a player to control another player, the controller of that effect controls the affected player’s
team.
805.9. Any ability that refers to the “active player” refers to one specific active player, not to all of the
active players. The ability’s controller chooses which one the ability refers to at the time its effect is
applied.
806. Free-for-All Variant
806.1. In Free-for-All multiplayer games, a group of players compete as individuals against each other.
806.2. Any multiplayer options used are determined before play begins. The Free-for-All variant uses
the following default options.
806.2a The limited range of influence option usually isn’t used in Free-for-All games. If it is, each
player has the same range of influence, which is determined before play begins. See rule 801,
“Limited Range of Influence Option.”
806.2b Exactly one of the attack left, attack right, and attack multiple players options must be used.
See rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and rule 802, “Attack Multiple Players
Option.”
806.2c The deploy creatures option isn’t used in the Free-for-All variant.
806.3. The players are randomly seated around the table.
807. Grand Melee Variant

807.1. The Grand Melee variant is a modification of the Free-for-All variant, in which a group of
players compete against each other as individuals. Grand Melee is normally used only in games
begun with ten or more players.
807.2. Any multiplayer options used are decided before play begins. The Grand Melee variant uses the
following default options.
807.2a Each player has a range of influence of 1 (see rule 801).
807.2b The attack left option is used (see rule 803).
807.2c The attack multiple players and deploy creatures options aren’t used in the Grand Melee
variant.
807.3. The players are seated at random.
807.4. The Grand Melee variant allows multiple players to take turns at the same time. Moving turn
markers keep track of which players are currently taking turns. Each turn marker represents an
active player’s turn.
807.4a There is one turn marker for each full four players in the game.
Example: A Grand Melee game with sixteen players has four turn markers. A game with
fifteen players has three turn markers.
807.4b The starting player in the game gets the first turn marker. The player four seats to that
player’s left (the fifth player) takes the second turn marker, and so on until all the turn markers
have been handed out. Each turn marker is assigned a number in this way. Then all players with
turn markers start their turns at the same time.
807.4c After a player ends his or her turn, that player passes the turn marker to the player on his or
her left. If a player with a turn marker leaves the game during his or her turn, the player to his or
her left takes the turn marker after that turn ends. If a player with a turn marker leaves the game
before his or her turn begins, the player to his or her left takes the turn marker immediately.
807.4d A player who receives a turn marker can’t begin his or her turn if any player in the three
seats to his or her left has a turn marker. If this is the case, that player waits until the player four
seats to his or her left takes the other turn marker.
807.4e If a player leaves the game and that player leaving the game would reduce the number of
turn markers in the game, the turn marker immediately to the departed player’s right is
designated for removal. If more than one player leaves the game simultaneously, those players
leaving the game would reduce the number of turn markers in the game, and there are multiple
turn markers that could be removed, the marker with the lowest number is designated for
removal. A turn marker may be designated for removal multiple times.
807.4f For the purposes of determining if one or more players leaving the game would reduce the
number of turn markers in the game (see rule 807.4e), disregard turn markers already designated
for removal.
807.4g If a player who’s taking a turn has a turn marker that’s been designated for removal, that
turn marker is removed rather than being passed after that turn ends. If a player who’s not taking
a turn has a turn marker that’s been designated for removal, that turn marker is removed
immediately. If a removed turn marker had been designated for removal multiple times, the turn
marker to its right becomes designated for removal that many times minus one.

807.4h If one or more consecutively seated players leave the game, the players that were on either
side of those seats don’t enter one another’s range of influence until the next turn begins.
807.4i If an effect causes a player with a turn marker to take an extra turn after the current one, that
player keeps the turn marker and starts his or her next turn after the current turn ends, unless
another turn marker is too close on either side at that time. If a turn marker is within three seats
on the player’s left, the extra turn waits to begin until the player four seats to his or her left takes
the other turn marker. If a turn marker is within three seats on the player’s right, the player
passes the turn marker to his or her left when the turn ends rather than keeping it, and the player
will take the extra turn immediately before his or her next turn.
807.4j If an effect would cause a player to take an extra turn after the current turn, but that player
wouldn’t have a turn marker at the start of that turn, that player will take the extra turn
immediately before his or her next turn instead.
Example: During Alex’s turn, he casts Time Walk, which causes him to get an extra turn
after this one. During the same turn, the player to Alex’s left leaves the game, which
causes the number of turn markers to be reduced. After Alex’s current turn ends, his turn
marker is removed. He won’t take the extra turn from Time Walk until just before his
normal turn the next time he receives a turn marker.
807.5. Rather than having a single stack, Grand Melee games contain multiple stacks. Each turn marker
represents its own stack.
807.5a A player gets priority for a particular turn marker’s stack only if the turn marker is within his
or her range of influence or an object on that stack is controlled by a player within his or her
range of influence.
807.5b If a player has priority for multiple stacks and casts a spell, activates an ability, or a
triggered ability he or she controls triggers, the player must specify which one of those stacks
the spell or ability is put on. If an object on one of those stacks caused the triggered ability to
trigger, the player must put it on that stack. If a resolving spell or ability on one of those stacks
causes a player to cast a spell or create a copy of a spell, the new spell must be put on the same
stack. If a spell or ability targets an object on one of those stacks, it must be put on the same
stack as its target; it can’t target objects on multiple stacks.
808. Team vs. Team Variant
808.1. Team vs. Team games are played with two or more teams. Each team may have any number of
players on it.
808.2. Each team sits together on one side of the table. Each team decides the order in which its players
sit.
808.3. Any multiplayer options used are determined before play begins. The Team vs. Team variant
uses the following default options.
808.3a The attack multiple players option is used (see rule 802).
808.3b The deploy creatures options and limited range of influence options usually aren’t used in
the Team vs. Team variant.
808.4. To determine which player goes first, randomly choose a team. If that team has an odd number
of players, the player in its center seat goes first. If that team has an even number of players, the
player to the left of its midpoint goes first. Turn order goes to the players’ left.

808.5. In the Team vs. Team variant, a team’s resources (cards in hand, mana, and so on) are not
shared. Teammates may review each other’s hands and discuss strategies at any time. Teammates
can’t manipulate each other’s cards or permanents.
809. Emperor Variant
809.1. The Emperor variant involves two or more teams of three players each.
809.2. Each team sits together on one side of the table. Each team decides the order in which it’s seated.
Each team has one emperor, who sits in the middle of the team. The remaining players on the team
are generals whose job is to protect the emperor.
809.3. The Emperor variant uses the following default options.
809.3a The range of influence is limited to 2 for emperors and 1 for generals. See rule 801,
“Limited Range of Influence Option.”
809.3b Emperor games use the deploy creatures option (see rule 804).
809.3c A player can attack only an opponent seated immediately next to him or her.
Example: At the start of an emperor game, neither emperor can attack any opponents,
even though both of the opposing generals are within their spell range.
809.4. Randomly determine which emperor goes first. Turn order goes to the players’ left.
809.5. The Emperor variant includes the following specifications for winning and losing the game. All
other rules for ending the game also apply. (See rule 104.)
809.5a A team wins the game if its emperor wins.
809.5b A team loses the game if its emperor loses.
809.5c The game is a draw for a team if the game is a draw for its emperor.
809.6. The Emperor variant can also be played with any number of equally sized teams. If the teams
have more than three players, the range of influence of each player should be adjusted.
809.6a Each general’s range of influence should be the minimum number that allows one general
from an opposing team to begin the game within his or her range of influence. Each emperor’s
range of influence should be the minimum number that allows two generals from opposing
teams to begin the game within his or her range of influence. Players should be seated such that
no emperor begins the game within the range of influence of another emperor.
Example: In an Emperor game between two teams of four players each, the player
configuration (either clockwise or counterclockwise around the table) should be: Team
A general 1, Team A emperor, Team A general 2, Team A general 3, Team B general 1,
Team B emperor, Team B general 2, Team B general 3. Each emperor has range of
influence 3. Each general 2 has range of influence 2. Each general 1 and general 3 has
range of influence 1.
809.7. In the Emperor variant, a team’s resources (cards in hand, mana, and so on) are not shared.
Teammates may review each other’s hands and discuss strategies at any time. Teammates can’t
manipulate each other’s cards or permanents.
810. Two-Headed Giant Variant
810.1. Two-Headed Giant games are played with two teams of two players each.

810.2. The Two-Headed Giant variant uses the shared team turns option. (See rule 805.)
810.3. Each team sits together on one side of the table. Each team decides the order in which its players
sit.
810.4. Each team has a shared life total, which starts at 30 life.
810.5. With the exception of life total and poison counters, a team’s resources (cards in hand, mana,
and so on) are not shared in the Two-Headed Giant variant. Teammates may review each other’s
hands and discuss strategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each other’s cards or
permanents.
810.6. The team who plays first skips the draw step of its first turn.
810.7. The Two-Headed Giant variant uses different combat rules than other multiplayer variants.
810.7a Each team’s creatures attack the other team as a group. During the combat phase, the active
team is the attacking team and each player on the active team is an attacking player. Likewise,
the nonactive team is the defending team and each player on the nonactive team is a defending
player.
810.7b Any one-shot effect that refers to the “defending player” refers to one specific defending
player, not to both of the defending players. The controller of the effect chooses which one the
spell or ability refers to at the time the effect is applied. The same is true for any one-shot effect
that refers to the “attacking player.”
Any characteristic-defining ability that refers to the “defending player” refers to one specific
defending player, not to both of the defending players. The controller of the object with the
characteristic-defining ability chooses which one the ability refers to at the time the nonactive
players become defending players.
All other cases in which the “defending player” is referred to actually refer to both defending
players. If the reference involves a positive comparison (such as asking whether the defending
player controls an Island) or a relative comparison (such as asking whether you control more
creatures than the defending player), it gets only one answer. This answer is “yes” if either
defending player in the comparison would return a “yes” answer if compared individually. If the
reference involves a negative comparison (such as asking whether the defending player controls
no black permanents), it also gets only one answer. This answer is “yes” if performing the
analogous positive comparison would return a “no” answer. The same is true for all other cases
that refer to the “attacking player.”
810.7c As the declare attackers step begins, the active team declares attackers. If an effect of an
object controlled by a defending player prohibits a creature from attacking him or her, that
creature can’t attack the defending team. The active team has one combined attack, and that set
of attacking creatures must be legal as a whole. See rule 508.1.
Example: One player in a Two-Headed Giant game controls Teferi’s Moat, which says
“As Teferi’s Moat comes into play, choose a color.” and “Creatures of the chosen color
without flying can’t attack you.” Creatures of the chosen color without flying can’t
attack that player’s team.
810.7d As the declare blockers step begins, the defending team declares blockers. Creatures
controlled by the defending players can block any attacking creatures. The defending team has
one combined block, and that set of blocking creatures must be legal as a whole. See rule 509.1.
Example: If an attacking creature has forestwalk and either player on the defending
team controls a Forest, the creature can’t be blocked.

810.7e Once blockers have been declared, for each attacking creature that’s become blocked by
multiple creatures, the active team announces the damage assignment order among the blocking
creatures. Then, for each creature that’s blocking multiple creatures, the defending team
announces the damage assignment order among the attacking creatures.
810.7f As the combat damage step begins, the active team announces how each attacking creature
will assign its combat damage. If an attacking creature would assign combat damage to the
defending team, the active team chooses only one of the defending players for that creature to
assign its combat damage to. Then the defending team announces how each blocking creature
will assign its combat damage. See rule 510.1.
810.8. The Two-Headed Giant variant uses the normal rules for winning or losing the game (see rule
104), with the following additions and specifications.
810.8a Players win and lose the game only as a team, not as individuals. If either player on a team
loses the game, the team loses the game. If either player on a team wins the game, the entire
team wins the game. If an effect would prevent a player from winning the game, that player’s
team can’t win the game. If an effect would prevent a player from losing the game, that player’s
team can’t lose the game.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player controls Transcendence, which reads,
in part, “You don’t lose the game for having 0 or less life.” If that player’s team’s life
total is 0 or less, that team doesn’t lose the game.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player attempts to draw a card while there
are no cards in that player’s library. That player loses the game, so that player’s entire
team loses the game.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player controls Platinum Angel, which reads,
“You can’t lose the game and your opponents can’t win the game.” Neither that player
nor his or her teammate can lose the game while Platinum Angel is on the battlefield,
and neither player on the opposing team can win the game.
810.8b If a player concedes, his or her team leaves the game immediately. That team loses the
game.
810.8c If a team’s life total is 0 or less, the team loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See
rule 704.)
810.8d If a team has fifteen or more poison counters, that team loses the game. (This is a state-based
action. See rule 704.)
810.9. Damage, loss of life, and gaining life happen to each player individually. The result is applied to
the team’s shared life total.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player casts Flame Rift, which reads, “Flame
Rift deals 4 damage to each player.” Each team is dealt a total of 8 damage.
810.9a If a cost or effect needs to know the value of an individual player’s life total, that cost or
effect uses the team’s life total instead.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player on a team that has 17 life is targeted
by Beacon of Immortality, which reads, in part, “Double target player’s life total.” That
player gains 17 life, so the team winds up at 34 life.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player controls Test of Endurance, an
enchantment that reads, “At the beginning of your upkeep, if you have 50 or more life,
you win the game.” At the beginning of that player’s upkeep, the player’s team wins the
game if his or her team’s life total is 50 or more.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player on a team that has 11 life controls
Lurking Evil, an enchantment that reads, “Pay half your life, rounded up: Lurking Evil

becomes a 4/4 Horror creature with flying.” To activate the ability, that player must pay
6 life. The team winds up at 5 life.
810.9b If a cost or effect allows both members of a team to pay life simultaneously, the total
amount of life they pay may not exceed their team’s life total. (Players can always pay 0 life.)
810.9c If an effect sets a single player’s life total to a specific number, the player gains or loses the
necessary amount of life to end up with the new total. The team’s life total is adjusted by the
amount of life that player gained or lost.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, a player on a team that has 25 life is targeted
by an ability that reads, “Target player’s life total becomes 10.” That player’s life total
is considered to be 25, so that player loses 15 life. The team winds up at 10 life.
810.9d If an effect would set the life total of each player on a team to a number, that team chooses
one of its members. On that team, only that player is affected.
Example: In a Two-Headed Giant game, one team has 7 life and the other team has 13
life. A player casts Repay in Kind, which reads, “Each player’s life total becomes the
lowest life total among all players.” Each team chooses one if its members to be
affected. The result is that the chosen player on the team that has 13 life loses 6 life, so
that team’s life total winds up at 7.
810.9e A player can’t exchange life totals with his or her teammate. If an effect would cause that to
occur, the exchange won’t happen.
810.9f If an effect instructs a player to redistribute any number of players’ life totals, that player
may not affect more than one member of each team this way.
810.9g If an effect says that a player can’t gain life, no player on that player’s team can gain life.
810.9h If an effect says that a player can’t lose life, no player on that player’s team can lose life or
pay any amount of life other than 0.
810.10. Effects that cause players to get poison counters happen to each player individually. The poison
counters are shared by the team.
810.10a If an effect needs to know how many poison counters an individual player has, that effect
uses the number of poison counters that player’s team has.
810.10b If an effect says that a player loses poison counters, that player’s team loses that many
poison counters.
810.10c If an effect says that a player can’t get poison counters, no player on that player’s team can
get poison counters.
810.10d A player is “poisoned” if his or her team has one or more poison counters.
810.11. The Two-Headed Giant variant can also be played with equally sized teams of more than two
players. For each player a team has beyond the second, that team’s starting life total is increased by
15 and the number of poison counters required for the team to lose is increased by five. (These
variants are called Three-Headed Giant, Four-Headed Giant, and so on.)
811. Alternating Teams Variant
811.1. Alternating Teams games are played with two or more teams of equal size.

811.2. Any multiplayer options used are determined before play begins. The Alternating Teams variant
uses the following default options.
811.2a The recommended range of influence is 2. See rule 801, “Limited Range of Influence
Option.”
811.2b Exactly one of the attack left, attack right, and attack multiple players options must be used.
See rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right Options,” and rule 802, “Attack Multiple Players
Option.”
811.2c The deploy creatures option isn’t normally used in the Alternating Teams variant.
811.3. At the start of the game, players are seated so that no one is next to a teammate and each team is
equally spaced out.
Example: In a Teams game with three teams, A, B, and C, the seating around the table at
the start of the game is A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2, A3, B3, C3, and so on.
811.4. A player can’t attack opponents who aren’t seated next to him or her.
811.5. In the Alternating Teams variant, a team’s resources (cards in hand, mana, and so on) are not
shared. Teammates can’t review each other’s hands unless they are sitting next to each other.
Teammates may discuss strategies at any time. Teammates can’t manipulate each other’s cards or
permanents.

 9. Casual Variants
900. General
900.1. This section contains additional optional rules that can be used for certain casual game variants.
It is by no means comprehensive.
900.2. The casual variants detailed here use supplemental zones, rules, cards, and other game
implements not used in traditional Magic games.
901. Planar Magic
901.1. In the Planar Magic variant, plane cards add additional abilities and randomness to the game. At
any given time, one plane card will be face up and its abilities will affect the game. The Planar
Magic variant uses all the normal rules for a Magic game, with the following additions.
901.2. A Planar Magic game may be a two-player game or a multiplayer game. The default multiplayer
setup is the Free-for-All variant with the attack multiple players option and without the limited
range of influence option. See rule 806, “Free-for-All Variant.”
901.3. In addition to the normal game materials, each player needs a planar deck of at least ten plane
cards and the game needs one planar die. Each card in a planar deck must have a different English
name. (See rule 309, “Planes.”)
901.3a A planar die is a six-sided die. One face has the planeswalker symbol {PW}. One face has
the chaos symbol {C}. The other faces are blank.
901.4. At the start of the game, each player shuffles his or her planar deck so that the cards are in a
random order. Each deck is placed face down next to its owner’s library. All plane cards remain in
the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a planar deck and while they’re
face up.
901.5. Once all players have kept their opening hands and used the abilities of cards that allow them to
start the game with those cards on the battlefield, the starting player moves the top card of his or her
planar deck off that planar deck and turns it face up. (See rule 103.6.) No abilities of that card
trigger as a result.
901.6. The owner of a plane card is the player who started the game with it in his or her planar deck.
The controller of a face-up plane card is the player designated as the planar controller. Normally,
the planar controller is whoever the active player is. However, if the current planar controller would
leave the game, instead the next player in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the
planar controller, then the old planar controller leaves the game. The new planar controller retains
that designation until he or she leaves the game or a different player becomes the active player,
whichever comes first.
901.7. Any abilities of a face-up plane card in the command zone function from that zone. The card’s
static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be
activated.
901.7a Each plane card is treated as if its text box included “When you roll {PW}, put this card on
the bottom of its owner’s planar deck face down, then move the top card of your planar deck off
your planar deck and turn it face up.” This is called the “planeswalking ability.” A face-up plane
card that’s turned face down becomes a new object.

901.8. Any time the active player has priority and the stack is empty, but only during a main phase of
his or her turn, that player may roll the planar die. Taking this action costs a player an amount of
mana equal to the number of times he or she has previously taken this action on that turn. This is a
special action and doesn’t use the stack. (See rule 115.2f.)
901.8a If the die roll is a blank face, nothing happens. The active player gets priority.
901.8b If the die roll is the chaos symbol {C}, any ability of the plane that starts “When you roll
{C}” triggers and is put on the stack. The active player gets priority.
901.8c If the die roll is the planeswalker symbol {PW}, the plane’s “planeswalking ability” triggers
and is put on the stack. The active player gets priority.
901.9. When a player leaves the game, all objects owned by that player leave the game. (See rule
800.4a.) If that includes the face-up plane card, the planar controller turns the top card of his or her
planar deck face up. This is not a state-based action. It happens as soon as the player leaves the
game.
901.9a If a plane leaves the game while a “planeswalking ability” for which it was the source is on
the stack, that ability ceases to exist.
901.10. After the game has started, if a player moves the top card of his or her planar deck off that
planar deck and turns it face up, that player has “planeswalked.” Continuous effects with durations
that last until a player planeswalks end. Abilities that trigger when a player planeswalks trigger. See
rule 701.20.
901.10a A player may planeswalk as the result of the “planeswalking ability” (see rule 309.6) or
because the owner of the face-up plane card leaves the game (see rule 901.9).
901.10b The plane card that’s turned face up is the plane the player planeswalks to. The plane card
that’s turned face down, or that leaves the game, is the plane the player planeswalks away from.
901.11. A Two-Headed Giant Planar Magic game uses all the rules for the Two-Headed Giant
multiplayer variant and all the rules for the Planar Magic casual variant, with the following
additions.
901.11a Each player has his or her own planar deck.
901.11b The planar controller is normally the primary player of the active team. However, if the
current planar controller’s team would leave the game, instead the primary player of the next
team in turn order that wouldn’t leave the game becomes the planar controller, then the old
planar controller’s team leaves the game. The new planar controller retains that designation until
he or she leaves the game or a different team becomes the active team, whichever comes first.
901.11c Even though the face-up plane is controlled by just one player, any ability of that plane that
refers to “you” applies to both members of the planar controller’s team.
901.11d Since each member of the active team is an active player, each of them may roll the planar
die. Each player’s cost to roll the planar die is based on the number of times that particular
player has already rolled the planar die that turn.
901.12. In multiplayer formats other than Grand Melee, plane cards are exempt from the limited range
of influence option. Their abilities, and the effects of those abilities, affect all applicable objects and
players in the game. (See rule 801, “Limited Range of Influence Option.”)
901.13. In Grand Melee Planar Magic games, multiple plane cards may be face up at the same time.

901.13a Before the first turn of the game of the game, each player who will start the game with a
turn marker moves the top card of his or her planar deck off that planar deck and turns it face
up. Each of them is a planar controller.
901.13b If a player would leave the game and that player leaving the game would reduce the
number of turn markers in the game, that player first ceases to be a planar controller (but no
other player becomes a planar controller), then that player leaves the game. The face-up plane
card that player controlled is put on the bottom of its owner’s planar deck. No player is
considered to have planeswalked.
901.14. Single Planar Deck Option
901.14a As an alternative option, a Planar Magic game may be played with just a single communal
planar deck. In that case, the number of cards in the planar deck must be at least forty or at least
ten times the number of players in the game, whichever is smaller. Each card in the planar deck
must have a different English name.
901.14b In a Planar Magic game using the single planar deck option, the planar controller is
considered to be the owner of all the plane cards.
901.14c If any rule or ability refers to a player’s planar deck, the communal planar deck is used.
902. Vanguard
902.1. In the Vanguard variant, a vanguard card allows each player to play the role of a famous
character. Each player will have one face-up vanguard card whose abilities and other characteristics
affect the game. The Vanguard variant uses all the normal rules for a Magic game, with the
following additions.
902.2. A Vanguard game may be a two-player game or a multiplayer game.
902.3. In addition to the normal game materials, each player needs a vanguard card. Each vanguard
card is placed face up next to its owner’s library before the game begins. All vanguard cards remain
in the command zone throughout the game.
902.4. Each player’s starting life total is 20, as modified by the life modifier of his or her vanguard
card.
Example: The life modifier of a player’s vanguard card is -3. That player starts the game
with 17 life.
902.5. Each player draws a hand of seven cards, as modified by the hand modifier of his or her
vanguard card.
902.5a If a player takes a mulligan in a Vanguard game, just like in a normal game, that player
shuffles his or her hand back into his or her library, then draws a new hand of one fewer cards
than he or she had before. (In a multiplayer game, a player’s first mulligan is for the same
number of cards as he or she had before.)
Example: The hand modifier of a player’s vanguard card is +2. That player starts the
game with a hand of 9 cards. If the player takes a mulligan, he or she draws a new hand
of 8 cards. The next mulligan is for 7 cards, and so on.
902.5b A player’s maximum hand size is seven, as modified by the hand modifier of his or her
vanguard card.

Example: The hand modifier of a player’s vanguard card is -1. That player’s maximum
hand size is six. If that player has more than six cards in his or her hand as the cleanup
step begins, he or she will discard all but six of them.
902.6. The owner of a vanguard card is the player who started the game with it in the command zone.
The controller of a face-up vanguard card is its owner.
902.7. Any abilities of a face-up vanguard card in the command zone function from that zone. The
card’s static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities
may be activated.
903. Commander
903.1. In the Commander variant, each deck is led by a legendary creature designated as that deck’s
commander. The Commander variant was created and popularized by fans; an independent rules
committee maintains additional resources at http://mtgcommander.net. The Commander variant
uses all the normal rules for a Magic game, with the following additions.
903.2. A Commander game may be a two-player game or a multiplayer game. The default multiplayer
setup is the Free-for-All variant with the attack multiple players option and without the limited
range of influence option. See rule 806, “Free-for-All Variant.”
903.3. Each deck has a legendary creature card designated as its commander. This designation is not a
characteristic of the object represented by the card; rather, it is an attribute of the card itself. The
card retains this designation even when it changes zones.
Example: A commander that’s been turned face down (due to Ixidron’s effect, for example)
is still a commander. A commander that’s copying another card (due to Cytoshape’s effect,
for example) is still a commander. A permanent that’s copying a commander (such as a
Body Double, for example, copying a commander in a player’s graveyard) is not a
commander.
903.4. The color identity of a deck’s commander is the color or colors of any mana symbols in that
card’s mana cost or rules text, plus any colors defined by its characteristic-defining abilities (see
rule 604.3).
Example: Bosh, Iron Golem is a legendary artifact creature with mana cost {8} and the
ability “{3}{R}, Sacrifice an artifact: Bosh, Iron Golem deals damage equal to the
sacrificed artifact's converted mana cost to target creature or player.” Bosh’s color identity
is red.
903.4a Color identity is established before the game begins.
903.4b Reminder text is ignored when determining a commander’s color identity. See rule 206.2.
903.5. Each Commander deck is subject to the following deck construction rules.
903.5a Each deck must contain exactly 100 cards, including its commander.
903.5b Other than basic lands, each card in a Commander deck must have a different English name.
903.5c A card can’t be included in a Commander deck if it is any color, as defined by its mana cost
or characteristic-defining abilities, that isn’t part of the commander’s color identity or if it has
any colored mana symbols in its mana cost or rules text that aren’t of a color in the
commander’s color identity.
Example: Wort, the Raidmother is a legendary creature with mana cost {4}{R/G}{R/G}.
Wort’s color identity is red and green. Each card in a Wort Commander deck must be
only red, only green, both red and green, or have no color. Each mana symbol in the

mana cost or rules text of a card in this deck must be only red, only green, both red and
green, or have no color.
903.5d A card with a basic land type may be included in a Commander deck only if each color of
mana it could produce is included in the commander’s color identity.
Example: Wort, the Raidmother’s color identity is red and green. A Wort Commander
deck may include land cards with the basic land types Mountain and/or Forest. It can’t
include any land cards with the basic land types Plains, Island, or Swamp.
903.6. At the start of the game, each player puts his or her commander from his or her deck face up into
the command zone. Then each player shuffles the remaining 99 cards of his or her deck so that the
cards are in a random order. Those cards become the player’s library.
903.7. Once the starting player has been determined, each player sets his or her life total to 40 and
draws a hand of seven cards.
903.8. The Commander variant uses an alternate mulligan rule. Each time a player takes a mulligan,
rather than shuffling his or her entire hand of cards into his or her library, that player exiles any
number of cards from his or her hand. Then the player draws a number of cards equal to one less
than the number of cards he or she exiled this way. Once a player keeps an opening hand, that
player shuffles all cards he or she exiled this way into his or her library.
903.9. If mana would be added to a player’s mana pool of a color that isn’t in the color identity of that
player’s commander, that amount of colorless mana is added to that player’s mana pool instead.
903.10. A player may cast a commander he or she owns from the command zone. Doing so costs that
player an additional {2} for each previous time he or she cast that commander from the command
zone that game.
903.11. If a commander would be put into its owner’s graveyard from anywhere, that player may put it
into the command zone instead.
903.12. If a commander would be put into the exile zone from anywhere, its owner may put it into the
command zone instead.
903.13. If a card is put into the exile zone face down from anywhere, and a player is allowed to look at
that card in exile, the player must immediately do so. If it’s a commander owned by another player,
the player that looked at it turns it face up and puts it into the command zone.
903.14. The Commander variant includes the following specification for winning and losing the game.
All other rules for ending the game also apply. (See rule 104.)
903.14a A player that’s been dealt 21 or more combat damage by the same commander over the
course of the game loses the game. (This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
904. Archenemy
904.1. In the Archenemy variant, a team of players faces off against a single opponent bolstered with
powerful scheme cards. The Archenemy variant uses all the normal rules for a Magic game, with
the following additions.
904.2. The default setup for an Archenemy game is the Team vs. Team multiplayer variant (see rule
808) involving exactly two teams. The attack multiple players option (see rule 802) and the shared
team turns option (see rule 805) are used; no other multiplayer options are used.

 904.2a One of the teams consists of exactly one player, who is designated the archenemy.
904.2b The other team consists of any number of players.
904.3. In addition to the normal game materials, the archenemy needs a scheme deck of at least twenty
scheme cards. A scheme deck may contain no more than two of any card with a particular English
name. (See rule 311, “Schemes.”)
904.4. At the start of the game, the archenemy shuffles his or her scheme deck so that the cards are in a
random order. The scheme deck is placed face down next to the archenemy’s library. All scheme
cards remain in the command zone throughout the game, both while they’re part of a scheme deck
and while they’re face up.
904.5. The archenemy’s starting life total is 40. Each other player’s starting life total is 20.
904.6. Rather than a randomly determined player, the archenemy takes the first turn of the game.
904.7. The owner of a scheme card is the player who started the game with it in the command zone. The
controller of a face-up scheme card is its owner.
904.8. Any abilities of a face-up scheme card in the command zone function from that zone. The card’s
static abilities affect the game, its triggered abilities may trigger, and its activated abilities may be
activated.
904.9. Immediately after the archenemy’s precombat main phase begins during each of his or her turns,
that player moves the top card of his or her scheme deck off that scheme deck and turns it face up.
This is called “setting that scheme in motion.” (See rule 701.21.) This turn-based action doesn’t use
the stack. Abilities of that scheme card that trigger “When you set this scheme in motion” trigger.
904.10. If a non-ongoing scheme card is face up in the command zone, and it isn’t the source of a
triggered ability that has triggered but not yet left the stack, that scheme card is turned face down
and put on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck the next time a player would receive priority.
(This is a state-based action. See rule 704.)
904.11. Once an ongoing scheme card is set in motion, it remains face up in the command zone until an
ability causes it to be abandoned (see rule 701.22).
904.12. Supervillain Rumble Option
904.12a As an alternative option, players may play a Free-for-All game in which each player has his
or her own scheme deck. The attack multiple players option (see rule 802) is used; no other
multiplayer options are used.
904.12b Each player in this game is an archenemy.
904.12c As in a normal Free-for-All game, the starting player is randomly determined. All other
rules that apply to the archenemy in an Archenemy game apply to each player in a Supervillain
Rumble game.

 Glossary
Abandon
To turn a face-up ongoing scheme card face down and put it on the bottom of its owner’s scheme deck. See
rule 701.22, “Abandon.”
Ability
1. Text on an object that explains what that object does or can do.
2. An activated or triggered ability on the stack. This kind of ability is an object.
See rule 112, “Abilities,” and section 6, “Spells, Abilities, and Effects.”
Ability Word
An italicized word with no rules meaning that ties together abilities on different cards that have similar
functionality. See rule 206.2c.
Absorb
A keyword ability that prevents damage. See rule 702.62, “Absorb.”
Activate
To put an activated ability onto the stack and pay its costs, so that it will eventually resolve and have its
effect. See rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
Activated Ability
A kind of ability. Activated abilities are written as “[Cost]: [Effect.] [Activation instructions (if any).]” See
rule 112, “Abilities,” and rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
Activation Cost
Everything that appears before the colon in an activated ability’s text. It must be paid to activate the ability.
See rule 117, “Costs,” and rule 602, “Activating Activated Abilities.”
Active Player
The player whose turn it is. See rule 102.1.
Active Player, Nonactive Player Order
A system that determines the order by which players make choices if multiple players are instructed to
make choices at the same time. See rule 101.4. This rule is modified for games using the shared team turns
option; see rule 805.6.
Active Team
The team whose turn it is in a game using the shared team turns option. See rule 805.4a.
Additional Cost
A cost a spell may have that its controller may pay (or, in some cases, must pay) in addition to its mana
cost to cast that spell. See rule 117, “Costs,” and rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
Affinity
A keyword ability that reduces how much mana you need to spend to cast a spell. See rule 702.39,
“Affinity.”
Alternating Teams Variant
A multiplayer variant played among two or more teams of equal size. See rule 811, “Alternating Teams
Variant.”
Alternative Cost
A cost a spell may have that its controller can pay rather than paying its mana cost. See rule 117, “Costs,”
and rule 601, “Casting Spells.”

Amplify
A keyword ability than can have a creature enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it. See rule 702.36,
“Amplify.”
Annihilator
A keyword ability that can make a creature particularly brutal when it attacks. See rule 702.84,
“Annihilator.”
Ante
1. A zone used only when playing “for keeps.”
2. To put a card into the ante zone.
See rule 407, “Ante.”
APNAP Order
See Active Player, Nonactive Player Order.
Archenemy
1. A casual variant in which a team of players faces off against a single opponent bolstered with powerful
scheme cards. See rule 904, “Archenemy.”
2. A player in an Archenemy game who is playing with a scheme deck.
Artifact
A card type. An artifact is a permanent. See rule 301, “Artifacts.”
Artifact Creature
A combination of artifact and creature that’s subject to the rules for both. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule
302, “Creatures.”
Artifact Land
A combination of artifact and land that’s subject to the rules for both. Artifact lands can only be played as
lands, not cast as spells. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 305, “Lands.”
Artifact Type
A subtype that’s correlated to the artifact card type. See rule 301, “Artifacts.” See rule 204.3f for the list of
artifact types.
As Though
Text used to indicate that the game, for some specific purpose, treats a condition as true even though it’s
not. See rule 609.4.
Assign Combat Damage
To determine how an attacking or blocking creature will deal its combat damage. See rule 510, “Combat
Damage Step.”
At End of Turn (Obsolete)
A trigger condition printed on abilities that triggered at the beginning of the end step (which is not the last
thing to happen in the turn). Cards that were printed with that text have received errata in the Oracle card
reference to say “at the beginning of the end step” or “at the beginning of the next end step.” See rule 513,
“End Step.”
Attach
To move an Aura, Equipment, or Fortification onto another object. See rule 701.3, “Attach.”

Attack
To send a creature into combat offensively. A creature can attack a player or a planeswalker. See rule 508,
“Declare Attackers Step.”
Attack Alone
A creature “attacks alone” if it’s the only creature declared as an attacker during the declare attackers step.
A creature “is attacking alone” if it’s attacking but no other creatures are. See rule 506.5.
Attack Left Option
An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants. See rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right
Options.”
Attack Multiple Players Option
An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants. See rule 802, “Attack Multiple Players Option.”
Attack Right Option
An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants. See rule 803, “Attack Left and Attack Right
Options.”
Attacking Creature
A creature that has either been declared as part of a legal attack during the combat phase (once all costs to
attack, if any, have been paid), or a creature that has been put onto the battlefield attacking. It remains an
attacking creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See
rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”
Attacks and Isn’t Blocked
An ability that triggers when a creature “attacks and isn’t blocked” triggers when the creature becomes an
unblocked attacking creature. See rule 509.1h.
Aura
An enchantment subtype. Aura spells target objects or players, and Aura permanents are attached to objects
or players. See rule 303, “Enchantments,” and rule 702.5, “Enchant.”
Aura Swap
A keyword ability that lets you exchange an Aura on the battlefield with one in your hand. See rule 702.63,
“Aura Swap.”
Banding, “Bands with Other”
Banding is a keyword ability that modifies the rules for declaring attackers and assigning combat damage.
“Bands with other” is a specialized version of the ability. See rule 702.20, “Banding.”
Basic
A supertype that’s normally relevant on lands. Any land with this supertype is a basic land. See rule 204.4,
“Supertypes.”
Basic Landcycling
See Typecycling.
Basic Land Type
There are five “basic land types”: Plains, Island, Swamp, Mountain, and Forest. Each one has a mana
ability associated with it. See rule 305, “Lands.”
Battle Cry
A keyword ability that makes other attacking creatures better in combat. See rule 702.89, “Battle Cry.”

Battlefield
A zone. The battlefield is the zone in which permanents exist. It used to be known as the “in-play” zone.
See rule 403, “Battlefield.”
Becomes
A word used in some trigger events to indicate a change in status or characteristics. See rule 603.2d.
Beginning of Combat Step
Part of the turn. This step is the first step of the combat phase. See rule 507, “Beginning of Combat Step.”
Beginning Phase
Part of the turn. This phase is the first phase of the turn. See rule 501, “Beginning Phase.”
Block
To send a creature into combat defensively. A creature can block an attacking creature. See rule 509,
“Declare Blockers Step.”
Block Alone
A creature “blocks alone” if it’s the only creature declared as a blocker during the declare blockers step. A
creature “is blocking alone” if it’s blocking but no other creatures are. See rule 506.5.
Blocked Creature
An attacking creature that another creature blocks or that an effect causes to become blocked. It remains a
blocked creature until it’s removed from combat, an effect says that it becomes unblocked, or the combat
phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
Blocking Creature
A creature that has either been declared as part of a legal block during the combat phase (once all costs to
block, if any, have been paid), or a creature that has been put onto the battlefield blocking. It remains a
blocking creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase ends, whichever comes first. See rule
509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
Bloodthirst
A keyword ability that can have a creature enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it. See rule 702.52,
“Bloodthirst.”
Bury (Obsolete)
A term that meant “put [a permanent] into its owner’s graveyard.” In general, cards that were printed with
the term “bury” have received errata in the Oracle card reference to read, “Destroy [a permanent]. It can’t
be regenerated,” or “Sacrifice [a permanent].”
Bushido
A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.43, “Bushido.”
Buyback
A keyword ability of instants and sorceries that can let the spell return to its owner’s hand as it resolves.
See rule 702.25, “Buyback.”
Card
The standard component of the game: a Magic card with a Magic card front and a Magic card back. Cards
may be traditional or nontraditional. Tokens aren’t considered cards. In the text of spells or abilities, the
term “card” is used only to refer to a card that’s not on the battlefield or on the stack, such as a creature
card in a player’s hand. See rule 108, “Cards.”

Card Type
A characteristic. Except for abilities on the stack, each object has a card type, even if that object isn’t a
card. Each card type has its own rules. See rule 204, “Type Line,” and section 3, “Card Types.”
Cascade
A keyword ability that may let a player cast a random extra spell for no cost. See rule 702.83, “Cascade.”
Cast
To take a spell from where it is (usually the hand), put it on the stack, and pay its costs, so that it will
eventually resolve and have its effect. See rule 601, “Casting Spells.”
Caster (Obsolete)
An obsolete term that referred to the player who cast a spell. In general, cards that were printed with the
term “caster” have received errata in the Oracle card reference to say “controller.”
Casting Cost (Obsolete)
An obsolete term for mana cost. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card
reference.
Champion, Championed
“Champion” is a keyword ability that lets one creature temporarily replace another. A permanent is
“championed” by another permanent if the latter exiles the former as the direct result of a champion ability.
See rule 702.70, “Champion.”
Change a Target
To choose a new, legal target for a spell or ability. See rule 114.6.
Changeling
A characteristic-defining ability that grants the object it’s on every creature type. See rule 702.71,
“Changeling.”
Chaos Ability
An ability of a plane card that triggers “Whenever you roll {C}” on the planar die in the Planar Magic
casual variant. See rule 309.7.
Chaos Symbol
The chaos symbol {C} appears on the planar die and in some triggered abilities of plane cards in the Planar
Magic casual variant. See rule 107.12.
Characteristics
Information that defines an object. See rule 109.3.
Characteristic-Defining Ability
A kind of static ability that conveys information about an object’s characteristics that would normally be
found elsewhere on that object (such as in its mana cost, type line, or power/toughness box). See rule 604.3.
Clash
To have a mini-contest involving the top cards of players’ libraries. See rule 701.19, “Clash.”
Cleanup Step
Part of the turn. This step is the second and final step of the ending phase. See rule 514, “Cleanup Step.”
Collector Number
A number printed on most cards that has no effect on game play. See rule 211, “Information Below the
Text Box.”

Color
1. A characteristic of an object. See rule 105, “Colors,” and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
2. An attribute mana may have. See rule 106, “Mana.”
Colorless
1. An object with no color is colorless. Colorless is not a color. See rule 105, “Colors,” and rule 202,
“Mana Cost and Color.”
2. A type of mana. See rule 106, “Mana,” and rule 107.4c.
Color Identity
A set of colors that determines what cards may be included in a deck for the Commander casual variant.
See rule 903.4.
Combat Damage
Damage dealt during the combat damage step by attacking creatures and blocking creatures as a
consequence of combat. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
Combat Damage Step
Part of the turn. This step is the fourth step of the combat phase. See rule 510, “Combat Damage Step.”
Combat Phase
Part of the turn. This phase is the third phase of the turn. See rule 506, “Combat Phase.”
Command
A zone for certain specialized objects that have an overarching effect on the game, yet are not permanents
and cannot be destroyed. See rule 408, “Command.”
Commander
1. A casual variant in which each deck is led by a legendary creature. See rule 903, “Commander.”
2. A designation given to one legendary creature card in each player’s deck in the Commander casual
variant.
Concede
To quit the game. Conceding a game immediately causes that player to leave that game and lose that game.
See rule 104, “Ending the Game.”
Conspire
A keyword ability that creates a copy of a spell. See rule 702.76, “Conspire.”
Constructed
A way of playing in which each player creates his or her own deck ahead of time. See rule 100.2a.
Continuous Effect
An effect that modifies characteristics of objects, modifies control of objects, or affects players or the rules
of the game, for a fixed or indefinite period. See rule 611, “Continuous Effects.”
Continuous Artifact (Obsolete)
An obsolete term that appeared on the type line of artifacts without activated abilities. Cards printed with
this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to simply say “Artifact.”
Control, Controller
“Control” is the system that determines who gets to use an object in the game. An object’s “controller” is
the player who currently controls it. See rule 108.4.

Control Another Player
To make all choices and decisions that player is allowed to make, or is told to make, by rules or by any
objects. See rule 711, “Controlling Another Player.”
Converted Mana Cost
The total amount of mana in a mana cost, regardless of color. See rule 202.3.
Convoke
A keyword ability that reduces how much mana you need to spend to cast a spell. See rule 702.49,
“Convoke.”
Copiable Values
Values of an object’s characteristics that are checked by copy effects. See rules 706.2 and 706.3.
Copy
1. To create a new object whose copiable values have been set to those of another object.
2. An object whose copiable values have been set to those of another object.
See rule 706, “Copying Objects.”
Cost
An action or payment necessary to take another action or to stop another action from taking place. See rule
117, “Costs.”
Counter
1. To cancel a spell or ability so it doesn’t resolve and none of its effects occur. See rule 701.5, “Counter.”
2. A marker placed on an object or player that modifies its characteristics or interacts with a rule or ability.
See rule 121, “Counters.”
Counts As (Obsolete)
Some older cards were printed with text stating that the card “counts as” something. Cards printed with this
text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to state that the card actually is that thing.
Creature
A card type. A creature is a permanent. See rule 302, “Creatures.”
Creature Type
A subtype that’s correlated to the creature card type and the tribal card type. See rule 302, “Creatures,” and
rule 308, “Tribals.” See rule 204.3k for the list of creature types.
Cumulative Upkeep
A keyword ability that imposes an increasing cost to keep a permanent on the battlefield. See rule 702.22,
“Cumulative Upkeep.”
Cycling
A keyword ability that lets a card be discarded and replaced with a new card. See rule 702.27, “Cycling.”
Damage
Objects can deal “damage” to creatures, planeswalkers, and players. This is generally detrimental to the
object or player that receives that damage. See rule 119, “Damage.”
Damage Assignment Order
The order, announced during the declare blockers step, that an attacking creature will assign its combat
damage among the multiple creatures blocking it, or that a blocking creature will assign its combat damage
among the multiple creatures it’s blocking. See rules 509.2 and 509.3.

Deal
See Damage.
Deathtouch
A keyword ability that causes damage dealt by an object to be especially effective. See rule 702.2,
“Deathtouch.”
Deck
The collection of cards a player starts the game with; it becomes that player’s library. See rule 100,
“General,” and rule 103, “Starting the Game.”
Declare Attackers
To choose a set of creatures that will attack, declare whether each creature is attacking the defending player
or a planeswalker that player controls, and pay any costs required to allow those creatures to attack. See
rule 508.1.
Declare Attackers Step
Part of the turn. This step is the second step of the combat phase. See rule 508, “Declare Attackers Step.”
Declare Blockers
To choose a set of creatures that will block, declare which attacking creature each creature is blocking, and
pay any costs required to allow those creatures to block. See rule 509.1.
Declare Blockers Step
Part of the turn. This step is the third step of the combat phase. See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
Defender
A keyword ability that prohibits a creature from attacking. See rule 702.3, “Defender.”
Defending Player
The player who can be attacked, and whose planeswalkers can be attacked, during the combat phase. See
rule 506.2. In certain multiplayer games, there may be more than one defending player; see rule 802,
“Attack Multiple Players Option,” and rule 810.7.
Defending Team
The team who can be attacked, and whose planeswalkers can be attacked, during the combat phase of a
Two-Headed Giant game. See rule 810.7.
Delayed Triggered Ability
An ability created by effects generated when some spells or abilities resolve, or when some replacement
effects are applied, that does something later on rather than at that time. See rule 603.7.
Delve
A keyword ability that reduces how much mana you need to spend to cast a spell. See rule 702.64, “Delve.”
Dependency
A system that may be used to determine in which order continuous effects in the same layer or sublayer are
applied. See rule 613.7. See also Timestamp Order.
Deploy Creatures Option
An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants to pass control of creatures between teammates.
See rule 804, “Deploy Creatures Option.”
Destroy
To move a permanent from the battlefield to its owner’s graveyard. See rule 701.6, “Destroy.”

Devour
A keyword ability that can have a creature enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it. See rule 702.80,
“Devour.”
Dies
A creature “dies” if it is put into a graveyard from the battlefield. See rule 700.6. (This term will be
introduced in the Magic 2012 core set. Some older cards will receive updated wordings in the mid-July
2011 Oracle update. These updates will not affect how those cards function.)
Discard
To move a card from its owner’s hand to that player’s graveyard. See rule 701.7, “Discard.”
Double Strike
A keyword ability that lets a creature deal its combat damage twice. See rule 702.4, “Double Strike.”
Draw
1. To put the top card of a player’s library into his or her hand as a turn-based action or as the result of an
effect that uses the word “draw.” See rule 120, “Drawing a Card.”
2. The result of a game in which neither player wins or loses. See rule 104.4.
Draw Step
Part of the turn. This step is the third and final step of the beginning phase. See rule 504, “Draw Step.”
Dredge
A keyword ability that lets a player return a card from his or her graveyard to his or her hand. See rule
702.50, “Dredge.”
During (Obsolete)
Some older cards used the phrase “during [phase], [action].” These abilities were called “phase abilities.”
In general, cards that were printed with phase abilities have received errata in the Oracle card reference so
they have abilities that trigger at the beginning of a step or phase. “During” still appears in current card
text, but only in its normal English sense and not as game terminology.
Echo
A keyword ability that imposes a cost to keep a permanent on the battlefield. See rule 702.28, “Echo.”
EDH (Obsolete)
An older name for the Commander casual variant. See rule 903, “Commander.”
Effect
Something that happens in the game as a result of a spell or ability. See rule 609, “Effects.”
Emblem
An emblem is a marker used to represent an object that has one or more abilities, but no other
characteristics. See rule 113, “Emblems.”
Emperor
The middle player on each team in an Emperor game. See rule 809, “Emperor Variant.”
Emperor Variant
A multiplayer variant played among three-player teams. See rule 809, “Emperor Variant.”
Enchant
A keyword ability that restricts what an Aura spell can target and what an Aura permanent can be attached
to. See rule 303, “Enchantments,” and rule 702.5, “Enchant.”

Enchantment
A card type. An enchantment is a permanent. See rule 303, “Enchantments.” See also Aura.
Enchantment Type
A subtype that’s correlated to the enchantment card type. See rule 303, “Enchantments.” See rule 204.3g
for the list of enchantment types.
End of Combat Step
Part of the turn. This step is the fifth and final step of the combat phase. See rule 511, “End of Combat
Step.”
End Step
Part of the turn. This step is the first step of the ending phase. See rule 513, “End Step.”
End the Turn
To “end the turn” as the result of an effect is to perform an expedited process that skips nearly everything
else that would happen that turn. See rule 712, “Ending the Turn.”
Ending Phase
Part of the turn. This phase is the fifth and final phase of the turn. See rule 512, “Ending Phase.”
Enters the Battlefield
A nontoken permanent “enters the battlefield” when it’s moved onto the battlefield from another zone. A
token “enters the battlefield” when it’s created. See rules 403.3, 603.6a, 603.6e, and 614.12.
Entwine
A keyword ability that lets a player choose all modes for a spell rather than just one. See rule 702.40,
“Entwine.”
Epic
A keyword ability that lets a player copy a spell at the beginning of each of his or her upkeeps at the
expense of casting any other spells for the rest of the game. See rule 702.48, “Epic.”
Equip
A keyword ability that lets a player attach an Equipment to a creature he or she controls. See rule 301,
“Artifacts,” and rule 702.6, “Equip.”
Equipment
An artifact subtype. Equipment can be attached to creatures. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 702.6,
“Equip.”
Evasion Ability
An ability that restricts what creatures can block an attacking creature. See rules 509.1b–c.
Event
Anything that happens in a game. See rule 700.1.
Evoke
A keyword ability that causes a permanent to be sacrificed when it enters the battlefield. See rule 702.72,
“Evoke.”
Exalted
A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.81, “Exalted.”
Exchange
To swap two things, such as objects, sets of objects, or life totals. See rule 701.8, “Exchange.”

Exile
1. A zone. Exile is essentially a holding area for cards. It used to be known as the “removed-from-the-
game” zone.
2. To put an object into the exile zone from whatever zone it’s currently in. An “exiled” card is one that’s
been put into the exile zone.
See rule 406, “Exile.”
Expansion Symbol
A characteristic, and part of a card. A card’s expansion symbol is a small icon normally printed below the
right edge of the illustration. See rule 205, “Expansion Symbol.”
Extra Turn
A turn created by an effect of a spell or ability. See rule 500.7. For rules about extra turns in a multiplayer
game using the shared team turns option, see 805.8. For rules about extra turns in a Grand Melee game, see
rule 807.4.
Face Down
1. A card is “face down” if it’s physically positioned so the card back is showing. Cards in some zones are
normally kept face down. See section 4, “Zones.”
2. A status a permanent may have. See rule 110.6 and rule 702.35, “Morph.”
3. Face-down spells have additional rules. See rule 707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents,” and rule
702.35, “Morph.”
Face Up
1. A card is “face up” if it’s physically positioned so the card front is showing. Cards in some zones are
normally kept face up. See section 4, “Zones.”
2. A default status a permanent may have. See rule 110.6 and rule 702.35, “Morph.”
Fading
A keyword ability that limits how long a permanent remains on the battlefield. See rule 702.30, “Fading.”
Fateseal
To manipulate some of the cards on top of an opponent’s library. See rule 701.18, “Fateseal.”
Fear
A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.34, “Fear.”
First Strike
A keyword ability that lets a creature deal its combat damage before other creatures. See rule 702.7, “First
Strike.”
Flanking
A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.23, “Flanking.”
Flash
A keyword ability that lets a player play a card any time he or she could cast an instant. See rule 702.8,
“Flash.”
Flashback
A keyword ability that lets a player cast a card from his or her graveyard. See rule 702.32, “Flashback.”
Flavor Text
Text in italics (but not in parentheses) in the text box of a card that has no effect on play. See rule 206.2.

Flip Cards
Cards with a two-part card frame (one part of which is printed upside down) on a single card. See rule 709,
“Flip Cards.”
Flipped
A status a permanent may have. See rule 110.6 and rule 709, “Flip Cards.” See also Unflipped.
Flipping a Coin
A method of randomization with two possible outcomes of equal likelihood. See rule 705, “Flipping a
Coin.”
Flying
A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.9, “Flying.”
Forecast
A keyword ability that allows an activated ability to be activated from a player’s hand. See rule 702.55,
“Forecast.”
Forest
One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {G} to your mana
pool.” See rule 305.6.
Forestcycling
See Typecycling.
Forestwalk
See Landwalk.
Fortification
An artifact subtype. Fortifications can be attached to lands. See rule 301, “Artifacts,” and rule 702.65,
“Fortify.”
Fortify
A keyword ability that lets a player attach a Fortification to a land he or she controls. See rule 301,
“Artifacts,” and rule 702.65, “Fortify.”
Frenzy
A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.66, “Frenzy.”
Free-for-All
A multiplayer variant in which a group of players compete as individuals against each other. See rule 806,
“Free-for-All Variant.”
General
Any player in the Emperor multiplayer variant who isn’t an emperor. See rule 809, “Emperor Variant.”
Generic Mana
Mana in a cost not represented by colored mana symbols; it can be paid with mana of any type. See rule
107.4.
Global Enchantment (Obsolete)
An obsolete term for a non-Aura enchantment. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the
Oracle card reference.

Graft
A keyword ability that has a permanent enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it and can move those
counters to other creatures. See rule 702.56, “Graft.”
Grand Melee
A multiplayer variant in which a large group of players (usually ten or more) compete as individuals
against each other. See rule 807, “Grand Melee Variant.”
Gravestorm
A keyword ability that creates copies of a spell. See rule 702.67, “Gravestorm.”
Graveyard
1. A zone. A player’s graveyard is his or her discard pile.
2. All the cards in a player’s graveyard.
See rule 404, “Graveyard.”
Hand
1. A zone. A player’s hand is where that player holds cards he or she has drawn but not played yet.
2. All the cards in a player’s hand.
See rule 402, “Hand.”
Hand Modifier
A characteristic that only vanguards have. See rule 209, “Hand Modifier.”
Haste
A keyword ability that lets a creature ignore the “summoning sickness” rule. See rule 702.10, “Haste,” and
rule 302.6.
Haunt
A keyword ability that exiles cards. A card exiled this way “haunts” a creature targeted by the haunt ability.
See rule 702.53, “Haunt.”
Hexproof
A keyword ability that precludes a permanent or player from being targeted by an opponent. See rule
702.11, “Hexproof.”
Hidden Zone
A zone in which not all players can be expected to see the cards’ faces. See rule 400.2. See also Public
Zone.
Hideaway
A keyword ability that lets a player store a secret card. See rule 702.73, “Hideaway.”
Horsemanship
A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.29, “Horsemanship.”
Hybrid Card
A card with one or more hybrid mana symbols in its mana cost. See rule 202.2d.
Hybrid Mana Symbols
A mana symbol that represents a cost that can be paid in one of two ways. See rule 107.4.
If
See Intervening “If” Clause.

Illegal Action
An action that violates the rules of the game and/or requirements or restrictions created by effects. See rule
716, “Handling Illegal Actions.”
Illegal Target
A target that no longer exists or no longer meets the specifications stated by the spell or ability that’s
targeting it. See rule 608.2b.
Illustration
A picture printed on the upper half of a card that has no effect on game play. See rule 203, “Illustration.”
Illustration Credit
Information printed directly below the text box that has no effect on game play. See rule 211, “Information
Below the Text Box.”
Imprint
“Imprint” used to be a keyword ability. It is now an ability word and has no rules meaning. All cards
printed with the imprint keyword have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
In Play (Obsolete)
An obsolete term for the battlefield. Cards that were printed with text that contain the phrases “in play,”
“from play,” “into play,” or the like are referring to the battlefield and have received errata in the Oracle
card reference. See Battlefield.
In Response To
An instant spell that’s been cast, or an activated ability that’s been activated, while another spell or ability
is on the stack has been cast or activated “in response to” the earlier spell or ability. See rule 116.7.
Independent
See Dependency.
Indestructible
An attribute of a permanent that precludes it from being destroyed. See rule 700.4.
Infect
A keyword ability that affects how an object deals damage to creatures and players. See rule 702.88,
“Infect.”
Instant
A card type. An instant is not a permanent. See rule 304, “Instants.”
Instead
Effects that use the word “instead” are replacement effects. The word “instead” indicates what an event will
be replaced with. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”
Interrupt (Obsolete)
An obsolete card type. All cards printed with this card type are now instants. All abilities that, as printed,
said a player could “play as an interrupt” can now be activated like any other activated abilities (unless
they’re mana abilities, in which case they follow those rules instead). All relevant cards have been given
errata in the Oracle card reference.
Intervening “If” Clause
A specially worded condition checked as a triggered ability would trigger and again as it would resolve.
See rule 603.4

Intimidate
A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked. See rule 702.12, “Intimidate.”
Island
One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {U} to your mana
pool.” See rule 305.6.
Islandcycling
See Typecycling.
Islandhome (Obsolete)
An obsolete keyword ability that meant “This creature can’t attack unless defending player controls an
Island” and “When you control no Islands, sacrifice this creature.” Cards printed with this ability have been
given errata in the Oracle card reference.
Islandwalk
See Landwalk.
Keyword Ability
A game term, such as “flying” or “haste,” used as shorthand for a longer ability or group of abilities. See
rule 702, “Keyword Abilities.”
Keyword Action
A verb, such as “destroy” or “cast,” used as a game term rather than as its normal English meaning. See
rule 701, “Keyword Actions.”
Kicker, Kicked
Kicker is a keyword ability that represents an optional additional cost. A spell has been kicked if its
controller declared the intention to pay any or all of its kicker costs. See rule 702.31, “Kicker.”
Land
A card type. A land is a permanent. See rule 305, “Lands.”
Land Type
A subtype that’s correlated to the land card type. See rule 305, “Lands.” See rule 204.3h for the list of land
types.
Landwalk
A generic term for a group of keyword abilities that restrict whether a creature may be blocked. See rule
702.13, “Landwalk.”
Last Known Information
Information about an object that’s no longer in the zone it’s expected to be in, or information about a player
that’s no longer in the game. This information captures that object’s last existence in that zone or that
player’s last existence in the game. See rules 112.7a, 608.2b, 608.2g, and 800.4f.
Layer
A system used to determine in which order continuous effects are applied. See rule 613, “Interaction of
Continuous Effects.” See also Dependency, Timestamp Order.
Leaves the Battlefield
A permanent “leaves the battlefield” when it’s moved from the battlefield to another zone, or (if it’s phased
in) when it leaves the game because its owner leaves the game. See rules 603.6c and 603.6d.

Legal Text
Information printed directly below the text box that has no effect on game play. See rule 211, “Information
Below the Text Box.”
Legend (Obsolete)
An obsolete creature type. Cards printed with this subtype have been given errata in the Oracle card
reference so they have the legendary supertype instead. See Legendary.
Legendary
A supertype that’s normally relevant on permanents. See rule 204.4, “Supertypes.” See also Legend Rule.
Legend Rule
A state-based action that causes all legendary permanents with the same name to be put into their owners’
graveyards. See rule 704.5k.
Lethal Damage
An amount of damage greater than or equal to a creature’s toughness. See rules 119.6, 510.1, and 704.5g.
Level Symbol
A symbol that represents a keyword ability indicating abilities, power, and toughness a leveler card may
have. See rule 107.8 and rule 710, “Leveler Cards.”
Level Up
A keyword ability that can put level counters on a creature. See rule 702.85, “Level Up.”
Leveler Cards
Cards with striated text boxes and three power/toughness boxes. See rule 710, “Leveler Cards.”
Library
1. A zone. A player’s library is where that player draws cards from.
2. All the cards in a player’s library.
See rule 401, “Library.”
Life, Life Total
Each player has an amount of “life,” represented by that player’s “life total.” Life may be gained or lost.
See rule 118, “Life.”
Life Modifier
A characteristic that only vanguards have. See rule 210, “Life Modifier.”
Lifelink
A keyword ability that causes a player to gain life. See rule 702.14, “Lifelink.”
Limited
A way of playing in which each player gets a quantity of unopened Magic product and creates his or her
own deck on the spot. See rule 100.2.
Limited Range of Influence
An optional rule used in some multiplayer games that limits what a player can affect. See rule 801,
“Limited Range of Influence Option.”
Linked Abilities
Two abilities printed on the same object such that one of them causes actions to be taken or objects to be
affected and the other one directly refers to those actions or objects. See rule 607, “Linked Abilities.”

Living Weapon
A keyword ability that causes a creature token to be put onto the battlefield along with the Equipment with
the ability. See rule 702.90, “Living Weapon.”
Local Enchantment (Obsolete)
An obsolete term for an Aura. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
Loop
A set of actions that could be repeated indefinitely. See rule 715, “Taking Shortcuts.”
Lose the Game
There are several ways to lose the game. See rule 104, “Ending the Game,” rule 810.8 (for additional rules
for Two-Headed Giant games), rule 809.5 (for additional rules for Emperor games), and rule 903.14 (for an
additional rule for Commander games).
Loyalty
1. Part of a card that only planeswalkers have. A planeswalker card’s loyalty is printed in its lower right
corner. See rule 208, “Loyalty.”
2. A characteristic that only planeswalkers have. See rule 306.5.
Loyalty Ability
An activated ability with a loyalty symbol in its cost. See rule 606, “Loyalty Abilities.”
Madness
A keyword ability that lets a player cast a card he or she discards. See rule 702.33, “Madness.”
Main Game
The game in which a spell (or ability) that created a subgame was cast (or activated). See rule 714,
“Subgames.”
Main Phase
Part of the turn. The first, or precombat, main phase is the second phase of the turn. The second, or
postcombat, main phase is the fourth phase of the turn. See rule 505, “Main Phase.”
Mana
The primary resource in the game. It is spent to pay costs, usually when casting spells and activating
abilities. See rule 106, “Mana,” rule 107.4, and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
Mana Ability
An activated or triggered ability that could create mana and doesn’t use the stack. See rule 605, “Mana
Abilities.”
Mana Burn (Obsolete)
Older versions of the rules stated that unspent mana caused a player to lose life; this was called “mana
burn.” That rule no longer exists.
Mana Cost
A characteristic, and part of a card. A card’s mana cost is indicated by the mana symbols printed in its
upper right corner. See rule 107.4 and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
Mana Pool
Where mana created by an effect is temporarily stored. See rule 106.4.

Mana Source (Obsolete)
An obsolete card type. All cards printed with this card type are now instants. All abilities that, as printed,
said a player could “play as a mana source” are now mana abilities. All relevant cards have been given
errata in the Oracle card reference.
Mana Symbol
An icon that represents mana or a mana cost. See rule 107.4.
Match
A multiplayer game or a two-player series of games (usually best-two-of-three) played in a tournament. See
rule 100.6.
Maximum Hand Size
The number of cards in hand a player must discard down to during his or her cleanup step. See rule 402.2
and 514.1.
Modal, Mode
A spell or ability is “modal” if it has two or more options preceded by “Choose one —,” “Choose two —,”
“Choose one or both —,” or “[a specified player] chooses one —.” Each option is a “mode.” See rule
700.2.
Modular
A keyword ability that has a permanent enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters on it and can move those
counters to other artifact creatures. See rule 702.41, “Modular.”
Mono Artifact (Obsolete)
An obsolete term that appeared on the type line of artifacts with activated abilities that caused the artifact to
become tapped as a cost. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference to
simply say “Artifact,” and those abilities now include the tap symbol in their costs.
Monocolored
An object with exactly one color is monocolored. Colorless objects aren’t monocolored. See rule 105,
“Colors,” and rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
Monocolored Hybrid Mana Symbols
See Hybrid Mana Symbols.
Morph
A keyword ability that lets a card be cast face down as a 2/2 creature. See rule 702.35, “Morph,” and rule
707, “Face-Down Spells and Permanents.”
Mountain
One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {R} to your mana
pool.” See rule 305.6.
Mountaincycling
See Typecycling.
Mountainwalk
See Landwalk.
Move
To remove a counter from one object and put it on a different object. See rule 121.5.
Some older cards used “move” with respect to Auras; those cards have received errata in the Oracle card
reference and now use the word “attach.”

Mulligan
To take a “mulligan” is to reject a prospective opening hand and draw a new one (usually with one fewer
card). See rule 103.4.
Multicolored
An object with two or more colors is multicolored. Multicolored is not a color. See rule 105, “Colors,” and
rule 202, “Mana Cost and Color.”
Multikicker
Multikicker is a variant of the kicker keyword ability. It represents an optional additional cost that may be
paid any number of times. See rule 702.31, “Kicker.” See also Kicker.
Multiplayer Game
A game that begins with more than two players. See section 8, “Multiplayer Rules.”
Name
A characteristic, and part of a card. A card’s name is printed in its upper left corner. See rule 201, “Name.”
Ninjutsu
A keyword ability that lets a creature suddenly enter combat. See rule 702.47, “Ninjutsu.”
Nonbasic Land
Any land that doesn’t have the supertype “basic.” See rule 204.4, “Supertypes.”
Nontraditional Magic Card
An oversized Magic card that has a Magic back but not a “Deckmaster” back. See rule 108.2.
Object
An ability on the stack, a card, a copy of a card, a token, a spell, or a permanent. See rule 109, “Objects.”
Offering
A keyword ability that modifies when you can cast a spell and how much mana you need to spend to do it.
See rule 702.46, “Offering.”
One-Shot Effect
An effect that does something just once and doesn’t have a duration. See rule 610, “One-Shot Effects.” See
also Continuous Effects.
Ongoing
A supertype that appears only on scheme cards. See rule 204.4, “Supertypes.”
Opening Hand
The hand of cards a player starts the game with, once the player has decided not to take any further
mulligans. See rule 103.4.
Opponent
Someone a player is playing against. See rules 102.2 and 102.3.
Option
An additional rule or set of rules that can be used in a multiplayer game. See rule 800.2.
Oracle
The reference that contains the up-to-date wordings (in English) for all tournament-legal cards. A card’s
Oracle text can be found using the Gatherer card database at http://gatherer.wizards.com. See rule 108.1.

Outside the Game
An object is “outside the game” if it isn’t in any of the game’s zones. See rule 400.10.
Owner
The player who (for purposes of the game) a card, token, or copy of a spell belongs to. See rules 108.3,
110.2, 110.5a, and 111.2.
Pass
To decline to take any action (such as casting a spell or activating an ability) when you have priority. See
rule 116, “Timing and Priority.”
Pass in Succession
All players “pass in succession” if each player in the game (starting with any one of them) opts not to take
an action upon receiving priority. See rule 116, “Timing and Priority.”
Pay
To perform the actions required by a cost. This often means, but is not restricted to, spending resources
such as mana or life. See rule 117, “Costs.”
Permanent
A card or token on the battlefield. See rule 110, “Permanents.”
Permanent Card
A card that could be put onto the battlefield. See rule 110.4a.
Permanent Spell
A spell that will enter the battlefield as a permanent as part of its resolution. See rule 110.4b.
Permanently (Obsolete)
An obsolete term used to indicate that a continuous effect has no duration and thus lasts until the end of the
game. Cards printed with this term have received errata in the Oracle card reference to delete it.
Persist
A keyword ability that can return a creature from the graveyard to the battlefield. See rule 702.77,
“Persist.”
Phase
1. A subsection of a turn. See section 5, “Turn Structure.”
2. A permanent “phases in” when its status changes from phased out to phased in. A permanent “phases
out” when its status changes from phased in to phased out. See rule 702.24, “Phasing.”
Phased In, Phased Out
A status a permanent may have. Phased-in is the default status. Phased-out permanents are treated as
though they do not exist. See rule 110.6 and rule 702.24, “Phasing.” (“Phased-out” was a zone in older
versions of the rules.)
Phasing
A keyword ability that causes a permanent to sometimes be treated as though it does not exist. See rule
702.24, “Phasing.”
Phyrexian Mana Symbol
A mana symbol that represents a cost that can be paid either by spending colored mana or by paying life.
See rule 107.4.
Phyrexian Symbol
A symbol used in rules text to represent any of the five Phyrexian mana symbols. See rule 107.4g.

Pile
A temporary grouping of cards. See rule 700.3.
Placed
If a spell or ability refers to a counter being “placed” on a permanent, it means putting a counter on that
permanent while it’s on the battlefield, or that permanent entering the battlefield with a counter on it. See
rule 121, “Counters.”
Plains
One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {W} to your mana
pool.” See rule 305.6.
Plainscycling
See Typecycling.
Plainswalk
See Landwalk.
Planar Deck
A deck of at least ten plane cards needed to play the Planar Magic casual variant. See rule 901.3.
Planar Die
A specialized six-sided die needed to play the Planar Magic casual variant. See rule 901.3.
Planar Magic
A casual variant in which plane cards add additional abilities and randomness to the game. See rule 901,
“Planar Magic.”
Plane
A card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards in the Planar Magic casual variant. A plane card is not
a permanent. See rule 309, “Planes.”
Planeswalk
To put the face-up plane card on the bottom of its owner’s planar deck face down, then move the top card
of your planar deck off that planar deck and turn it face up in a Planar Magic game. See rule 701.20,
“Planeswalk.”
Planeswalker
A card type. A planeswalker is a permanent. See rule 306, “Planeswalkers.”
Planeswalker Symbol
The planeswalker symbol {PW} appears on the planar die in the Planar Magic casual variant. See rule
107.11.
Planeswalker Type
A subtype that’s correlated to the planeswalker card type. See rule 306, “Planeswalkers.” See rule 204.3i
for the list of planeswalker types. See also Planeswalker Uniqueness Rule.
Planeswalker Uniqueness Rule
A state-based action that causes multiple planeswalkers with the same planeswalker type to be put into their
owners’ graveyards. See rule 704.5j.
Play
1. To play a land is to put a land onto the battlefield as a special action. See rule 115, “Special Actions,”
and rule 305, “Lands.”

2. To play a card is to play that card as a land or cast that card as a spell, whichever is appropriate. See rule
601, “Casting Spells.”
3. (Obsolete) Casting a spell used to be known as playing a spell. Cards with that text have received errata
in the Oracle card reference. See Cast.
4. (Obsolete) Activating an activated ability used to be known as playing an activated ability. Cards with
that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Activate.
5. (Obsolete) The battlefield used to be known as the in-play zone. Cards that were printed with text that
contains the phrases “in play,” “from play,” “into play,” or the like are referring to the battlefield and have
received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Battlefield.
Player
One of the people in the game. See rule 102, “Players.”
Poison Counter
A counter that may be given to a player. See rule 121, “Counters,” and rule 704.5c.
Poisoned
Having one or more poison counters. See rule 121, “Counters.”
Poisonous
A keyword ability that causes a player to get poison counters. See rule 702.68, “Poisonous.”
Poly Artifact (Obsolete)
An obsolete term that appeared on the type line of artifacts with activated abilities that didn’t cause the
artifact to be tapped as a cost. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle card reference
to simply say “Artifact.”
Postcombat Main Phase
A main phase that occurs after a combat phase. See Main Phase.
Power
1. Part of a card that only creatures have. A creature card’s power is printed before the slash in its lower
right corner. See rule 207, “Power/Toughness.”
2. A characteristic that only creatures have. See rule 302.4.
Precombat Main Phase
The first main phase of a turn. See Main Phase.
Prevent
A word used by prevention effects to indicate what damage will not be dealt. See rule 615, “Prevention
Effects.”
Prevention Effect
A kind of continuous effect that watches for a damage event that would happen and completely or partially
prevents the damage that would be dealt. See rule 615, “Prevention Effects.”
Priority
Which player can take actions at any given time is determined by a system of “priority.” See rule 116,
“Timing and Priority.”
Proliferate
To give an additional counter to any number of players and/or permanents that already have a counter. See
rule 701.23, “Proliferate.”

Protection
A keyword ability that provides a range of benefits against objects with a specific quality. See rule 702.15,
“Protection.”
Provoke
A keyword ability that can force a creature to block. See rule 702.37, “Provoke.”
Prowl
A keyword ability that may allow a spell to be cast for an alternative cost. See rule 702.74, “Prowl.”
Public Zone
A zone in which all players can be expected to see the cards’ faces. See rule 400.2. See also Hidden Zone.
Rampage
A keyword ability that can make a creature better in combat. See rule 702.21, “Rampage.”
Range of Influence
See Limited Range of Influence.
Reach
A keyword ability that allows a creature to block an attacking creature with flying. See rule 702.16,
“Reach.” See also Flying.
Rebound
A keyword ability that allows an instant or sorcery spell to be cast a second time. See rule 702.86,
“Rebound.”
Recover
A keyword ability that lets a player return a card from his or her graveyard to his or her hand. See rule
702.57, “Recover.”
Redirect (Obsolete)
Some older cards were printed with the term “redirect” to indicate a redirection effect. Such cards have
received errata in the Oracle card reference so they explicitly state that damage that would be dealt to one
object or player is dealt “instead” to another. See Redirection Effect.
Redirection Effect
A kind of replacement effect that causes damage that would be dealt to one creature, planeswalker, or
player to be dealt instead to another creature, planeswalker, or player. See rule 614.9.
Regenerate
To replace a permanent’s destruction with an alternate sequence of events. See rule 701.11, “Regenerate.”
Reinforce
A keyword ability that lets a player put +1/+1 counters on a creature. See rule 702.75, “Reinforce.”
Reminder Text
Parenthetical text in italics in the text box of a card that summarizes a rule that applies to that card, but is
not actually rules text and has no effect on play. See rule 206.2.
Removed from Combat
Certain events can cause an attacking or blocking creature, or a planeswalker that’s being attacked, to be
“removed from combat.” A permanent that’s removed from combat has no further involvement in that
combat phase. See rule 506.4.

Remove from the Game, Removed, Removed-from-the-Game Zone (Obsolete)
“Remove [something] from the game” is an obsolete term for “exile [something].” “The removed card” is
an obsolete term for “the exiled card.” The removed-from-the-game zone is an obsolete term for the exile
zone. Cards with that text have received errata in the Oracle card reference. See Exile.
Replacement Effect
A kind of continuous effect that watches for a particular event that would happen and completely or
partially replaces that event with a different event. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”
Replicate
A keyword ability that creates copies of a spell. See rule 702.54, “Replicate.”
Requirement
An effect that forces one or more creatures to attack or block. See rules 508.1d and 509.1c.
Resolve
When the spell or ability on top of the stack “resolves,” its instructions are followed and it has its effect.
See rule 608, “Resolving Spells and Abilities.”
Restart the Game
To immediately end the current game and restart it. See rule 104, “Ending the Game.”
Respond
To cast an instant spell or activate an ability while another spell or ability is already on the stack. See rule
116.7.
Restriction
An effect that precludes one or more creatures from attacking or blocking. See rules 508.1c and 509.1b.
Retrace
A keyword ability that lets a player cast a card from his or her graveyard. See rule 702.79, “Retrace.”
Reveal
To show a card to all players for a brief time. See rule 701.12, “Reveal.”
Ripple
A keyword ability that may let a player cast extra cards from his or her library for no cost. See rule 702.58,
“Ripple.”
Rules Text
A characteristic that defines a card’s abilities. See rule 206.1.
Sacrifice
To move a permanent you control to its owner’s graveyard. See rule 701.13, “Sacrifice.”
Scheme
A card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards in the Archenemy casual variant. A scheme card is not
a permanent. See rule 311, “Schemes.”
Scry
To manipulate some of the cards on top of your library. See rule 701.17, “Scry.”
Search
To look at all cards in a stated zone and possibly find a card that matches a given description. See rule
701.14, “Search.”

Set Aside (Obsolete)
“Set [something] aside” is an obsolete term for “exile [something].” Cards with that text have received
errata in the Oracle card reference. See Exile.
Set in Motion
To move a scheme card off the top of your scheme deck and turn it face up. See rule 701.21, “Set in
Motion.”
Shadow
A keyword ability that restricts how a creature may be blocked and which creatures it can block. See rule
702.26, “Shadow.”
Shared Life Total
In the Two-Headed Giant multiplayer variant, each team has a “shared life total” rather than each player
having an individual life total. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
Shared Team Turns Option
An option that may be used in certain multiplayer variants, such as Two-Headed Giant and Archenemy.
See rule 805, “Shared Team Turns Option.”
Shortcut
A mutually understood way for the game to advance forward a number of game choices (either taking an
action or passing priority) without players needing to explicitly identify each such choice. See rule 715,
“Taking Shortcuts.”
Shroud
A keyword ability that precludes a permanent or player from being targeted. See rule 702.17, “Shroud.”
Shuffle
To randomize the cards in a deck (before a game) or library (during a game). See rule 103.1.
Sideboard
Extra cards that may be used to modify a deck between games of a match. See rules 100.4.
Skip
Effects that use the word “skip” are replacement effects. The word “skip” indicates what events, steps,
phases, or turns will be replaced with nothing. See rule 614, “Replacement Effects.”
Slivercycling
See Typecycling.
Snow
A supertype that’s normally relevant on permanents. See rule 204.4, “Supertypes.”
Snow Mana Symbol
The snow mana symbol {S} represents a cost that can be paid with one mana produced by a snow
permanent. See rule 107.4h.
Snow-Covered (Obsolete)
Some older cards were printed with the term “snow-covered” in their rules text. Except when referencing
card names, such cards have received errata in the Oracle card reference to reference the supertype “snow”
instead. See Snow.
Sorcery
A card type. A sorcery is not a permanent. See rule 307, “Sorceries.”

Soulshift
A keyword ability that lets a player return a card from his or her graveyard to his or her hand. See rule
702.44, “Soulshift.”
Source of an Ability
The object that generated that ability. See rule 112.7.
Source of Damage
The object that dealt that damage. See rule 609.7.
Special Action
An action a player may take that doesn’t use the stack. See rule 115, “Special Actions.”
Spell
A card on the stack. Also a copy (of either a card or another spell) on the stack. See rule 111, “Spells.”
Spell Ability
A kind of ability. Spell abilities are abilities that are followed as instructions while an instant or sorcery
spell is resolving. See rule 112.3a.
Spell Type
A subtype that’s correlated to the instant card type and the sorcery card type. See rule 304, “Instants,” and
rule 307, “Sorceries.” See rule 204.3j for the list of spell types.
Splice
A keyword ability that lets a player copy a card’s text box onto another spell. See rule 702.45, “Splice.”
Split Cards
Cards with two card faces on a single card. See rule 708, “Split Cards.”
Split Second
A keyword ability that makes it nearly impossible for a player to respond to a spell. See rule 702.59, “Split
Second.”
Stack
A zone. The stack is the zone in which spells, activated abilities, and triggered abilities wait to resolve. See
rule 405, “Stack.”
Starting Player
The player chosen to take the first turn of a game. See rule 103.2.
Starting Team
The team chosen to take the first turn of a game using the shared team turns option. See rule 103.2.
State-Based Actions
Game actions that happen automatically whenever certain conditions are met. See rule 704, “State-Based
Actions.”
State Trigger
A triggered ability that triggers when a game state is true rather than triggering when an event occurs. See
rule 603.8.
Static Ability
A kind of ability. Static abilities do something all the time rather than being activated or triggered. See rule
112, “Abilities,” and rule 604, “Handling Static Abilities.”

Status
The physical state of a permanent. See rule 110.6.
Step
A subsection of a phase. See section 5, “Turn Structure.”
Storm
A keyword ability that creates copies of a spell. See rule 702.38, “Storm.”
Subgame
A completely separate Magic game created by an effect. See rule 714, “Subgames.”
Subtype
A characteristic that appears after the card type and a long dash on a card’s type line. See rule 204.3,
“Subtypes.”
Successfully Cast (Obsolete)
A term that was printed on some older cards. In general, cards that referred to a spell being “successfully
cast” have received errata in the Oracle card reference to simply refer to a spell being “cast.”
Summon (Obsolete)
Older creature cards were printed with “Summon [creature type]” on their type lines. All such cards have
received errata in the Oracle card reference to say “Creature — [creature type].” (Many of these cards’
creature types have also been updated.) See Creature.
Summoning Sickness Rule
Informal term for a player’s inability to attack with a creature or to activate its abilities that include the tap
symbol or the untap symbol unless the creature has been under that player’s control since the beginning of
that player’s most recent turn. See rule 302.6. See also Haste.
Sunburst
A keyword ability that can have a permanent enter the battlefield with +1/+1 counters or charge counters on
it. See rule 702.42, “Sunburst.”
Supertype
A characteristic that appears before the card type on a card’s type line. Most cards don’t have a supertype.
See rule 204.4, “Supertypes.”
Supervillain Rumble
A Free-for-All game in which each player is an archenemy. See rule 806, “Free-for-All,” and rule 904,
“Archenemy.”
Suspend
A keyword ability that provides an alternate way to play a card. See rule 702.60, “Suspend.” A card is
“suspended” if it’s in the exile zone, has suspend, and has a time counter on it.
Swamp
One of the five basic land types. Any land with this subtype has the ability “{T}: Add {B} to your mana
pool.” See rule 305.6.
Swampcycling
See Typecycling.
Swampwalk
See Landwalk.

Tap
To turn a permanent sideways from an upright position. See rule 701.16, “Tap and Untap.”
Tapped
A status a permanent may have. See rule 110.6 and rule 701.16, “Tap and Untap.” See also Untapped.
Tap Symbol
The tap symbol {T} in an activation cost means “Tap this permanent.” See rule 107.5.
Target
A preselected object, player, and/or zone a spell or ability will affect. See rule 114, “Targets.”
Team
A group of players who share a common victory condition in a multiplayer game. See rule 808, “Team vs.
Team Variant,” rule 809, “Emperor Variant,” rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant,” and rule 811,
“Alternating Teams Variant.”
Teammate
In a multiplayer game between teams, a player’s teammates are the other players on his or her team. See
rule 102.3.
Team vs. Team Variant
A multiplayer variant played among two or more teams, each of which sits together. See rule 808, “Team
vs. Team Variant.”
Text Box
Part of a card. The text box is printed on the lower half of the card and contains the card’s rules text,
reminder text, and flavor text. See rule 206, “Text Box.”
Text-Changing Effect
A continuous effect that changes the text that appears in an object’s text box and/or type line. See rule 612,
“Text-Changing Effects.”
Threshold
“Threshold” used to be a keyword ability. It is now an ability word and has no rules meaning. All cards
printed with the threshold keyword have received errata in the Oracle card reference.
Timestamp Order
A system used to determine in which order continuous effects in the same layer or sublayer are applied. See
rule 613.6. See also Dependency.
Token
A marker used to represent any permanent that isn’t represented by a card. See rule 110.5.
Tombstone Icon
An icon that appears in the upper left of some Odyssey block cards that has no effect on game play. See
rule 107.9.
Total Casting Cost (Obsolete)
An obsolete term for converted mana cost. Cards printed with this text have received errata in the Oracle
card reference.
Total Cost
What a player actually has to pay, in practical terms, to cast a spell or activated ability: the mana cost,
activation cost, or alternative cost, plus all cost increases (including additional costs) and minus all cost
reductions. See rule 601.2e.

Totem Armor
A keyword ability that allows an Aura to protect the permanent it’s enchanting. See rule 702.87, “Totem
Armor.”
Toughness
1. Part of a card that only creatures have. A creature card’s toughness is printed after the slash in its lower
right corner. See rule 207, “Power/Toughness.”
2. A characteristic that only creatures have. See rule 302.4.
Tournament
An organized play activity where players compete against other players. See rule 100.6.
Tournament Rules
Additional rules that apply to games played in a sanctioned tournament. See rule 100.6.
Traditional Magic Card
A Magic card that measures approximately 2.5 inches (6.3 centimeters) by 3.5 inches (8.8 centimeters) and
has a “Deckmaster” back. See rule 108.2.
Trample
A keyword ability that modifies how a creature assigns combat damage. See rule 702.18, “Trample.”
Transfigure
A keyword ability that lets a player search his or her library for a replacement creature card. See rule
702.69, “Transfigure.”
Transmute
A keyword ability that lets a player search his or her library for a replacement card. See rule 702.51,
“Transmute.”
Tribal
A card type. Whether or not a tribal is a permanent depends on its other card type. See rule 308, “Tribals.”
Trigger
Whenever a game event or game state matches a triggered ability’s trigger event, that ability automatically
“triggers.” That means its controller puts it on the stack the next time a player would receive priority. See
rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
Trigger Condition
The first part of a triggered ability, consisting of “when,” “whenever,” or “at” followed by a trigger event.
See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
Triggered Ability
A kind of ability. Triggered abilities begin with the word “when,” “whenever,” or “at.” They’re written as
“[Trigger condition], [effect].” See rule 112, “Abilities,” and rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
Trigger Event
The event that a triggered ability looks for. Whenever the trigger event occurs, the triggered ability triggers.
See rule 603, “Handling Triggered Abilities.”
Turn-Based Actions
Game actions that happen automatically when certain steps or phases begin, or when each step or phase
ends. See rule 703, “Turn-Based Actions.”

Turn Markers
Markers used to keep track of which players are taking turns in a Grand Melee game. See rule 807.4.
Two-Headed Giant Variant
A multiplayer variant played among two-player teams that each have a shared life total and take a
simultaneous turn. See rule 810, “Two-Headed Giant Variant.”
Type
1. An object’s card type or, more broadly, its card type, subtype, and/or supertype. See rule 204, “Type
Line,” and section 3, “Card Types.”
2. An attribute mana has. See rule 106, “Mana.”
Type Icon
An icon that appears in the upper left of some Future Sight cards that has no effect on game play. See rule
107.10.
Type Line
Part of a card. The type line is printed directly below the illustration and contains the card’s card type(s),
subtype(s), and/or supertype(s). See rule 204, “Type Line.”
Type-Changing Effect
An effect that changes an object’s card type, subtype, and/or supertype. See rule 613.1d.
Typecycling
A variant of the cycling ability. See rule 702.27, “Cycling.”
Unattach
To move an Equipment away from the creature it’s attached to so that the Equipment is on the battlefield
but is not equipping anything. See rule 701.3d.
Unblockable
An attribute of a creature that precludes it from being blocked. See rule 700.5.
Unblocked Creature
An attacking creature once no creature has been declared as a blocker for it, unless an effect has caused it to
become blocked. It remains an unblocked creature until it’s removed from combat or the combat phase
ends, whichever comes first. See rule 509, “Declare Blockers Step.”
Unearth
A keyword ability that lets a player return a creature card from his or her graveyard to the battlefield. See
rule 702.82, “Unearth.”
Unflipped
A default status a permanent may have. See rule 110.6 and rule 709, “Flip Cards.” See also Flipped.
Unless
A word used to indicate a certain style of cost. See rule 117.12a.
Untap
To rotate a permanent back to the upright position from a sideways position. See rule 701.16, “Tap and
Untap.”
Untap Step
Part of the turn. This step is the first step of the beginning phase. See rule 502, “Untap Step.”

Untap Symbol
The untap symbol {Q} in an activation cost means “Untap this permanent.” See rule 107.6.
Untapped
A default status a permanent may have. See rule 110.6 and rule 701.16, “Tap and Untap.” See also Tapped.
Upkeep Step
Part of the turn. This step is the second step of the beginning phase. See rule 503, “Upkeep Step.”
Vanguard
1. A casual variant in which each player plays the role of a famous character. See rule 902, “Vanguard.”
2. A card type seen only on nontraditional Magic cards in the Vanguard casual variant. A vanguard card is
not a permanent. See rule 310, “Vanguards.”
Vanishing
A keyword ability that limits how long a permanent remains on the battlefield. See rule 702.61,
“Vanishing.”
Variant
An additional set of rules that determines the style of a multiplayer game. See rule 800.2.
Vigilance
A keyword ability that lets a creature attack without tapping. See rule 702.19, “Vigilance.”
Wall
A creature type with no particular rules meaning. Older cards with the Wall creature type but without
defender had an unwritten ability that precluded them from attacking. Those cards have received errata in
the Oracle card reference to have defender. Some older cards that referenced the Wall creature type have
also received errata. See Defender.
Win the Game
There are several ways to win the game. See rule 104, “Ending the Game,” and rules 810.8 (for additional
rules for Two-Headed Giant games) and rule 809.5 (for additional rules for Emperor games).
Wither
A keyword ability that affects how an object deals damage to a creature. See rule 702.78, “Wither.”
Wizardcycling
See Typecycling.
World
A supertype that’s normally relevant on enchantments. See rule 204.4, “Supertypes.” See also World Rule.
World Rule
A state-based action that causes all permanents with the world supertype except the newest to be put into
their owners’ graveyards. See rule 704.5m.
X
A placeholder for a number that needs to be determined. See rule 107.3.
Y
See X.
You, Your
Words that refer to an object’s controller, its would-be controller (if a player is attempting to cast or
activate it), or its owner (if it has no controller). See rule 109.5.

Zone
A place where objects can be during a game. See section 4, “Zones.”
Zone-Change Triggers
Trigger events that involve objects changing zones. See rule 603.6.

 Credits
Magic: The Gathering Original Game Design: Richard Garfield
Comprehensive Rules Design and Development: Paul Barclay, Beth Moursund, and Bill Rose, with
contributions from Charlie Action, John Carter, Elaine Chase, Laurie Cheers, Stephen D’Angelo, Dave
DeLaney, Brady Dommermuth, Mike Donais, Skaff Elias, Mike Elliott, Richard Garfield, Mark L.
Gottlieb, Dan Gray, Robert Gutschera, Collin Jackson, William Jockusch, Jeff Jordan, Yonemura Kaoru,
Russell Linnemann, Jim Lin, Steve Lord, Sheldon Menery, Michael Phoenix, Mark Rosewater, David
Sachs, Lee Sharpe, Eli Shiffrin, Henry Stern, Matt Tabak, Ingo Warnke, Tom Wylie, Donald X. Vaccarino,
Thijs van Ommen, and Bryan Zembruski
Editing: Del Laugel
Magic Rules Manager: Matt Tabak
The Magic: The Gathering game was designed by Richard Garfield, with contributions from Charlie
Catuna, Skaff Elias, Don Felice, Tom Fontaine, Jim Lin, Joel Mick, Chris Page, Dave Pettey, Barry “Bit”
Reich, Bill Rose, and Elliott Segal. The mana symbols were designed by Christopher Rush.
Thanks to all our project team members and the many others too numerous to mention who have
contributed to this product.
These rules are effective as of June 17, 2011.
Published by Wizards of the Coast LLC, P.O. Box 707, Renton WA 98057-0707, U.S.A. Wizards of the
Coast, Magic: The Gathering, Magic, Oracle, Exodus, Odyssey, Mirrodin, Kamigawa, Ravnica, Time
Spiral, Future Sight, Lorwyn, Shadowmoor, Zendikar, and Scars of Mirrodin are trademarks of Wizards of
the Coast LLC in the U.S.A. and other countries. ©1993–2011 Wizards. U.S. Pat. No. RE 37,957.

 Customer Service Information
Contact the office nearest you.
U.S., Canada, Asia Pacific & Latin America
www.wizards.com/customerservice
Wizards of the Coast LLC
P.O. Box 707
Renton WA 98057-0707
U.S.A.
Tel: 1-800-324-6496 (within the U.S. and Canada)
1-425-204-8069
U.K., Eire & South Africa
Wizards of the Coast LLC c/o Hasbro UK Ltd.
P.O. Box 43
Newport
NP19 4YD
UK
Tel: +08457 125599
Email: [email protected]
All Other European Countries
Wizards of the Coast p/a Hasbro Belgium NV/SA
Industrialaan 1
1702 Groot-Bijgaarden
BELGIUM
Tel: +32.70.233.277
Email: [email protected]
Visit our website: magicthegathering.com